Home

Color LaserJet 8500

Contents

1.
2. WOd Josues J AQ BUO 10109 YOIN O plougjos plousjos dn yold yoInjo JOSUeS JaAOD JOSU S le dn yoid AeL d uyg g Aes pue z AB Jayjolpee4y pundn yI1qg un dn 81Sd 11Sa e10 YIS 1s ae ALK al f Gog ve Og ml M xa Josues MIE 5 Mfu 3 m Jeded ajo Josues ya
3. Yd uoHoejep upm Jeded peog 13 01 10 szLr Bir LAUL g eozr ezie NH Ta lOlISd sg 5 PELT CrANg 3 ON F 18 SUBI kad ima Woclr OCI 105 85 L L Saadwe 64 GHATS 5 Arepucoes a jojo ZX gHdAS F nee oped ise c ANO Fs eBpuyes eA VHaAIs r Josn Wier L SE etsa K l 3Avsdd i lt aag Z z L NHL 808r Hawak I laLlaauo2 jsued alena Cer 7 ostr Jelo Buisny goosr VOd 19 1011409 ezr weer Ozer ddn GHdWYd 9 abeyoA uBIH UL JA seddn oL AHAHA S Oa 9H04 Zig i JOU T J0 0W ra E EY Isny wuni Hdd ZLY 209H2 IY TOL d vhawag 8 c cd WMdOHO HG H Have c ea QVOHO ZV 42 Ul J univer Ca GHAATS O18 109 ONI olola gt gt gt gt ppgo NPr rpp veel BE OLY WHdAIS E amp Y aman Oe Qe bsa HE RES LY O000000 r e TIO Sdgson sg AZHW0S 8a ajeje o po A O ub oj e3 JAVSGd HO BY Hons Sv 2 CNS I 94 WMdaAdaa zZz Gla CG 14 GND 9Y O alo N 29 Wmdado 98 H CRO weer 9v AGlet ZY 8a zase Sd K4 GY DOAIOO 8Y AEI 489r HPR 6g vZHW0S vg c ti SIS old zHASEL EH Pry BIS S Yod 7 9 Ai OL SISXI Th vs Ce ey ogada oky 5 PI uonsajep GG v 6 SNO TI OR vsr ua 401054 ZA Py pa KE yE 8 NOTO Hail ey vasa ty ususq rE r Z1 SNONXJ J z gas SNSNga 1d H oT oT Lv clv LOLE 4S4 ASAC 49 W9 No 6 Sd oar toon A f F NOUX4 2 Josues abed SBE OA Jesn oL CNS
4. 7Od VOd Osjep uo1 09 9p s Jaded ezis Jeded J pue c e pue KEAL zZ Abi suoipajepi YO Msuo1 09 8p isieded ezisioded Z ACI ACI aasa ff dd Mo JB on so DB DU Hk09LF YLOSLF Po leo l lon Po lo fon lalala alina og 5 co co NB ho Slicer AldWvSd 9 o O O O OT Ba O NG WOd Aup Jase WStr unip Buibewi AJOWSW wnq orn oom wo E NG Ho how tb TTT XX A of 7 4 T4 TATA DARE EEZ NOOD wer HINOG QI IPE 20385 RESE OE a SK l NG iva pseoq 19 W0 cl op on loo ha ag DIWOS S Pan Ss 283 NN oo E TaT Z Josuas LHO cO8lSd Josues LHO LO8LSd 9 SNSdHO 19 OUND 9 mba a Selos Cal 7 Za mi O m ESAU ALU WLP
5. Figure 23 Contents of transfer kit Transfer drum Transfer belt Hand wipe Transfer charger Cleaning roller oOo o Bm QO N Charcoal filter 106 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance EN EN To replace the transfer kit Open the front door of the printer Push the white button on the lower green lever and swing the lever to the right Open the upper door on the right side of the printer and remove the transfer drum On the right back wall of the opening firmly pull the blue knob to release the right end of the cleaning roller Lift the roller slowly out and to the right to release the left end CAUTION Do not touch the roller hold the roller only by the blue knob and left end to avoid print quality problems 5 While holding the new roller by the blue knob insert the left end into the hole in the left side of the back wall 6 Push the right end into its bracket until it snaps into place 7 Rotate the transfer belt up using the blue lever on the bottom right side of the printer opening 8 Using the blue handles lift the belt up and out of the printer Note Do not touch the surface of the transfer belt or poor print
6. aaa 133 4 Development a a 133 Transfer block 0 0 eee 134 5 Primary transfer 134 6 Post charging 135 7 Secondary transfer 136 8 Separation a 137 Transfer drum cleaning block 138 9 Cleaning roller charging 138 10 Transfer drum cleaning 139 EN Chapter contents 119 Imaging drum cleaning block 140 11 Imaging drum cleaning 140 USING DIOCK and oa dotted ag Sh Geet hae ek esis ak 141 T2 FUSING uc na Ka ded ba aoe pA NEGA 141 Consumable detection mechanisms 142 Drum kit life detection 142 Waste toner level detection 142 Transfer kit life detection 144 Fuser kit life detection 144 Color toner level detection 144 Color cartridge sensor 145 Color toner lever detection 146 Black toner level detection and cartridge detection 147 Environment change control 147 Color calibration density sensor 148 Transfer belt control 0 000000 0 ae 149 Cleaning roller control 150 Carousel control AAAA eee 150 Carousel stop solenoid 151 Electrical systems
7. 22 EIO lt n gt BUFFER OVERFLOW Description The EIO buffer has overflowed during a busy state This might happen if several complex jobs are sent simultaneously via the network and are larger than the overflow will allow lt n gt EIO slot number 1 Bottom EIO slot 2 Top EIO slot Event log message 22 00 01 Action No action is required The current data in the print buffer will be lost 316 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Table 39 Numbered printer messages continued 22 PARALLEL I O BUFFER OVERFLOW Description Indicates the parallel buffer has overflowed This might happen if several complex jobs are sent simultaneously via the parallel port and are larger than the overflow will allow Event log message 22 00 01 Action No action is required The current data in the print buffer will be lost 40 lt n gt HP EIO ERROR Description An EIO accessory connection has been abnormally broken while transferring data from the computer to the printer lt n gt EIO slot number 1 Bottom EIO slot 2 Top EIO slot Event log message 40 00 00 Action 1 Print an EIO configuration page to verify that the ElO accessories are installed properly Check that all cables are connected to the EIO ports and that the ElO accessory is seated properly Turn the printer off and on to reset it If possible print to another network printer to verify the network is working prope
8. 57 1 FAN FAILURE Description One of the cooling fans failed or is obstructed 1 Fan1 FM 1 Event log message 57 00 01 Action Caution Turn the printer off and do not operate the printer in this condition or it can be seriously damaged 1 2 Turn the printer off and on to reset it Reconnect connectors J702 and J706 on the carousel motor PCA and connector J220 on the controller board Reconnect connector J701 on the carousel motor PCA connectors J648 and J641 on the main relay PCA and connector J102 on the DC power supply Measure the voltage across J702 3 FAN1ON and J701 2 GND on the carousel motor PCA after the printer is turned on If the voltage changes from 0 V to 24 V replace fan 1 Measure the voltage across connector J701 1 24 VB and J701 2 GND on the carousel motor PCA after the printer is turned on If the voltage is about 24 V replace the carousel motor Measure the voltage across connector J641 1 24 VB and J641 4 GND on the main relay PCA after the printer is turned on If the voltage is not 24 V replace the main relay PCA Check the AC power supply If the problem is not rectified after the printer is turned off and on again find the cause of activation of the overcurrent overvoltage detection circuit in the power supply Wait for more than two minutes before turning the power back on Replace the power supply 326 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Table 3
9. PS1901C PS1302 K PS1204 Printer sensors EN Table 31 Printer sensor names and descriptions Name Description PS1 Registration roller paper sensor PS3 Carousel position sensor PS5 Separation sensor PS10 Top face down output bin paper full sensor PS11 Top face down output bin delivery sensor PS17 Pick up unit paper sensor PS18 Pick up unit cover sensor PS19 Tray 1 last page sensor PS29 Tray 2 last page sensor PS30 Left cover sensor PS1201 Tray 3 sensor PS1202 Tray 2 sensor PS1203 Tray 3 paper level sensor 2 PS1204 Tray 3 paper level sensor 1 PS1205 Tray 2 paper level sensor 2 PS1206 Tray 2 paper level sensor 1 PS1207 Tray 3 paper out sensor PS1208 Tray 2 paper out sensor PS1301 Tray 1 paper sensor PS1302 Lifting plate position sensor PS1801 OHT sensor 1 PS1802 OHT sensor 2 PS1901C Color toner cartridge sensor PS1902 Color toner lever sensor PS1903 Fusing delivery sensor THU Upper thermistor THL Lower thermistor TPU Upper thermo switch TPL Lower thermo switch EN Paper path 173 SW201 Q SW671 o SW673 ag SW202 SW1604 o SW1601 SW1602 SW1604 Figure 61 Printer switches 174 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN Table 32 Printer switch names and descriptions Name Description SW1 Power switch SW201 Test print switch SW202 Reset switch SW641 R
10. 457 Internal cover assembly parts 459 Internal components parts 1 of 6 461 Internal components parts 2 of 6 463 Internal components parts 3 of 6 465 Internal components parts 4 of 6 467 Internal components parts 5 of 6 469 Internal components parts 6 of 6 471 Drum cartridge drive assembly parts 472 Delivery drive assembly parts 473 Tray 3 assembly parts AA a 474 Tay 2aSSembply rene cere oe ett tee 475 Paper pick up assembly parts 479 Registration frame assembly parts 480 Registration roller assembly parts 481 Feeder assembly parts 482 Tray 1 pick up assembly parts 483 Tray 1 assembly parts 484 Delivery assembly parts 485 Delivery cover assembly parts 486 Transfer belt assembly parts 487 Fuser assembly parts 490 PCA assembly parts aaa 491 2 000 sheet input unit cover and door parts 493 2 000 sheet input unit internal component parts 495 Multi bin mailbox component parts 1 0f3 497 EN Table 79 Table 80 Table 81 Table 82 Multi bin mailbox component parts 2 of 3 499 Multi bin mailbox component parts 3 of 3 501 Nu
11. EN Product overview 37 Paper handling accessories and options Figure 6 Paper handling accessories and options 1 Multi bin mailbox 2 Duplexer internal 3 2 000 sheet input unit only available on 8500 DN model 38 Chapter 1 Product information EN Safety information Note EN FCC regulations This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase separation between equipment and receiver Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that on which the receiver is located Consult your dealer or an experienced radio television technician Any changes or
12. Lists the last three printer events including media Jams service errors and other printer actions Color Adjust Lists the number of pages since the last manual color adjustment Continuous configuration page Continuous configuration pages can be printed to simulate full color printing in which two pages are developed on the transfer drum per rotation two page mode Printing a continuous configuration page 1 Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears on the printer control panel display Press ITEM until PRINT CONTINUOUS CONFIG PAGES appears on the display Press SELECT to print the page Press CANCEL JOB to stop printing The printer will print all of the pages in the buffer before stopping Aids to troubleshooting 363 Demonstration page Use this page to simulate printing a color image If the image print quality is in question a demonstration page should be printed to assure that the problem is not related to software communications or file quality Printing a demonstration page 1 Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears on the printer control panel display 2 Press ITEM until PRINT LASERJET DEMONSTRATION appears on the display 3 Press SELECT to print the page Event log Detailed service information is noted in the event log The following is a list of the types of messages logged in the event log media jam errors disk failures e EIO errors catastrophic errors The last 50
13. Pressing Go causes the printer to attempt to print the page on the default type and size media If the condition persists check the input tray type and size configuration in the control panel Printer message troubleshooting 359 Table 40 Unnumbered printer messages continued TRAY lt x gt Event log message None NOT FUNCTIONAL Description Action The installed tray is not supported by the printer Press Go to continue printing 2X5 Input tray number 2 3 or 4 TRAY lt x gt OPEN Event log message None Description Action An input tray is open Close the input tray before resuming printing lt X gt Input tray number 2 3 or 4 TRAY lt x gt TYPE lt type gt Event log message None Description Action This message is displayed when media is placed in 1 Press VALUE to view the choices an Input tray 2 Press SELECT when the choice you want is lt x gt Input tray number 1 2 3 or 4 displayed lt type gt Last media type configured for the input 3 Press Go to bring the printer online tra y If no key is pressed for 30 seconds after the media is detected in the input tray the displayed type is automatically selected the message is cleared and printing begins WARMING UP Event log message None Description Action The fuser is warming up No action is required 360 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Aids to troubleshooting This section describes various tools service
14. Replace the controller board 332 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Table 39 Numbered printer messages continued 68 NVRAM ERROR Event log message 68 00 00 SETTINGS CHANGED Description Action Indicates that a recoverable error has been detected in the NVRAM nonvolatile random access memory Values for some NVRAM settings were found to be illegitimate in form and were set back to their default value Verify the printer control panel settings One or more fields have been reset to their factory defaults during the error recovery Perform a factory defaults reset See page 78 3 Perform a cold reset see page 376 68 NVRAM FULL Event log message 68 00 01 SETTINGS LOST Description Action Indicates that the NVRAM is full and the printer is Verify the printer control panel settings One or unable to write new data to the NVRAM more fields might have been reset to their factory defaults during error recovery The next time the printer is turned off and on NVRAM will be cleared and all factory defaults will be restored 79 SERVICE lt xxxx gt Event log message 79 lt xxxx gt CYCLE POWER Description Action The firmware has detected a hardware failure within 1 the formatter This failure can be caused by defective EIO devices and communication ports lt xXxxx gt Description 2 01 lt xx gt IO ASIC register error 02 lt xx gt Video ASIC register error 3 03 lt xx gt IDE ASIC regis
15. Transfer drum Z DC bias 717 Figure 32 Primary transfer 134 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN 6 Post charging AC and DC bias are applied to the post charging unit to add the appropriate bias to the toner that is on the transfer drum and to increase the efficiency of the secondary transfer The post charging unit is turned on during the yellow toner primary transfer as well as after the entire image is formed During the yellow toner transfer the negative charge is decreased A negative bias is applied for the black toner transfer to increase the efficiency of the secondary transfer the transfer of the toner from the transfer drum to the paper Transfer drum AC bias DC bias Figure 33 Post charging EN Image formation 135 7 Secondary transfer The paper is pressed against the transfer drum when the transfer belt press clutch CL4 pushes the transfer belt up to the transfer drum Positive DC bias is applied to the transfer belt to transfer the toner that is on the transfer drum surface to the paper The positive DC bias value changes according to the paper type such as plain heavy or overhead transparency and environmental conditions Because the transfer belt is highly resistive the potential bias is reversed between pages to eliminate excessive charge build up on the transfer belt After a jam negative DC bias is applied to the transfer belt to transfer any residual toner from the trans
16. eee eee 152 Power distribution 0 0 0 0 eee eee 152 RUSCH COMTO kaa sana wed ae NN De al 154 High voltage power supply circuit 155 Mechanical systems 0 00 cee eee eee 157 PASE SCANNING occas rera edhe as KGG ee 157 Motors and heaters 159 Carousel motor M1 160 Drum motor M2 0000 ee eee 161 Cartridge motor M3 162 Main motor M4 0 000 eee eee 163 Pick up motor M5 200 0 eae 164 Fan motors FM1 FM2 and FM3 165 120 Chapter 5 Theory of operation Papel Dall ti tne ann eet a eae kan aie aes 166 PICKUP NCC xcs da 3 2 Hah maaya end db naia 167 Automatic overhead transparency detection 167 Paper piCk Up 2 02 cee eee 168 sensors switches clutches and solenoids 172 Switch functionality 176 Fusing and delivery unit 178 Media jam detection 2 0000 ce eee 180 EPH controller board 0 00 cece ees 180 2 000 sheet input unit 2 0 0 0 aa 180 Power supply nananana 180 Sensors switches clutches and motors 181 Pick up and feed system 182 Switch functionality AA 183 Lifter operation sesi Aang ee tei LANA al Wind 184 Papel Dally soo cee AMA NPA KEAN eae es 185 Multi bin mailbox 2 0 a 186 Operating MOdeS 2 0 ccc eee 18
17. BLACK SMOOTH VALUE CYAN SMOOTH VALUE MAGENTA SMOOTH VALUE YELLOW SMOOTH VALUE BLACK DETAIL VALUE CYAN DETAIL VALUE MAGENTA DETAIL VALUE YELLOW DETAIL VALUE c Press VALUE until the number recorded in step 3c appears on the display d Press SELECT to enter the number into the printer memory e Repeat steps 4a through 4d to adjust the color screens as necessary Reprint the color adjust page 6 Examine the new color adjust test page and verify that the color adjustment is correct e Verify that each of the color ramps black cyan magenta and yellow matches the background for each color and has a red arrow next to the circle If another circle matches the background more closely return to step 4 to reset the values on the printer control panel to the number shown in that circle e Verify that the circles in the neutral axis areas of the color adjust test page are neutral gray gray without a color tint and then verify that one of the circles in the ramp is a color very close to the background If the circles are not neutral gray additional corrections to cyan magenta or yellow might be necessary If there is an overall tint of color in the circles make the adjustments suggested by the following table However the most accurate correction is determined by the circles in the individual black cyan magenta and yellow ramps EN Color balance adjustment 417 Table 44 Neutral axis adju
18. Controller board J219 6 24UH Ji i 3 MRDY 4 Main motor 1 MSPED 6 2 MSPED 5 4 MON 3 5 2 Main motor M4 Mechanical systems 163 Pick up motor M5 The pick up motor M5 is a two phase stepping motor M5 picks up the paper drives tray 2 and 3 tray lifts and activates the pick up rollers for trays 2 and 3 During tray 2 paper pick up M5 is rotated at normal speed During tray 3 pick up normal speed reverse rotation is used Controller board D CPU racer M CPU IC202 FEDPHA FEDPHA J210 2 J1201 20 J1202 2 Pick up FEDPHB A 17 FEDPHA FEDPHA A 19 FEDPHB FEDPHB 3 FEDIO FEDI1 67 68 69 70 71 Figure 56 Pick up motor M5 164 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN Fan motors FM1 FM2 and FM3 The printer contains three exhaust fans all of which use DC brushless motors Table 29 describes when each of the fans operates and at what speed they operate Table 29 Fan operation Power Save Power Save Turn or power off or power off printer on Standby Printing lt 30 minutes gt 30 minutes FM1 Full speed On On On Off FM2 Full speed Full speed Full speed Full speed Off FM3 Off Off Full speed Off Off 1 FM1 contains a thermistor and the fan speed changes according to the temperature inside the printer EN Mechanical systems 165 Paper path Figure 57 shows the printer paper path
19. lt x gt Description 1 Page stays too long at paper entry sensor PS31 B Page stays too long at paper exit sensor PS32 Action 1 Open the vertical transfer unit VTU and remove any media Verify that the paper entry sensor PS31 moves freely Verify that the feed separation and the pickup rollers are properly seated If the problem persists open the VTU and override the VTU closed sensor PS35 Perform a paper path test feeding from the 2 000 sheet input unit and verify that the feed rollers are advancing the paper If rollers do not rotate verify the connections at the pickup assembly and the controller PCA in the 2 000 sheet input unit If the rollers rotate and drop down but do not advance the paper replace the feed and separation rollers using the maintenance kit If the rollers do not rotate or do not drop down replace the pickup assembly If the problem persists replace the VTU which includes PS31 Event log message 13 11 3 lt x gt lt x gt Description 1 At power on paper entry sensor PS31 in VTU is active B At power on paper exit sensor PS32 in VTU is active Action 1 Open the vertical transfer unit VTU and remove any media 2 Verify that PS31 and PS32 in the VTU move freely 3 iif either PS31 or PS32 are damaged replace the VTU Printer message troubleshooting 337 Table 40 Unnumbered printer messages continued CLEAR INPUT JAM Description Th
20. 130 Preconditioning exposure 131 Primary charging of imaging drum 132 Black toner cartridge left and color toner cartridge right development aa 133 Primary transfer 2 0 0 0 00 c eee eee ee 134 OSU CMANOING paaa cis eta ded Ah edn acta S 135 Secondary transfer 00 00 cee eee 136 SOD ALAM anan acd AG pA Uren pha earn AUR 137 Cleaning roller charging 138 List of figures 7 8 List of figures Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 Figure 40 Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 5 7 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 Figure 65 Figure 66 Figure 67 Figure 68 Figure 69 Figure 70 Figure 71 Figure 72 Figure 73 Figure 74 Transfer drum cleaning Imaging drum cleaning block Fusing the toner 0000 cece ees 141 Waste toner level detection 143 Color toner level detections 145 Color toner lever detection 146 Density sensor ee 148 Transfer belt control 0 00006 149 Cleaning roller control 150 GarousSelCONMOl 64 326 aa AN Dana kan ws 151 Power distribution circuit diagram 152 Power Save circuit diagra
21. AE mn g a pa g mn am g i EN Parts and diagrams Chapter contents OVEN er sare Km TAG eke KAKANAN a ee es 445 Ordering parts ee ees 445 Consumables options and accessories 445 Miscellaneous parts 448 Illustrations and parts lists 449 Major assembly locations 450 Printer covers and doors 452 Internal cover assembly 458 Internal components a 460 Drum cartridge drive assembly 472 Delivery drive assembly 473 Tray 3 assembly 0 474 Tray 2 assembly ees 475 Paper pick up assembly 476 Registration frame assembly 480 Registration roller assembly 481 Feeder assembly cece eee eee 482 Tray 1 pick up assembly 483 Tray 1 assembly 2 0 00 00 484 Delivery assembly 00000 e eee eee 485 Delivery cover assembly 486 Transfer belt assembly 487 Fuser assembly a 488 PCA assembly location diagram 491 Chapter contents 443 2 000 sheet input unit covers and doors Multi bin mailbox components Numerical parts list 0 0 0 aaa Alphabetical parts list 0 0 0 a 444 Chapter 8 Parts an
22. EN 7 Troubleshooting Chapter contentS 0 0 aa 311 Pre troubleshooting checklist 315 Printer message troubleshooting 316 Aids to troubleshooting cece eee eee 361 Paper path troubleshooting 0 0000 eee eee 378 Image formation troubleshooting 000 ee eee 383 Image defects troubleshooting 00 eee eeeee 386 Color balance adjustment a 414 Repetitive defects troubleshooting 419 2 000 sheet input unit troubleshooting 426 Multi bin mailbox troubleshooting 434 Communications troubleshooting 439 Dee ci ee ee ee ee ee EE AY 440 8 Parts and diagrams Chapter contentS 0 0 0 0 ccc eee eens 443 Overview a 445 Ordering parts ees 445 Illustrations and parts lists 0 0 0 0 0 eee ee 449 Numerical parts list 0 0 ees 502 Alphabetical parts list 0 es 513 Index Contents 5 6 Contents EN EN List of figures Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24 Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 27 Figure 28 Figure 29 Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 F
23. Erect 8500 8500 N 8500 DN Printer Service Manual HP Color LaserJet 8500 8500 N 8500 DN Printer Service Manual Copyright Information 1998 Hewlett Packard Company All Rights Reserved Reproduction adaptations or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under copyright laws Part number C3983 90954 First edition October 1998 Printed in USA Hewlett Packard Company 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise Idaho 83714 USA Warranty The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Hewlett Packard makes no warranty of any kind with respect to this information HEWLETT PACKARD SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE Hewlett Packard shall not be liable for any direct indirect incidental consequential or other damage alleged in connection with the furnishing or use of this information NOTICE TO U S GOVERNMENT USERS RESTRICTED RIGHTS COMMERCIAL COMPUTER SOFTWARE Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data Clause at DFARS 52 227 7013 Trademark Credits CompuServe is a U S trademark of CompuServe Inc MS DOS is a U S registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Photoshop and PostScript are registered
24. IC201 Q210 DRMICH M CPU IC202 DRMPHA la DRMPHB DRMPHB DRMPHA Drum motor M2 driver IC210 Drum motor 24UH A 24UH Drum motor 18 DRMPHB DRMPHB DRMPHA Mechanical systems 161 Cartridge motor M3 The cartridge motor M3 is a two phase stepping motor and drives the black and color toner cartridge developing cylinders The motor rotates in the normal direction for color toner development then the motor reverses for black toner development The developer gear drive assembly and its associated clutches engage the proper developer drive gear based on the direction of the cartridge motor rotation Controller board High voltage converter PCA D CPU IC201 Expansion Cartridge 424UH I O motor driver IC5005 i SLVPHA SLVPHB i SLVPHB M CPU SLVPHA SLVHPB Figure 54 Cartridge motor M3 162 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN M CPU IC202 Expansion O IC203 Figure 55 EN Main motor M4 The main motor M4 is a three phase eight pole brushless motor This motor drives the rollers related to pick up feeding fusing and delivery This motor also drives the transfer belt press drive cam and cleaning roller press drive cam The controller board switches the motor speed between normal speed 1 4 speed for OHT mode and 1 3 speed for glossy or heavy media by combining the M4 speed change signals
25. 0 0 0 0 ARNA 482 Tray 1 pick up assembly 483 Tray 1 assembly 484 Delivery assembly 0000 c eee eee 485 Delivery cover assembly 486 Transfer belt assembly 487 Fuser assembly 1 0f2 488 Fuser assembly 2 0f2 489 PCA assembly location diagram 491 2 000 sheet input unit covers and doors 492 2 000 sheet input unit internal components 494 Multi bin mailbox components 1 0f3 496 Multi bin mailbox components 2 0f3 498 Multi bin mailbox components 3 0f3 500 EN EN List of tables Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15 Table 16 Table 17 Table 18 Table 19 Table 20 Table 21 Table 22 Table 23 Table 24 Table 25 Table 26 Table 27 Table 28 Table 29 Table 30 Table 31 Table 32 Table 33 Table 34 Table 35 Table 36 Table 37 Features and optional accessories by printer model 19 Printer performance 0000 eee eee ees 20 Electrical specifications 21 Operating environment specifications 21 Acoustic emissions 0 00 eee eee 22 Printer dimensions 0 00 ce eee 22 Consumable storage specifications 23 Media capacity
26. 6 Carousel stop assembly RG5 3053 000CN 1 8 PCA fusing delivery sensor RG5 3992 000CN 1 11 Cover carousel stop RB1 9789 000CN 1 15 Connector holder assembly RG5 3031 000CN 1 16 Cable main RG5 3097 000CN 1 18 Cable sensor RG5 3144 000CN 1 19 Cable DC power RG5 3921 000CN 1 20 Cable power signal RG5 3922 000CN 1 21 PCA cartridge release lever RG5 3961 000CN 1 25 Power supply assembly 110V RH3 2185 000CN 1 Power supply assembly 220V RH3 2187 000CN 30 Switch toner cartridge cover SW672 WC4 5150 000CN 1 140 Face up solenoid assembly RG5 3022 000CN 1 EN Illustrations and parts lists 461 Internal components 2 of 6 Figure 219 EN 462 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 56 Internal components parts 2 of 6 Ref Description Part number Qty 6 Lever assembly transfer drum RG5 3046 000CN 1 7 Lever assembly pressure RG5 3045 000CN 1 8 Bushing RS5 1119 000CN 1 10 Lever assembly black cartridge RG5 3087 000CN 1 22 Switch black toner cartridge SW644 WC4 5136 000CN 1 23 Photo interrupter IC TLP1240 WG8 5210 000CN 1 29 Bushing RS5 1317 000CN 1 30 Bushing RS5 1317 000CN 1 501 Ring E XD2 1100 642CN 2 EN Illustrations and parts lists 463 Internal components 3 of 6 Figure 220 EN 464 Chapter 8 Parts and diagra
27. Color toner level detection The color toner level sensor PS621 detects the toner level in the color toner cartridge PS621 consists of a light emitter and a light receiver The light from the light emitter enters the detection window by the light guide facing the outside of the toner cartridge The light entering the detection window passes through the inside of the cartridge Then the light guide by the stirring plate cleans the toner 144 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN CTNLED around the detection window The light receiver of PS621 detects the toner After PS621 detects light the controller board notes the time until light can no longer pass through the detection window The controller board signals the formatter that the color toner cartridge has no toner if the time the light passes through the detection window exceeds the fixed time The printer detects the toner level when the printer is turned on or while the stirring plate is rotating Controller board Light guide CTNSNS Sa a Se r Light emitter q a P O Color toner cartridge Q S E Color toner levelsensor Light receiver PS621 Figure 41 EN Color toner level detections Color cartridge sensor The color cartridge sensor PS1901C detects the color toner cartridge PS1901C consists of a light emitter and a light receiver The light from the light emitter is reflected by the cartridge and reaches to the light receiver only when the cart
28. Description The printer has detected that the transfer drum is not installed Note All doors must be closed for the printer to detect the transfer drum If the right upper cover interlock is defeated this error will occur unless the density sensor is covered with paper LANGUAGE lt xxxx gt Description Displayed during start up The printer has recognized the key sequence for changing the control panel language lt XXXX gt Printer control panel display language 348 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 11 12 13 Check the drum cartridge on off switch lever on the printer Set the lever at the correct position if it is disconnected Replace the lever if it is cracked Reconnect connector J209 and relay connectors J47 and J48 on the controller board Replace the controller board Event log message None Action 1 6 Install the transfer drum before attempting to print Take the transfer drum out and reinstall it Make sure that the transfer drum is installed e f the transfer drum is not already installed install the transfer drum e Ifthe transfer drum is already installed turn the printer off verify the transfer drum is in the correct position and turn the printer on again Reconnect connector J1101 on the density sensor PCA intermediate connectors J75 and J46 and connector J206 on the controller board Measure the voltage across connector J704 1 24 VAR and GND on the de
29. E19 GE ter om AA seq 3 seq seq 118 plo seig Ng a selq Od 710 seg D sela q UNITE NAA SOAS ey a NIT CIA MMPS pd Sod Soy w MN o E10 t 1 20 nd m CN o 11 da ainjeledwe yud PN ainjgleodwe juug A Hd T O __ o asi Pe MF za AN co ae NE ze aa Nae ee 14817 Ad1S H1S1 I1NHd al A PN pu0083571U7 puewwoo sduenbas pud jeubls NHd Z i o I Lv N TT a aaa AGLS NU0deS 1U Ha a E To o m AIT o ai ZEL o ai puewwoo eouanbes yung jeubis NHd seid Dl seq lt serq 115 plo sela 9d a serq 9d lt 12 seig OC sed 9 kuy MIMO YA pee eee ees Ui GE p EF M F gt i EF ape 0c So di Lv ah Lb Ty 1 Ww 619 o N o asi cj o Ce CT SSC CO LL zzz lN a DD Nf 8TRAhU Bk ees PT a a 2 ainjeledwe wud ainjeladwa yude
30. EN 2 000 sheet input unit 281 4 Remove 2 screws callout 2 5 Lift the power supply upward to clear the locating tabs underneath and then slide it to the left to free it from the chassis Main drive assembly 1 Remove the back cover see page 273 2 Unplug 1 connector from the controller PCA callout 1 Figure 152 Main drive assembly Release 2 cable stays Remove 1 screw on top of the main drive assembly and 1 screw on the bottom callout 2 5 Pull the main drive assembly away from the chassis Note Inspect the paper deck drive bushing on the main drive assembly If the bushing is broken it can be replaced without replacing the whole drive assembly 282 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Paper size sensor assemblies There are two paper size sensor assemblies the quantity switch assembly and the paper size switch assembly rA Removing the quantity switch assembly ESD 1 Remove the back cover see page 273 2 Unplug 1 connector from the controller PCA callout 1 vail e ris Figure 153 Paper quantity switch assembly Release 2 cable stays Remove 1 screw callout 2 and the metal retaining spring callout 3 that hold the assembly in place 5 Remove the assembly Notes on reinstalling Seat the retaining spring callout 3 onto the locating pins that are on the chassis EN 2 000 sheet input unit 283 Removing the paper size switch assembly 1 Remove the back cover s
31. Off On Off On EN 2 000 sheet input unit 183 184 Chapter 5 Theory of operation Lifter operation The lifting plate in the 2 000 sheet input unit is held by two wires that are wound on four pulleys by the lifter motor When the paper tray is open the pulley gears disengage from the lifter motor gears and the lifting plate is lowered by its own weight The presence or absence of the tray is detected by switches SW701 through SW704 on the unit paper tray size switch assembly After the paper tray is closed the lifter motor raises the paper stack into position this action is detected by the PS34 sensor The PS34 sensor also maintains the height of the paper stack As paper is picked up by the rollers the number of sheets decreases Once the paper stack decreases to a certain level the PS34 sensor registers a low condition Then the paper deck driver turns on the lifter motor again and lifts the paper stack until the PS34 sensor registers sufficient paper in the tray EN Paper path Figure 65 illustrates the paper path components in the 2 000 sheet input unit O TO Figure 65 2 000 sheet input unit paper path Lifting plate Paper stack Pick up roller Feed roller Upper VTU rollers Vertical transfer unit VTU Lower VTU rollers Separation roller A OND CON O O1 EN 2 000 sheet input unit 185 Multi bin
32. Top face down output bin Top face down delivery sensor output bin PS11 oF ad V Face down delivery roller CO PS5 Fusing Registration roller delivery sensor paper sensor PS1903 PS1 Left f Kia eft face up i A are fusing roller Tray 1 pick up roller Face up d aQ delivery roller Registration Feed roller 2 Lower Transfer hone V PS17 fusing roller belt Pick up unit aper sensor Pick up roller a Ki Pick up roller Q o Tray 3 pp sak Figure 57 Paper path 166 Chapter 5 Theory of operation Pick up feed For cassette paper pick up the paper is sent into the printer by the pick up roller then fed by the feed roller After the registration roller corrects the skew of the paper the paper stops The paper is then refed so that its leading edge will match the top of the image on the transfer drum After that the paper is fed through the transfer separation and fusing delivery units to the top face down or the left face up output bin The printer switches the speed at which the paper is fed for different media types as indicated in table 30 Table 30 Feed speeds based on media type Modes Plain paper Glossy or heavy media OHT Feed speed Normal speed 1 3 of normal speed 1 4 of normal speed EN The controller board switches the feed speed when the registration roller paper sensor detects the paper The printer has two overhead transparency sensors PS1801 and PS1802 see figure 60
33. illustration 124 installing imaging 110 installing transfer 106 location 104 replace frequency 105 dual inline memory modules DIMMs See DIMMs dual inline memory modules dull transparencies 412 duplex printing configuring 73 process 192 total page count 81 duplexer accessories 19 446 deflector 124 error 343 jams 335 338 location 38 media specifications 31 printer model included with 19 dynamic random access memory DRAM See DRAM dynamic random access memory EN EN E ECCC European Customer Care Center Assist Line 54 EIO enhanced input output accessories parts list 446 buffer overflow 316 connection broken 317 features 20 initializing 343 not functional 344 printing page 71 slot locations 37 EIO hard disk parts list 446 eject rollers multi bin mailbox 192 ejector motor multi bin mailbox 190 electrical schematics 440 specifications 21 systems 152 electrostatic discharge ESD 203 electrostatic latent image 131 132 embossed media 33 EMI statement Korea 43 emissions acoustic 22 ozone 46 empty tray 359 engine settings 81 test 344 enhanced input output EIO See EIO enhanced input output envelopes cautions for printing 31 sealed 379 See also media environmental automatic change control 147 operating requirements 24 specifications 21 EP process See image formation EPH external paper handling controller board 180 188 error log 426 errors 2 000 sheet input unit 330 331 breaks and
34. presence of paper in the paper tray is detected by the P533 sensor The paper level is detected by switches SW601 and SW602 The paper size is detected by switches SW701 through SW704 When the EPH controller board on the printer sends an input command to the controller board PCA on the 2 000 sheet input unit the paper deck driver runs the pick up motor to rotate the pick up 182 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN feed and separation rollers As the pick up roller turns the paper feeds into the vertical transfer unit VTU and passes through the PS31 and PS32 sensors If the paper fails to reach the PS31 and PS32 sensors in the VTU within the allotted time the controller board PCA on the 2 000 sheet input unit assumes that a paper jam has occurred The 2 000 sheet input unit stops operating and reports a paper jam to the EPH controller board on the printer A paper jam message appears on the printer control panel Switch functionality The following tables describe the functionality of the paper quantity and paper size switches in the 2 000 sheet input unit Table 36 Paper quantity detection switches SW601 SW602 Remaining paper On On ff On 75 O 25 Table 37 Paper size detection switches Paper size SW701 SW702 SW703 SW704 A3 portrait On On Off Off A4 landscape On On Off On B4 portrait Off Off On Off Ledger portrait Off On Off Off Legal portrait Off On On Off Letter landscape
35. tray 2 and tray 3 pick up 169 unexpected size or type 318 See also media paper bin multi bin mailbox empty sensor 190 fullsensor 190 EN EN paper delivered to bin sensor multi bin mailbox 190 paper delivered to head sensor multi bin mailbox 190 paper entry sensor 2 000 sheet input unit 182 multi bin mailbox 190 paper exit sensor 2 000 sheet input unit 182 paper guide See input paper guide multi bin mailbox paper handling accessories location 38 model differences 19 Paper Handling Menu 72 paper jams See jams paper path 2 000 sheet input unit 185 carousel obstruction 323 checklist 378 door open 345 illustration 166 jams 340 multi bin mailbox 191 tests 83 365 tests multi bin mailbox 435 troubleshooting 378 paper photo sensors 241 paper pick up assembly 450 illustration 169 171 process 167 168 paper pick up 2 000 sheet input unit 182 paper pick up assembly illustration and parts list 476 location 450 removing 243 paper quantity switches 2 000 sheet input unit 182 183 paper size detection switches 2 000 sheet input unit 183 printer 176 paper size sensors 2 000 sheet input unit 182 paper size switch assembly 2 000 sheet input unit 284 paper stack 2 000 sheet input unit 185 paper tray sensors 2 000 sheet input unit empty 182 raised 182 paper trays See 2 000 sheet input unit input trays paper width sensor 170 parallel advanced functions 78 parallel cable connection 64 parts list
36. 130 D 71034 B blingen Fax 49 7031 14 3143 USA Contact Product Regulations Manager Hewlett Packard Company P O Box 15 Mail Stop 160 Boise ID 83707 0015 Phone 208 396 6000 EN Safety information 41 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 Manufacturer s Name Hewlett Packard Company Manufacturer s Address Montemorelos 299 Guadalajara Jalisco 45060 Mexico declares that the product Product Name 2 000 Sheet Input Tray Model Number C4781A Product Options N A conforms to the following Product Specifications Safety IEC 950 1991 A1 A2 A3 A4 EN 60950 1992 A1 A2 A3 A4 IEC 825 1 1993 EN 60825 1 1994 Class 1 Laser LED EMC CISPR 22 1993 A1 EN 55022 1994 Class B CISPR 22 1993 A1 EN 55022 1994 EN 50081 1 1992 EN 50082 1 1992 IEC 801 2 1991 prEN 55024 2 1992 4 kV CD 8 kV AD IEC 801 3 1984 prEN 55024 3 1991 3 V m IEC 801 4 1988 prEN 55024 4 1992 0 5 kV Signal Lines 1 0 kV Power Lines FCC Title 47 CFR Part 15 Class B2 ICES 003 Issue 2 VCCI 2 AS NZS 3548 1992 CISPR 22 1993 Class B Supplementary Information The product herewith complies with the requirements of the following Directives and carries the CE marking accordingly the EMC directive 89 336 EEC the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC 1 The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett Packard Personal Computer Systems This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is
37. 175 switches 2 000 sheet input unit DIP 428 430 names and locations 181 normal diagnostic mode 182 paper quantity 182 paper quantity detection 183 paper size assembly 284 paper size detection 183 switches multi bin mailbox interlock 190 306 names and locations 189 switching I O 20 SWx See switches switches 2 000 sheet input unit switches multi bin mailbox symbol sets for PCL 77 J technical assistance See support technical training 50 temperature automatic environment change control 147 fusing 154 sensor 147 sensor error 323 specifications 21 23 tension springs 2 000 sheet input unit 285 test print switch 175 tests continuous 341 CRC 82 developer motor 83 EN EN tests continued DIMM 82 drum motor 83 engine 344 firmware ROM 82 formatter video 82 hard disk 82 input trays 83 installation 92 output bins 83 paper path 83 365 printing color pages 79 sensor 83 tests 2 000 sheet input unit motor 431 sensor 432 standalone 430 tests multi bin mailbox paper path 435 power up sequence 435 standalone 434 text resolution 20 thermistor fan 165 sensors 173 thermo switches 173 thermographic inks 33 ThinLAN cables using 63 third party support 439 timeout for I O 78 timing charts description 192 full color 11 by 17 inch sized page 197 full color letter sized page 195 WAIT period 193 Token Ring 446 toner background scatter 407 black level detection 147 cartridge not installed 345 cartri
38. 286 287 removing 208 switch 175 front door 35 front LED PCA assembly 2 000 sheet input unit 280 front right cover 209 FRUs field replaceable units See field replaceable units FRUs full hard disk 342 left face up output bin 437 fuser abnormality detection circuit 154 assembly 451 488 control process 154 error 319 incompatible 345 installing 113 jams 336 life low 344 EN EN fuser continued location 104 new 352 not installed 346 repetitive defects 424 temperatures 154 fuser kit installing 113 life detection 144 low and out messages 75 parts list 447 percentage life remaining 81 replace frequency 105 resetting life count 78 fusing and delivery process 179 delivery sensor 166 173 178 179 heater safety circuit 154 process 141 rollers 124 141 G ghosting 406 glossy print speeds 20 using 32 See also media Go key 66 graphics resolution 20 guide input paper See input paper guide multi bin mailbox H half toning 127 handling media 26 toner 45 hard disk accessories 19 failure 342 full 342 initializing 75 353 location 37 new 352 parts list 446 removing 232 356 test 82 write protected 342 HCl See 2 000 sheet input unit HCO See multi bin mailbox heaters fusing safety 154 lower and upper fuser 159 names and locations 159 heavy media using 32 See also media height of printer 22 Hewlett Packard Distribution HPD ordering information 49 high capacity output See multi bin mailb
39. 373 Left upper cover detection 374 Right lower cover detection 374 Printer paper path eee 380 Image orientation and direction of travel 386 Incorrect registration late and early print 388 IMAG SKEW vie it vat Kabi LAAN Ba pla 389 Blank or partially blank page 390 Horizontal lines in one color 391 Horizontal lines in all colors CMYK 392 Rain or speckled print 000000 393 Black brown or orange bands 394 Background toner scatter 395 Mottled process colors or poor transfer 396 OLA MONET lt 4 0222 tes dana BAABALAL ANGLE wt 397 Dark yellow or contaminated print 398 Color adjust page 415 List of figures 11 Figure 204 Figure 205 Figure 206 Figure 207 Figure 208 Figure 209 Figure 210 Figure 211 Figure 212 Figure 213 Figure 214 Figure 215 Figure 216 Figure 217 Figure 218 Figure 219 Figure 220 Figure 221 Figure 222 Figure 223 Figure 224 Figure 225 Figure 226 Figure 227 Figure 228 Figure 229 Figure 230 Figure 231 Figure 232 Figure 233 Figure 234 Figure 235 Figure 236 Figure 237 Figure 238 Figure 239 Figure 240 Figure 241 Figure 242 Figure 243 Figure 244 Figure 245 Figure 246 12 List of figures Repetitive defect ruler 420 C
40. 40001 Control panel overlay Finnish C3983 40012 Control panel overlay French C3983 40006 Control panel overlay German C3983 40007 Control panel overlay Italian C3983 40014 514 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams EN Table 82 Alphabetical parts list continued Description Part number Figure Ref Control panel overlay Korean C3983 40003 Control panel overlay Norwegian C3983 40010 Control panel overlay Portuguese C3983 40005 Control panel overlay Russian C3983 40015 ll Control panel overlay Simplified Chinese C3983 40004 Control panel overlay Spanish C3983 40008 Control panel overlay Swedish C3983 4001 1 Cover assembly front RG0 0112 000CN 214 3 Cover assembly inner left RG0 0104 000CN 217 1 Cover assembly left upper RG0 0113 000CN 214 4 Cover assembly rear RG0 0115 000CN 215 5 Cover assembly right lower RG5 3096 000CN 216 16 Cover assembly top RG0 0111 000CN 215 2 Cover auxiliary RA0 0078 000CN 215 20 Cover back C4785 60505 246 37 RB2 2519 000CN 242 71 Cover cable RB1 9805 000CN 220 9 RB1 9948 000CN 222 3 Cover carousel stop RB1 9789 000CN 218 11 Cover density sensor RB1 9537 000CN 216 32 Cover fan RF0 0012 000CN 215 39 Cover front C4785 60504 244 26 Cover front right RA0 0069 000CN 214 9 Cover front with LED window
41. 447 parallel I O input output buffer overflow 317 parallel port 37 64 part numbers See parts lists parts exchanging 51 HP Direct 53 ordering 49 445 phone number identification 53 removing and installing 199 user replaceable 205 website information 50 parts lists alphabetical 513 by part 449 cables 447 consumables options and accessories 446 control panel overlays 448 covers and doors 2 000 sheet input unit 492 covers and doors printer 457 delivery assembly 485 delivery cover assembly 486 delivery drive assembly 473 DIMMs 446 drum kit 447 drum cartridge drive assembly 472 ElO 446 EIO hard disk 446 feeder assembly 482 fixing assembly 490 formatter board 449 fuser kits 447 internal components 461 internal hard disk 446 lower cassette assembly 474 media 447 memory 446 multi bin mailbox components 497 499 501 multi purpose tray assembly 484 multi purpose tray pick up assembly 483 network 446 numerical 502 paper handling accessories 446 paper pick up assembly 479 PCA assemblies 491 printer supplies 447 reference materials 448 registration frame assembly 480 registration roller assembly 481 Index 539 540 Index parts lists continued toner cartridges 447 transfer assembly 487 transfer kits 447 upper cassette assembly 475 PCAs assemblies 491 carousel motor 256 high voltage converter 1 262 high voltage converter 2 264 main relay 266 power supply circuit 155 separation discharge high voltage co
42. 49 lt xxxx gt ERROR CYCLE POWER Description Indicates that a software or data communications error has occurred or corrupt data was sent to the printer This can be caused during times of high network traffic or incomplete or out of bounds print data This error can also occur because of defective EIO devices Event log message 49 lt xxxx gt Action N Verify that all cables are connected Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer Remove all EIO cards and reinstall them to ensure they are seated correctly If using a parallel connection verify that the cable is IEEE 1284 compliant 318 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Table 39 Numbered printer messages continued 50 1 FUSER ERROR CYCLE POWER Description Indicates that a low temperature error has occurred in the fuser Event log message 50 00 01 Action 1 5 6 Verify the fuser is completely seated inside the printer Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer Turn the printer off and remove the fuser Measure the resistance across fuser connectors J26F A4 FXTHU and J26F A3 GND If it is not in the range of 250 kOhms to 600 kOhms room temperature check the wiring from the connector J222 on the controller board up to the upper thermistor If the wiring is normal replace the fuser kit Reconnect connector J222 on the controller board and connector J26 on the fuser Replace the fuser kit Repla
43. 6 ppm color Legal Executive 11 by 17 inch size 12 ppm b w 3 ppm color Heavy paper 3 2 ppm b w 2 2 ppm color Transparencies 2 6 ppm b w 2 0 ppm color HP LaserJet 45 TrueType font set PostScript fonts Fonts Automatic personality switching PCL and PostScript support Printer personality support User interface and EIO Standard ECP or bidirectional parallel cable interface IEEE 1284 compliant 2 enhanced input output EIO slots Automatic I O switching 1 Not available at initial product introduction The approximate print speeds offered by this printer might vary from those listed above because the following factors affect processing time complexity and size of graphics I O configuration computer configuration amount of printer memory network operating system network configuration printer color calibration 20 Chapter 1 Product information EN Specifications Electrical specifications Table 3 Electrical specifications Item 110 volt models 220 volt models Power requirements 100 to 127 V 10 220 to 240 V 10 50 60 Hz 2 Hz 50 60 Hz 2 Hz Power consumption typical During printing black and 750 W average 750 W average white During printing color 375 W average 375 W average During standby 190 W average 190 W average During Power Save mode lt 45W c45 W During Off mode lt 2W lt 2W Minimum recommended circuit 12
44. 7 J211 10 J205 J227 CT A1 J226 a a SW202 1 J221 71 J222 6 B32 1 J223 8 ree Figure 209 Connectors on the controller board 440 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Acer Weer
45. Action Replace the fuser kit and reset the fuser counter by pressing SELECT before attempting to print or use the RESETS menu on the printer control panel See table 16 on page 75 for information on the TONER LOW setting EN Table 40 Unnumbered printer messages continued INCORRECT FUSER LOWER LEFT DOOR Description The printer has detected that an incompatible fuser possibly the wrong voltage of fuser for the printer has been installed Event log message 50 00 05 Action 3 Remove the fuser and install the fuser specified for use with this printer Printing cannot continue until the correct fuser is installed in the printer For information on ordering a fuser kit see page 445 Reconnect connector J222 on the controller board and connector J26 on the fuser Replace the controller board INPUT DEVICE PAPER PATH OPEN Description The vertical transfer unit VTU on the 2 000 sheet input unit is open INSTALL lt color gt Description The toner cartridge is either not installed not correctly installed in the printer or not being detected by the cartridge sensor lt Color gt Cyan magenta yellow or black Caution Use the blue button to rotate the carousel to prevent damage to the printer EN Event log message None Action Close the VTU Event log message None Action 1 Insert the cartridge or make sure the installed cartridge is correctly seated in the p
46. Anti curl string 1B Spring for anti curl string 1C Pulley small bottom Kit 3 Hardware C4785 60521 1 3C Screw Torx Tapping T20 M4 x 10 3D Screw Torx T20 M4 x 12 3E Screw Torx Tapping T10 3F Screw Caster EN Illustrations and parts lists 499 ATON LA No N Ee Q J KS Eu lt LL HASN O O O Te te aaa 13 u O Multi bin mailbox components 3 of 3 Figure 246 EN 500 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 80 Multi bin mailbox component parts 3 of 3 Ref Description Part number Qty 35 Diagnostic LED PCA with cable C4785 60514 1 36 Attachment clip C4785 60512 2 37 Back cover C4785 60505 1 38 Delivery head position motor C3764 60507 1 39 Input paper guide nosepiece C3764 60561 1 40 Power supply C4785 60501 1 41 Transport belt motor with fan C4785 60518 1 Kit 1 Plastic parts C4785 60519 1 1D Cable holder round gasket 1E Flat cable holder edge 1F Flat cable holder Kit 2 Cables C4785 60520 1 2A Switch interlock 2B Delivery head motor cable 2C Flipper sensor controller cable 2D Flipper encoder controller 2E Flipper motor controller 2F ESD cable 2G Delivery head assembly flat cable Kit 3 Hardware C4785 60521 1 3C Screw Torx Tapping T20 M4 x 10 EN Illustrations and parts lists 501 Numerical parts list Table 81 Numerical parts list Part number Description
47. Card JPOSTD Monarch HP recommends using transparencies that are 5 mils 0 13 mm thick with this printer 30 Chapter 1 Product information EN CAUTION CAUTION WARNING EN Media weights and sizes for duplexer The duplexer accepts media up to 28 Ib 105 g m3 bond and as large as A3 size Envelopes e The Envelope media type setting in the printer driver has been optimized for the best print adhesion for most envelopes e The Heavy Paper mode might also work well for some envelopes especially if the printing environment humidity is low e Output envelopes to the left face up output bin to reduce curl To prevent severe printer damage envelopes with a peel off adhesive strip or with more than one flap must use adhesives compatible with the printer s fusing temperatures approximately 190 C or 374 F Extra flaps or strips can result in wrinkling or creasing and can cause jamming Transparencies e The printer s internal color settings are optimized for the best color quality if Transparency is selected as the media type in the printer driver Using other media type settings will result in less accurate colors Use only transparencies supported for use in this printer Using transparencies that do not meet the specifications for this printer can cause poor print quality media jams and printer damage not covered under warranty e Although this printer supports transparencies between 4 an
48. E f E oP Pe E E i ria a ea 4 wa a i r ity 6 6 ee Ll E ial he E 2 PP oe j E g pr e E M a T a a LI a E 2 o es LI m Pt sa a wh he S E SaS E UH a PG AG AG NA e ae a g C pb E E EI DEU Pa i a a D 7 Bi a a da UI AF E i pN F m W Figure 118 Formatter pan 248 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN 4 Remove 5 screws on the left side of the printer callout 2 Figure 119 Formatter pan left side 5 Pull the formatter pan off EN Rear assemblies 249 Fan 1 Fan 1 is located on the middle right side of the rear of the printer For information on removing the fan 1 housing see page 257 steps 4 through 6 1 Remove the rear cover see page 222 2 Unplug the fan connector from the PCA callout 1 Fan 1 3 Push out on the two tabs on the left and right sides of the fan housing callout 2 Pull the thermistor out callout 3 Pull the fan out 250 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN EN Fan 2 Fan 2 is located on the upper right side of the rear of the printer For information on removing the fan 2 housing see page 257 steps 7 through 8 1 Remove the rear cover see page 222 2 Unplug 1 connector callout 1 Fan 2 3 Push out on the tabs on the left and right sides of the fan housing to release the fan callout 2 4 Pull the fan out Rear
49. EN Motor test This test verifies that the three motors on the 2 000 sheet input unit are functioning properly 1 Remove the back cover from the 2 000 sheet input unit see page 273 Open tray 4 and the vertical transfer unit VTU Set the DIP switches on the 2 000 sheet input unit s controller PCA for the motor test See page 430 for an explanation of the settings 4 Use the switch that is located on the unit s power supply to switch to diagnostic mode e lf the motors are working properly they rotate continuously e f the motors do not rotate replace the corresponding field replaceable unit either the paper pick up assembly the VTU or the paper deck drive assembly 5 To stop the test turn the switch on the power supply back to operational mode and reset the DIP switches on the controller PCA to the off position 2 000 sheet input unit troubleshooting 431 Sensor test Figure 207 Location of sensors in the 2 000 sheet input unit Paper exit sensor PS32 Paper entry sensor P531 VTU closed sensor PS35 Paper tray raised sensor PS34 oF Q N Paper tray empty sensor P533 432 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN EN Set the DIP switches on the 2 000 sheet input unit s controller PCA for the sensor test See page 430 for an explanation of the settings For each paper sensor a Open the paper tray and the VTU on the 2 000 sheet input unit b Remove the metal spring that holds the s
50. FM1 RH7 1330 000CN 1 14 Static charge eliminator assembly RG5 3973 000CN 1 15 Cleaning roller assembly RG5 3975 000CN 1 16 Spring torsion RS5 2698 000CN 1 19 Bushing RS5 1319 000CN 2 20 Spring torsion RS5 2697 000CN 1 21 Transfer drum cleaner holder assembly RG5 3111 000CN 1 30 Cassette crossmember assembly RG5 3089 000CN 1 32 Rail tray 3 RF5 1396 000CN 1 36 Transfer mount assembly RG5 3008 000CN 1 37 Sensor slider assembly RG5 3131 000CN 1 EN Illustrations and parts lists 471 Drum cartridge drive assembly Figure 224 Drum cartridge drive assembly Table 61 Drum cartridge drive assembly parts Ref Description Part number Qty Drum cartridge drive assembly RG5 3065 000CN 1 23 Motor cartridge M3 RH7 1328 000CN 1 36 Developing rotary RG5 3033 000CN 1 472 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams EN Delivery drive assembly Figure 225 Delivery drive assembly Table 62 Delivery drive assembly parts Ref Description Part number Qty Delivery drive assembly RG5 3067 000CN 1 EN Illustrations and parts lists 473 Tray 3 assembly Figure 226 Tray 3 assembly Table 63 Tray 3 assembly parts 474 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Ref Description Part number Qty Tray 3 1 26 Plate end RF5 1484 000CN 1 EN Tray 2 assembl
51. Flipper roller motor with encoder 2 M1 Delivery head motor 3 PSEject Delivery rollers extended sensor 4 SW1 Interlock switch 5 M3 Delivery head roller motor 6 PSBinFull Head Position Paper bin below is full sensor 7 PSBinEmpty Paper bin empty sensor 8 PSExit2 Paper delivered to bin sensor 9 M5 Transport belt motor 10 PSFaceUp Reverse stepper motor sensor 11 PSFaceFull Left face up output bin full sensor 12 PSEntry Paper entry sensor 13 PSExit1 Paper delivered to head sensor 14 M4 Ejector motor 15 Controller board PCA Receiving paper The printer delivers paper to the multi bin mailbox through the face up delivery slot input paper guide at a rate of 107 mm per second Paper arrival is sensed by the PSEntry sensor which activates the flipper roller motor M2 causing the paper to move through the multi bin mailbox transport and delivery system 190 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN Delivering paper The delivery head assembly on the multi bin mailbox moves or stays in the indicated bin according to the commands coming from the EPH controller board on the printer If paper is designated for the face up bin the multi bin mailbox feeds it through the flipper assembly If paper is designated for one of the face down output bins the multi bin mailbox feeds it through the flipper assembly until the trailing edge is sensed by the PSFaceUp sensor Then the flipper roller motor M2 reverses and feeds the paper down between the
52. HP JetDirect Software Installation Guide 5966 5171 English HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification 5021 8956 Guide HP LocalTalk cable kit 92215N HP Peripherals Connectivity Solutions Guide 5091 6456 IEEE 1284 compliant parallel cable of 3 m C2946A approximately 10 ft with 25 pin male micro 36 pin male C size connector Input paper guide nosepiece C3764 60561 246 39 518 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams EN Table 82 Alphabetical parts list continued Description Part number Figure Ret Label CAUTION RS5 8380 000CN 217 4A Laser scanner unit RG5 3936 000CN 222 18 Latch roller action RB1 5153 000CN 214 SE RF0 0003 000CN 217 6 Lever assembly black cartridge RG5 3087 000CN 219 10 Lever assembly pressure RG5 3045 000CN 219 7 Lever assembly transfer drum RG5 3046 000CN 219 6 Lever holding left RB1 9705 000CN 239 9 Lever holding right RB1 9704 000CN 239 8 Lever left upper door RB1 6485 000CN 214 4B Lever paper height RA0 0112 000CN 236 12 Lever paper sensing RB1 6692 000CN 236 11 Lever registration roller RB1 9580 000CN 221 13 Lever release RB1 9748 000CN 239 25 Lever right lower cover RB1 6485 000CN 216 16D Lever right upper door RB1 6485 000CN 216 17 Lever shutter RA0 0008 000CN 214 3B Locating pin metal positioning RF5 2556 000CN 242 78 Macintosh DIN 8 printer cab
53. If the time is shorter than a stored value in the controller board DRUM ERROR REPLACE DRUM KIT is reported on the printer control panel The controller board writes the data into the imaging drum cartridge memory The printer is still able to print after the waste toner full warning The controller board counts the number of printed images after notification occurs When the number reaches approximately 200 images the 142 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN controller board stops the printer and signals DRUM LIFE OUT REPLACE DRUM KIT Printing cannot continue without a new imaging drum being installed Note If the imaging drum cartridge memory fails a warning will be displayed on the printer control panel Printing can continue until the waste toner sensor indicates full Waste toner detection block Light receiver Stirring plate Detection window Light emitter Toner feed roller Waste toner Figure 40 Waste toner level detection EN Consumable detection mechanisms 143 Transfer kit life detection The transfer kit life is determined by both the page and image counts The number of images printed is stored in the formatter and the controller board senses the transfer kit life expiration based upon this data When the life data reaches 149 000 pages or 299 000 images total TRANSFER KIT LOW REPLACE KIT is displayed on the printer control panel The printer is still able t
54. J3113 61003 PCA carousel motor M1 RG5 3084 000CN 241 4 PCA cartridge release lever RG5 3961 000CN 218 21 PCA cassette size sensing RG5 1845 000CN 241 1 PCA controller board RG5 3037 000CN 241 3 PCA fusing delivery sensor RG5 3992 000CN 218 8 PCA high voltage converter 1 RG5 3026 000CN 220 20 PCA high voltage converter 2 RG5 3943 000CN 220 21 PCA main relay RG5 3036 000CN 241 2 PCA paper pick up RG5 1860 000CN 228 103 PCA photo interrupter IC TLP1240 WG8 5210 000CN 231 4 PCA photosensor RG5 3079 000CN 231 8 RG5 3080 000CN 218 2 RG5 3032 000CN 231 7 PCA subrelay RG5 3085 000CN 241 5 PCA tray 1 RG5 1884 000CN 241 6 520 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams EN Table 82 Alphabetical parts list continued Description Part number Figure Ref PCL PJL Technical Reference Package 5021 0337 Photo interrupter IC TLP1230 WG8 0291 000CN 228 52 Photo interrupter IC TLP1240 WG8 5210 000CN 219 234 23 40 Photo interrupter IC TLP1241 WG8 5362 000CN 221 24 Plastic parts C4785 60519 245 Kit 1 1A Anti curl string 1B Spring for anti curl string 1C Pulley small bottom 1D Cable holder round gasket 1E Flat cable holder edge 1F Flat cable holder 1G Spacer plastic Plate paper limit back RG5 4201 000CN 242 84 Plate paper limit middle RG5 3849 000CN 242 85 Plate paper reference front RF5 3850 000CN 242 86 Plate duct mount RF5 2036 000CN 21
55. J647 4 GND on the main relay PCA after the printer is turned on If the voltage is not 24 V replace the power supply Measure the voltage across connector J211 7 SCND and J211 6 GND on the controller board after the printer is turned on If the voltage changes from 0 V to 17 V or more replace the laser scanner unit Replace the laser scanner unit Replace the controller board EN Printer message troubleshooting 321 Table 39 Numbered printer messages continued 53 lt X gt lt y gt lt zz gt ERROR DIMM SLOT lt n gt Description Indicates that a memory error occurred during the configuration and validation of DIMM memory lt X gt Hardware type 0 ROM 1 RAM 2 Font DIMM lt y gt Hardware device 0 Onboard ROM RAM 1 DIMM slot 1 2 DIMM slot 2 3 DIMM slot 3 4 DIMM slot 4 5 DIMM slot 5 6 DIMM slot 6 7 DIMM slot 7 8 DIMM slot 8 lt Zz gt Error 00 Unsupported memory 01 Unrecognized memory 02 Unsupported memory size 03 Failed RAM test 04 Exceeded maximum RAM size 05 Exceeded maximum ROM size 06 Invalid DIMM speed check DRAM 07 DIMM is reporting incorrect checksums 10 DIMM address 11 PDC XROM out of bounds 12 Could not make temporary mapping 13 Invalid RAM type 14 DIMM not paired properly 15 Bad firmware upgrade DIMM checksum 16 More than one set of firmware upgrade DIMMs 17 Not enough DRAM to run lt n gt EI
56. M1 See carousel motor M2 See drum motor M3 See cartridge motor M4 See main motor M5 See pick up motor Macintosh cable parts list 447 magenta detail value 79 smooth value 79 magenta toner cartridge installing 88 location 104 replace frequency 105 mailbox mode multi bin mailbox 186 mailbox See multi bin mailbox main drive 2 000 sheet input unit assembly 282 clutch 182 main gear assembly 261 main motor description and illustration 163 location 159 main motor 2 000 sheet input unit 182 main relay PCA 266 maintenance black toner cartridge 87 color toner cartridges 88 consumables 85 imaging drum 86 maintenance continued strategy 203 user replaceable parts 205 maintenance units See consumables manual feed 74 350 manuals ordering 50 matching colors 385 Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS 45 52 maximum media sizes 28 MBM See multi bin mailbox media capacities multi bin mailbox 30 capacities printer 28 cautions for printing 33 configuring default size 76 configuring destinations 73 configuring sizes 91 configuring types 90 91 duplexer specifications 31 error feeding from tray 1 328 handling 26 input tray capacities 28 jams 340 overriding type size 74 parts list 447 print speeds 20 requirements 26 selecting 26 specifications 26 storing 27 to avoid 33 trays See tray 1 tray 2 tray 3 tray 4 trays See also envelopes glossy labels paper transparencies media size sensing PCAs 269 m
57. Printing Menu 0000 eee 76 VO MEU cee steee ene ond eee ee pane e 78 Resets MENU noc ba moder derseeade dehE Reese 78 Color Adjust Menu 0 0 79 Service Mode Menu 20000 e eee 80 Chapter contents 57 Selecting the display language 84 Installing the consumables 00000 eee 85 Configuring input trays ce eee 90 Selecting the mode for trayl1 90 Configuring media type and size 91 Verifying the printer is installed correctly 92 Verifying DIMM installation aana anaana 93 Paper handling accessory status LEDs 94 58 Chapter 3 Operational overview EN Verifying package contents Figure 7 Note EN Verify the following items were included from the factory Contents of printer box 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 If a 2 000 sheet input unit was ordered it replaces the printer stand A power box and a C link cable are also included Four toner cartridges black cyan magenta and yellow Power cord Software on CD ROM Manuals getting started guide and quick reference guide Printer shown with standard printer stand Imaging drum Printer control panel overlay if applicable Media size labels Left face up output bin Verifying package contents 59 Verifying the cables are installed Verify that the cabl
58. Remove the high voltage converter 2 PCA see page 264 2 Remove 1 screw to release the wire from the open ended diode callout 1 screw is hidden from view High voltage converter 1 3 Release 2 cable stays 4 Remove one screw on the top of the converter callout 2 5 Lift the converter up and out Rear assemblies 263 High voltage converter 2 assemblies The high voltage converter 2 includes two PCAs stacked on top of each other and is located on the upper left side when facing the rear of the printer Removing high voltage converter 2 PCA 1 Remove the rear cover see page 222 2 Remove the formatter board and formatter pan see page 230 and page 248 Remove the controller board see page 253 Unplug 6 connectors from the PCA callout 1 a KG High voltage converter 2 PCA 5 Release 2 cable stays 6 Remove 2 screws from the PCA callout 2 7 Lift the PCA up slightly and out 264 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Notes on reinstalling Seat the bottom of the PCA first by placing the tabs in the corresponding holes When putting the PCA back in be sure you do not get any wiring caught behind it Removing high voltage converter 2 1 Remove the rear cover see page 222 2 Remove the formatter board and formatter pan see page 230 and page 248 3 Unplug 2 connectors callout 1 E r a Ti 2 ka i Pg LEE 3 F baran i oy PH j z TA p High voltage converter 2
59. Repetitive defects troubleshooting 421 Transfer roller Symptoms Print defect occurring every 66 mm Cause Dirty or damaged transfer roller Actions Clean the transfer roller with isopropyl alcohol and a hand wipe If cleaning does not resolve the defect replace the transfer belt Transfer drum Symptoms Print defect occurring once per page on 11 by 17 inch or A3 sized media or on every other letter or A4 sized page Cause Dirty or damaged transfer drum Actions Clean the transfer drum see below If the defect is not resolved by cleaning replace the transfer drum Cleaning the transfer drum Many but not all repetitive defects can be removed using the following procedures Defects that appear as light spots in dark areas of print are more likely to be corrected by this procedure than dark spots in unprinted areas CAUTION If the procedures are performed incorrectly or without proper care the transfer drum can be permanently damaged This procedure requires the following items aprint sample showing the repetitive defect e aclean flat surface to work on isopropyl alcohol e ahand wipe CAUTION You can also use a dry clean soft lint free cloth such as cheesecloth to clean the transfer drum To prevent scratches on the drum do not use any paper products such as tissue or paper towels to clean the drum 422 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Figure 205 CAUTION Note EN Turn the printe
60. Technology HP FIRST Europe 52 U S 52 FCC regulations 39 features control panel 66 ElO 20 fonts 20 model differences 19 personality 20 print speeds 20 resolution 20 user interface 20 feed roller clutch 177 feed rollers 2 000 sheet input unit 182 185 printer 124 feeder assembly 233 482 feeding error 325 manual 350 process 167 speeds 167 field replaceable units FRUs 2 000 sheet input unit 271 ordering 51 parts list 449 files operation failed 342 printing directories 71 filters installing air 110 installing charcoal 106 location 104 ozone 46 replace frequency 105 Finland laser statement 44 firmware error 318 test 82 FIRST Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology Europe 52 U S 52 FIRST mode 90 fixer See fuser fixing See fusing flipper assembly 192 291 calibration 437 error 437 jam 437 roller motor 190 flip up media stop 35 FMx See fan 1 fan 2 fan 3 fans fonts configuring PCL number 76 configuring PCL pitch 76 configuring PCL point size 76 configuring PCL source 76 Courier settings 77 deleted 351 deleted downloaded 355 Postscript PS 20 printing list 354 standard 20 support 52 TrueType 20 form length configuring 76 formatter assemblies 37 formatter board 230 diagnostics 81 location 36 37 parts list 449 serial number 80 video test VX ASIC 82 formatter pan 248 frequency for replacing consumables 105 front assemblies 227 front cover 2 000 sheet input unit 272 multi bin mailbox
61. Tray 1 assembly EN 484 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Delivery assembly Bb Figure 236 Delivery assembly Table 71 Delivery assembly parts Ref Description Part number Qty Delivery assembly RG0 0110 000CN 1 11 Lever paper sensing RB1 6692 000CN 1 12 Lever paper height RA0 0112 000CN 1 EN Illustrations and parts lists 485 Figure 237 Delivery cover assembly Delivery cover assembly Table 72 Delivery cover assembly parts Ref Description Part number Qty Delivery cover assembly RG5 3108 000CN 1 12 Holder flapper RB1 9751 000CN 1 13 Cover left upper RB2 0057 000CN 1 24 Hinge stopper delivery RF5 2701 000CN 1 486 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams EN Transfer belt assembly Q Ca Q NO 6 Figure 238 Transfer belt assembly Table 73 Transfer belt assembly parts Ref Description Part number Qty Transfer belt assembly RG5 3047 000CN 1 EN Illustrations and parts lists 487 Fuser assembly Figure 239 Fuser assembly 1 of 2 488 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams EN Fuser assembly 2 of 2 Figure 240 Illustrations and parts lists 489 EN Table 74 Fuser assembly parts Ref Description Part number Qty Fuser assembly 120V RG5 3060 000CN 1 Fuser assembly 220V RG5 3061 000CN 8 L
62. Tray 1 assembly Figure 212 Major assembly locations 1 of 2 450 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams EN Drum cartridge drive assembly Solenoid assembly Delivery frame assembly Fuser assembly Tray 2 Tray 3 Imaging drum ge Black toner cartrid Color toner cartridge Major assembly locations 2 of 2 Figure 213 Illustrations and parts lists 451 EN Printer covers and doors 100 127V Printer covers and doors 1 of 3 Figure 214 EN 452 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 51 Printer doors and covers 1 of 3 Ref Description Part number Qty 3 Cover assembly front RG0 0112 000CN 1 3B Lever shutter RA0 0008 000CN 1 3D Strap front door support RB1 4497 000CN 1 3E Latch roller action RB1 5153 000CN 1 4 Cover assembly left upper RG0 0113 000CN 1 4B Lever left upper door RB1 6485 000CN 1 4C Spring left upper door lever RB1 6486 000CN 1 8 Cover hinge RA0 0068 000CN 1 9 Cover front right RA0 0069 000CN 1 10 Cover left lower RB1 6480 000CN 1 11 Tray face up RB 1 6491 000CN 1 12 Cover power switch RB1 6492 000CN 1 EN Illustrations and parts lists 453 Printer covers and doors 2 of 3 Figure 215 EN 454 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 52 Printer doors and covers 2
63. Verify that the c link and power cables are connected Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer Verify that there are no objects in the left side of the tray Verify that the paper tray raised sensor PS34 is working properly perform a sensor test Check for proper installation of the pick up roller Check the pick up assembly and the paper deck drive assembly cabling Replace the pick up assembly Replace the paper deck drive assembly 66 11 03 INPUT DEVICE FAILURE CHECK CABLES AND CYCLE POWER Description Indicates a 2 000 sheet input unit lifting and feed motor error Event log message 66 11 03 Action 1 10 11 Verify that the c link and power cables are connected Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer Verify that there are no objects in the left side of the tray Verify that the lifting plate moves freely by hand Verify that the paper size plates are installed correctly and that they are not bent Replace the paper deck drive assembly bushing Replace the paper deck drive assembly Check that the paper tray raised sensor P534 is working properly perform a sensor test Check for proper installation of the pick up roller Check pick up assembly cabling Replace the pick up assembly EN Printer message troubleshooting 331 Table 39 Numbered printer messages continued 66 22 08 OUTPUT DEVICE FAILURE CHECK CABLES AND CYCLE POWER
64. aiii m ag al Ti 5 i nig T m EE am Eea a ne i T E all a oe ia LI NG ap rmen SEN E Pon ai i 5 T ELE LI Tan mood Sn Ea t Figure 181 Example of a configuration page 1 Printer Information Lists the following information e printer product number e serial number e PCL firmware date code e PostScript version e total pages printed during the life of the printer e number of color pages printed during the life of the printer e number of black and white pages printed during the life of the printer e number of duplex pages printed during the life of the printer 2 Installed Options Shows whether options have been installed such as the printer hard disk DIMMs duplexer multi bin mailbox and optional input trays 3 Consumables of Life Remaining Shows the percentage of the maximum rated life remaining for the transfer kit fuser kit and drum kit 362 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Note EN Memory Shows the total memory installed in the printer including the printer hard disk and the settings that affect how the memory is used Paper Tray Configuration Lists the types and sizes of media configured for each input tray Security Shows whether the security features have been activated such as the printer control panel lock printer control panel password and printer hard disk lock There is also a service information code for service personnel Event Log
65. and Human Services DHHS Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968 Since radiation emitted inside this printer is completely confined within protective housings and external covers the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation Safety information 43 Laser statement for Finland Luokan 1 laserlaite Klass 1 Laser Apparat HP LaserJet 8500 8500 N 8500 DN laserkirjoitin on kayttajan kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite Normaalissa kaytossa kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estaa lasersateen paasyn laitteen ulkopuolelle Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on maaritetty standardin EN 60825 1 1994 mukaisesti Varoitus Laitteen k ytt minen muulla kuin kayttbohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa k ytt j n turvallisuusluokan 1 ylitt v lle n kym tt m lle lasers teilylle Varning Om apparaten anv nds p annat s tt n i bruksanvisning specificerats kan anv ndaren uts ttas f r osynlig laserstr lning som verskrider gr nsen f r laserklass 1 HUOLTO HP LaserJet 8500 8500 N 8500 DN kirjoittimen sis ll ei ole k ytt j n huollettavissa olevia kohteita Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkil T llaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota v riainekasetin vaihtamista paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita k ytt j n k sikirjassa lueteltuja k ytt j n teht v ksi tarkoitettuja yll pitotoim
66. and close the front door of the printer to complete a cleaning cycle Print a configuration page to check the life of the transfer kit Replace the transfer kit if it is past its rated life Print continuous configuration pages 10 to 20 pages to see if the print quality improves Print a configuration page to check the life of the drum kit Replace the drum kit if it is past its rated life If contamination is made up of all four toner colors verify that the imaging drum is not contaminated and that the waste toner cartridge is not too full a full waste toner cartridge will make the imaging drum much heavier than a new imaging drum If the cartridge is full check the waste toner detection connections If no error message appeared on the printer control panel Use the service and support CD to help troubleshoot print quality problems Print clean ps found on the CD on letter or A4 sized paper from tray 2 and on 11 by 17 inch or A3 sized paper from tray 3 to troubleshoot the cleaning and contamination problems Type the following command at the DOS prompt to print the files copy lt file name gt lpt1 Image defects troubleshooting 413 Color balance adjustment CAUTION Adjusting the color balance changes the printer s calibration Because this procedure adjusts parameters within the printer hardware it will affect all print jobs The printer automatically recalibrates the color settings However you can adjust the color m
67. are removed from the printer Printer hardware or software configuration has not changed or the problem is not associated with any specific software Refer customers to their software vendor for software related problems Pre troubleshooting checklist 315 Printer message troubleshooting This section contains explanations and recommended actions for messages that appear on the printer control panel e Numbered messages Table 39 beginning on this page e Unnumbered messages in alphabetical order Table 40 beginning on page 334 Note The action field for each control panel message describes the steps to resolve the message Each step is a self contained resolution for the message however the steps should be followed in order Table 39 Numbered printer messages kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Description Displayed during startup as the individual tasks begin initializing and during a low level self test A character other than indicates an error has occurred Event log message None Action No action is required 20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY Description More data has been received from the computer than fits in the printer s internal memory Event log message 20 00 00 Action No action is required Only the amount of data that fits in the printer s internal memory is printed If this error occurs frequently or if large or complex print jobs are often sent to the printer add more memory to the printer
68. assemblies 251 Power supply The power supply is located on the lower right side of the rear of the printer AN 1 Remove the rear cover see page 222 ESD 2 Remove the formatter board and formatter pan see page 230 and page 248 Unplug the 5 connectors Release 1 cable stay Remove 5 screws 2 in the top 1 on the left 2 on the right callout 1 LE j baka A p Figure 122 Power supply 6 Lift the power supply out of the chassis 252 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Controller board The controller board is located on the lower left side of the rear of the printer b 1 Printa configuration page if the printer is able to generate one ADA see page 361 This page can be used to reset the page count ESD values that will be lost if the controller board is replaced Remove the rear cover see page 222 3 Remove the formatter board and formatter pan see page 230 and page 248 4 Unplug 25 connectors Hint All 25 connectors are keyed Also it is easier to unplug the connectors before removing the screws from the PCA 5 Remove 4 screws callout 1 Figure 123 Controller board 6 Push the white plastic holding tab in the upper left corner to the left callout 2 and pull the controller board straight out Notes on reinstalling e When putting the controller board back in the pins on the back connector must be lined up or you might damage the pins EN Rear assemblies 253 Cartridge mot
69. board The controller board then signals the formatter that no pages are in tray 1 and stops the next image formation The PS19 detects no page before the next image is written and prevents the imaging drum and the transfer drum from getting dirty 170 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN Controller board O TIPOA 1 PCA Tray 1 clutch Registration roller Transfer belt Feed roller 2 Figure 59 Tray 1 pick up 1 Registration roller clutch drive signal SL4 Lifting plate solenoid 2 Main motor drive signal CL1 Registration roller clutch 3 Registration roller paper detection CL3 Tray 1 pick up clutch signal PS1 Registration roller paper 4 Tray 1 pick up clutch drive signal sensor 5 Tray 1 paper detection signal PS19 Tray 1 last page sensor 6 Lifting plate position detection signal PS1301 Tray 1 page sensor 7 Lifting plate solenoid drive signal PS1302 Lifting plate position sensor 8 Tray 1 last paper detection signal PS1701 Tray 1 paper width sensor 9 Tray 1 paper width detection signal PS1801 OHT sensor 1 10 OHT detection signal PS1802 OHT sensor 2 11 OHT detection signal EN Paper path 171 Figure 60 172 Chapter 5 Theory of operation Sensors switches clutches and solenoids The following figures and tables illustrate and describe the sensors switches clutches and solenoids in the printer paper path x EBA PS3 Ps1sos
70. color pages Cyan REPLACE color Magenta Yellow Drum kit DRUM LIFE LOW 40 000 black and white 6 7 months black and white only pages or 1 7 months color pages Transfer kit Transfer drum Transfer belt Transfer charger Cleaning roller Charcoal filter TRANSFER KIT LOW REPLACE KIT 150 000 black and white only pages or 75 000 color pages 25 months black and white only pages or 12 5 months color pages Fuser Paper rollers 6 Hand wipe REPLACE KIT Hand wipe Fuser kit 110 Volt FUSER LIFE LOW 100 000 pages 16 7 months Fuser REPLACE KIT Paper rollers 6 Hand wipe Fuser kit 220 Volt FUSER LIFE LOW 100 000 pages 16 7 months f Approximate life based on printing 6 000 pages per month E Approximate average letter size page count based on 5 coverage of individual toner colors This value can be used to estimate other levels of coverage from 2 to 35 For example 5 000 pages at 5 coverage is approximately 2 500 pages at 10 coverage Estimates made in this manner are only approximate and usage conditions and print patterns can cause the results to vary EN Printer consumables 105 Installing consumables Toner cartridges For information on replacing the black and color toner cartridges see page 87 and page 88 Transfer kit Replace the parts in the transfer kit when the printer control panel displays TRANSFER KIT LOW REPLACE KIT TRANSFER KIT OUT REPLACE KIT
71. conditions at the beginning of the imaging drum life The 14 mm band correlates to the unexposed area of the imaging drum sealed by the cleaner blade and sweeper strip see figure 38 on page 140 e Leave the printer in Power Save mode for 24 hours The imaging drum will rotate periodically Perform a sensor monitor test see page 368 to get a reading from the temperature humidity sensors e Print continuous configuration pages 10 to 100 pages to see if the print quality improves Image defects troubleshooting 411 Overhead transparency defects Overhead transparencies can display any of the image quality defects shown in figures 192 through 202 pages 388 through 398 In addition because transparencies are pliable while in the print path they are subject to being marked by the media handling components Print from tray 1 to the left face up output bin to reduce the chances of print defects on transparencies e Verify that the green lever on the fuser is locked down Check that the transparencies meet the specifications listed on page 31 e Make sure that Transparency is checked as the media type in the Paper tab in the printer driver Also make sure that the media input tray is correctly configured for transparencies elf transparencies show lines and creases in the media and or the printed output compare the defect against the repetitive defects ruler to help isolate the cause to a particular component see p
72. feed roller 1 and separation roller are driven The paper is then picked up from the tray 3 pick up roller e Multi feed prevention mechanism During paper pick up from tray 2 or 3 the separation roller prevents multi feeding e Tray 2 last page detection The last page sensor P529 consists of a light emitter and light receiver When paper is present in tray 2 the light from the light emitter is reflected by the paper and received by the light receiver However when the last page is picked up the light from the light emitter is transmitted inside the printer and does not reach the light receiver The controller board signals the formatter that there is no paper in tray 2 and stops formation of the next image The tray 2 last page detection prevents the imaging drum and the transfer drum from getting dirty by detecting that no paper is available before the next image is written 168 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN Controller board i f Pick up PCA O i Registration roller iC l i Co I buta up roller KA OO SD rolle I Tray 2 EE _ a a Na O o Lo lease or Feed roller 1 normal rotation ae NI I Separation ii In case of Tray 3 reverse rotation Lifter Figure 58 Tray 2 and 3 pick up Pick up motor drive signal M4 Main motor Feed roller clutch drive signal M5 Pick up motor Tray pick up solenoid drive signal SL3 T
73. from the printer to service any of the units The replaceable units include e front back left and right e front LED PCA assembly aes power supply vertical transfer unit VTU tray 4 main drive assembly paper size sensor paper pick up assembly assemblies 2 controller PCA tension springs 2 000 sheet input unit 271 Front cover 1 Open tray 4 to the stops 2 Remove the paper limit back plate from the tray callout 1 ip Figure 141 Front cover of the 2 000 sheet input unit Remove 4 screws callout 2 Use a flat blade screwdriver to release the plastic retaining tabs on the left and right front sides of the tray callout 3 5 Carefully lift up on the front cover and then pull it out to release the plastic retaining tabs that secure the bottom of the front cover to the tray chassis Notes on reinstalling e Ensure the plastic retaining tabs are replaced properly 272 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Back cover 1 Unplug the power cord and the C link interface cables from the 2 000 sheet input unit 2 Remove 4 screws callout 1 5 la rou Figure 142 Back cover removal 3 Pull the cover back from the chassis Notes on reinstalling e Make sure the tab on the lower left corner is inserted into its alignment slot EN 2 000 sheet input unit 273 Left cover 1 Unplug the power cord and the C link interface cables from the 2 000 sheet input unit 2 Remove 2 screws callo
74. front door to complete a printer self cleaning cycle Verify that the green lever on the fuser is locked down Also check that the fuser does not have toner build up on the inputs Clean any loose toner accumulated around the fuser Ifthe waste toner container is full print might smear Check the imaging drum life by printing a configuration page If the drum kit is past its rated life replace the drum kit e Perform a paper path test from the Service Mode Menu see page 365 and look for obstructions in the paper path e Check that the media meets the specifications listed beginning on page 26 Rough media is most likely to show this defect If media is heavier than 28 Ib 105 g m bond you must select Heavy Paper as the paper type on the paper tab in the printer driver to ensure the correct finish on the media e Bent corners on the page can smear print During the paper pick particularly on rough media the corner of the page might be bent If the page retains the bend as it enters the fuser print in the area of the bend might smear Ensure that the paper is correctly loaded in the paper tray If the defect persists turn the paper stack over and end for end Finally try another media type e Ensure the transfer belt is installed correctly and is seated in its notches 404 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Print on back of page non duplexed page e Ifthe previous page printed was a prepunched media and there was an im
75. guide callout 2 Figure 166 Input paper guide 2 of 2 5 Pull the input paper guide free of the frame while routing the ground wire through the wire access hole callout 3 296 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN WARNING Figure 167 EN Metallic tape and housing assembly 1 Remove all paper bins and the blind cover see page 290 The sharp edges of the metal tape can cause serious injury When rewinding the metal tape into its housing hold the tape securely and rewind it slowly 2 With the delivery head assembly at the top of the multi bin mailbox hold the metal tape near the end and push and release the retainer tab that secures the end of the tape to the top of the frame callout 1 Then let the tape slowly rewind into its housing wW i paaa ssu uz eee i LEI iiaiai T I a H TE aaa i mma F i iii i ont z 1 ALEE a EO NN Metallic tape and housing assembly 1 of 2 3 Remove 1 screw from the static brush callout 2 and then move the static brush out of the way 4 Lower the delivery head assembly halfway to the stops Multi bin mailbox 297 5 Use a flat blade screwdriver to release the plastic retaining tabs located on each side of the tape housing callout 3 Figure 168 Metallic tape and housing assembly 2 of 2 6 Gently pull on the delivery head assembly to remove the end of the tape from behind the rollers callout 4 7 Pull the
76. half tone screens for each of the four colors black cyan magenta and yellow for a total of eight adjustments Make these adjustments after examining the color adjust page The color adjust page consists of two sections the Detail Half tone Adjust section and the Smooth Half tone Adjust section Each section shows the adjustment ramps for black cyan magenta and yellow and a neutral axis check ramp which can be used to verify the adjustment after the correction values have been entered for each of the primary colors Figure 203 is an example of the color adjust page 2 Note the numbers beside the red arrows for later reference The color adjust page indicates the last set of saved color settings with a red arrow next to the saved setting The default for each color is 0 other possible settings include 6 through 6 3 Determine the color adjustment numbers for each color in the color ramps a Examine the color adjust page from a distance of 6 ft approximately 2 m b Find the circle of each color that most closely matches the background color It might be necessary to squint slightly to match the colors c Record the number in the circle 416 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN 4 Enter the color adjustment numbers in the printer control panel a Press GO and VALUE at the same time COLOR ADJUST thi appears on the display b Press ITEM until the option you want appears on the display The options are listed below
77. in the YUG assembly delivery head assembly WLLL The sliders do not activate the slider Check that all paper bins are UML photosensor seated correctly Replace the delivery head assembly EN Multi bin mailbox troubleshooting 437 Table 48 Status LEDs on the multi bin mailbox continued User LED Service LEDs Message description External memory error Multi bin mailbox nonvolatile RAM NVRAM damaged Recommended action Replace the multi bin mailbox controller PCA VILL Jam in delivery head assembly Time out condition in the PSExit1 sensor Check for media jam in the delivery head assembly Check for free movement in both PSExit1 and PSExit2 sensors on the delivery head assembly Check that the fingers are over the ejector rollers on the delivery head assembly Replace the flat ribbon cable that connects to the delivery head assembly Replace the delivery head assembly Replace the multi bin mailbox controller PCA VILL Jam in the delivery head position system The elevator motor detects an invalid window when scanning Check that the blind cover and scan bar are installed properly Check for media jam in the delivery head assembly Check for free movement of the delivery head assembly Check that all paper bins are seated correctly Check that paper bins and blind cover are not broken Replace the de
78. information a 39 FUG kale EULA sack ase ae artnet ioe a EA 39 Canadian DOC regulations 39 Declarations of conformity 2005 40 VCCI statement Japan 43 EMI statement Korea 0000 eee eee 43 Laser safety statement 000005 43 Laser statement for Finland 44 Product information sheet 2005 45 Toner safety 2444 cee ee eA ek Beene 45 Material Safety Data Sheet 45 Ozone safety 0a 46 18 Chapter 1 Product information Printer features Table 1 Features and optional accessories by printer model 8500 8500 N 8500 DN Features 7 Standard DIMM memory 32 MB 32 MB 64 MB Expandable to 512 MB of DIMM memory X X X Internal printer hard disk 2 000 sheet input unit x XxX X Duplexer HP JetDirect 600N internal print server X X Optional accessories External ElO compatible printer X X hard disk ROM or synchronous DRAM DIMMs X X X Duplexer X X HP JetDirect 600N internal print server X Multi bin mailbox X 1 To expand the DIMM memory to 512 MB install 64 MB DIMMs in all eight DIMM slots EN Printer features 19 Table 2 Printer performance Print speeds 24 pages per minute ppm black and white b w 6ppm color Text and graphics resolution 600 dpi resolution Approximate print speeds Letter A4 size 24 ppm b w
79. is installed that supports EIO page printing PRINT CONTINUOUS CONFIG None Used for testing printer operation PAGES PRINT EVENT LOG None Shows printer events EN Menu maps 71 Proof and Print Menu Table 14 Proof and Print Menu This menu appears only if the printer has a hard disk installed Item Value Description action lt job name gt lt job owner gt lt job name gt lt job owners lt ob name gt lt job owners lt job name gt lt job owners lt job name gt lt job owners lt nn gt SELECTED lt nn gt PRINTED lt nn gt SELECTED lt nn gt PRINTED lt nn gt SELECTED lt nn gt PRINTED lt nn gt SELECTED lt nn gt PRINTED lt nn gt SELECTED lt nn gt PRINTED lt nn gt Number of copies To cancel a proof and print job 1 Press TEM to display the job name and job owner 2 Press VALUE to change the number of copies to be printed 3 Press SELECT to print the remaining copies Or Press CANCEL JOB or set the number of copies to zero to delete the remaining copies Paper Handling Menu Table 15 Paper Handling Menu Item TRAY 1 MODE TRAY 1 TYPE Default setting Value FIRST CASSETTE PLAIN PREPRINTD LTRHEAD TRNSPRNCY PREPUNCHED LABELS BOND RECYCLED COLOR CARDSTOCK HEAVY GLOSSY 28 TYPE 1 28 TYPE 2 ENVELOPE Description action Appears only if TRAY 1 MODE CASSETTE 72 Chapter 3 Operat
80. laser driver PCA There the voltage differential signals are converted to a single laser drive signal the internal signal of the laser scanner unit in the laser driver PCA which turns the laser diode on and off and generates the modulated laser beam The modulated laser beam is aligned by the collimator lens and the cylindrical lens becoming a parallel beam The laser beam then strikes the scanning mirror that rotates at a constant speed The beam reflected from the scanning mirror travels through the focusing lens and the reflecting mirror located in front of the scanning mirror and is brought to a focus point on the imaging drum The scanning mirror rotates at a constant speed so the laser beam is scanned across the drum at a constant speed The drum is also rotating at a slower constant speed which allows the laser beam to form an image on the drum surface EN Mechanical systems 157 Formatter PCA LSYNC TOP VDO0 7 VCLK CMD PRNT Controller board BSAMPLE LENB BDATA BDATA SCMFG SCND Collimator lens Laser driver PCA Cylindrical lens Scanning mirror Si gt Scanner motor Focusing lens BD mirror Reflecting mirror Imaging drum Figure 50 Laser scanner If the laser scanner motor does not reach operating speed within seven seconds of rotation then the laser scanner motor lock detection circuit generates a scanner motor failure and the laser scanner motor sto
81. late jam Action 1 Open the left lower cover remove the duplexer remove the jammed media reinstall the duplexer and close the left lower cover 2 The fusing assembly and diverter assemblies can also cause duplex printing problems Verify their operation 3 Open the left lower cover and defeat the delivery cover interlock Toggle the sensors at the paper exit and entrance While running the sensor monitor test from the Service Mode Menu verify sensors 8 and 9 on the printer control panel indicate 1 on when toggled Note This procedure will not work if the left lower cover interlock is not defeated 4 Replace the duplexer Printer message troubleshooting 335 Table 40 Unnumbered printer messages continued CLEAR FUSER JAM LOWER LEFT DOOR Description The printer senses a media jam in the fuser area The printer expected a page to come through the fuser but the paper has not toggled PS1903 or PS1903 has been toggled an extended amount of time See table 42 on page 381 for an explanation of paper jam detection details CLEAR INPUT DEVICE JAM Description There is a jam in the 2 000 sheet input tray 336 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Event log message 13 00 0 lt x gt lt x gt Description 3 Fusing delivery paper delay jam 4 Fusing delivery stationary jam Action WARNING Do not touch the fuser it could be very hot and could cause burns 1 Open the left lower cover remove the jammed
82. leading edge of the media within about 2 4 seconds normal mode letter sized media landscape 9 6 seconds overhead transparency mode letter sized media landscape 7 2 seconds high gloss mode letter sized media landscape 4 2 seconds normal mode 1 1 by 17 inch sized media 17 0 seconds overhead transparency mode 1 1 by 17 inch sized media 12 7 seconds high gloss mode 1 1 by 17 inch sized media The fusing delivery sensor PS1903 does not detect the media for the specified time or longer within 0 2 to 1 2 seconds after PS1903 detects the leading edge of the media within about 0 8 seconds normal mode 3 2 seconds overhead transparency mode 2 4 seconds high gloss mode Paper path troubleshooting 381 Table 42 Media jam detection continued Location of jam Top face down output bin delivery delay media jam Detected when The media has not reached the top face down output bin delivery sensor PS11 within the specified time after the fusing delivery sensor PS1903 detects the media about 4 0 seconds normal mode about 16 0 seconds overhead transparency mode about 12 0 seconds high gloss mode Top face down tray delivery stationary jam The media has not passed through the top face down output bin delivery sensor PS11 within the specified time after PS11 detects the media within about 2 4 seconds normal mode letter sized media landscape 9 6 s
83. left side of the printer If the printer contains an optional duplexer press the green tab on the right side of the duplexer and pull the duplexer out of the printer To unlock the fuser rotate the blue levers down On the right side of the fuser lift the large green lever to release the fuser springs On the left side of the fuser rotate the blue gear down two or three times to release the fuser EN EN Firmly pull the fuser up by the blue tabs on both ends and then pull the fuser out Use the blue tabs to slide the new fuser into the printer along the guides On the left side of the fuser rotate the blue gear up two or three times until the fuser drops into place CAUTION Use only the blue tabs to push the fuser into the printer 9 10 11 12 13 On the right side of the fuser push the green lever down Rotate the blue levers up until they Snap into place If an optional duplexer was removed from the printer slide the duplexer back into the printer until it clicks into place Close the lower left door If an optional
84. lt XXXX gt lt XXXX gt lt XXXXXXXXXXXX gt lt XXXXXXXXXXXX gt LETTER A4 NO YES Description action Number of duplex pages processed Remaining life left from 0 to 100 percent Remaining life left from 0 to 100 percent The registration values of the engine used to align the various color planes The values are listed on a sticker inside the front of the printer to the left of the printer control panel and to the right of the front door Enter these values only when replacing the control board Enter only 12 characters for each engine setting 0 zero to F The last two digits of the engine setting might change after setting because of varying checksum values This difference is acceptable See ENGINE SETTING 1 The cold reset CR paper size is the default paper size for the country for which the printer is localized If the NVRAM SETTING menu is used to change the CR PAPER SIZE the PAPER setting in the Printing Menu also changes to make the new CR PAPER SIZE the default paper size Clears the printer event log Press SELECT to enter the FORMATTER DIAGNOSTICS menu ITEM and VALUE do not function until SELECT is pressed Once the FORMATTER DIAGNOSTICS menu has been entered MENU moves only between the FORMATTER DIAGNOSTICS and FAULT LOG EN Menu maps 81 Table 21 Service Mode Menu continued Service Mode Menu ltem REPEAT ON FAULT ROM CRC DRAM D
85. mailbox The multi bin mailbox is an output unit designed for variable speeds from 6 to 32 ppm The multi bin mailbox holds up to 2 100 sheets distributed in eight 250 sheet face down bins and one 100 sheet face up bin Operating modes The multi bin mailbox features four intelligent and configurable operating modes e Mailbox mode The network administrator can address each bin as an output destination with a name assigned to it The printer sends a print job to the selected bin If the assigned bin is full the printer stops printing e Job separator mode Each print job or copy if printing multiple original copies is placed in a separate bin All multi bin mailbox bins are used for this purpose starting with the first face down bin at the top If a multi bin mailbox bin is full the printer automatically sends the job to the next available bin If there are more jobs than bins the extra jobs will start again at the top face down bin This process is seen in the printer software as one logical bin e Virtual stacker mode Printed sheets are stacked face down in the bins from the lowest bin to the top bin regardless of where a print job begins or ends All printed sheets are sent to the bottom bin until it is full subsequent sheets are sent to the next upward bin until it is full This mode of operation takes advantage of the total capacity of the multi bin mailbox bins In this mode the software sees the multi bin ma
86. mailbox shipping lock kit J3110A Ethernet 10Base T J3111A Ethernet combo 10Base T BNC and LocalTalk EN Illustrations and parts lists 505 Table 81 Numerical parts list continued Part number Description Figure Ref J3112A Token Ring J3113 61003 PCA 10 100Base T J3113A 10 100Base TX IRA0 0008 000CN Lever shutter 0 A4 8B RA0 0026 000CN Cover inner 2 217 2 RA0 0027 000CN Cover inner 3 217 3 RA0 0065 000CN Cover left rear 215 6 IRA0 0067 000CN Cover rightrear J J C H30H 38B8B8 016 7 RA0 0068 000CN Cover hinge 214 8 RA0 0069 000CN Cover front right 214 9 RA0 0073 000CN Stop flip up media 215 2D RA0 0074 000CN Cover right rear lower corner 220 1 RA0 0078 000CN Cover auxiliary 215 20 RA0 0079 000CN Support cover 215 51A RA0 0083 000CN Cover waste toner tray 217 10 RA0 0112 000CN Lever paper height 236 12 RB1 4497 000CN Strap front door support 214 3D RB1 5153 000CN Latch roller action 214 SE RB1 6409 000CN Spring torsion 231 2 RB1 6417 000CN Arm sensor 231 3 RB1 6463 000CN Rod power switch 220 5 RB1 6480 000CN Cover left lower 214 10 RB1 6484 000CN Stopper open close 215216 6A 16C RB1 6485 000CN Lever left upper door 214 4B Lever right lower cover 216 16D Lever right upper door 216 17 RB1 6486 000CN Spring compression 216 16E Spring left upper door lever 214 4C Spri
87. modifications to the printer not expressly approved by HP could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply within the Class B limits in Part 15 of FCC rules Canadian DOC regulations Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements Conforme a la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilite electromagnetiques CEM Safety information 39 Declarations of conformity DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 Manufacturer s Name Hewlett Packard Company Manufacturer s Address 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise Idaho 83714 1021 USA declares that the product Product Name HP Color LaserJet 8500 8500 N 8500 DN Model Number C3983A C3984A C3985A Product Options ALL conforms to the following Product Specifications Safety IEC 950 1991 A1 A2 A3 A4 EN 60950 1992 A1 A2 A3 A4 IEC 825 1 1993 EN 60825 1 1994 Class 1 Laser LED EMC CISPR 22 1993 A1 EN 55022 1994 Class B CISPR 22 1993 A1 EN 55022 1994 Class A EN 5081 1 1992 EN 50082 1 1992 IEC 801 2 1991 prEN 55024 2 1992 4 kV CD 8 kV AD IEC 801 3 1984 prEN 55024 3 1991 3 V m IEC 801 4 1988 prEN 55024 4 1992 0 5 kV Signal Lines 1 0 kV Power Lines FCC Title 47 CFR Part 15 Class B2 ICES 003 Issue 2 VCCI 2 AS NZS 3548 1992 CISPR 22 1993 Class Supplementary Information The product herewith complies with the requirements of the following Directiv
88. multi bin mailbox is attached to the printer push the mailbox back toward the printer Installing consumables 115 To replace the rollers 1 Remove trays 2 and 3 2 On the inside right of each opening locate the two paper rollers that are blue on the ends Note The separation rollers that are not blue on the end will not be replaced 3 Onthe end of each roller pinch together the release lever and handle between two fingers and Slide the roller off of its spindle Set the rollers aside 4 While holding the new roller by its handle slide the roller onto the spindle until it clicks into place Repeat this procedure for the other three rollers 5 Replace trays 3 and 2 Note Trays 2 and 3 are not interchangeable 6 If an optional 2 000 sheet input unit is not attached to the printer proceed to step 9 If a 2 000 sheet input unit is attached open the vertical transfer door on the right side of the printer 116 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance EN EN 7 Locate the two rollers Remove the rollers upper roller first and replace them lower roller first Note Press down on the lower roller while replacing the upper one 8 10 11 12 Close the vertical transfer door and turn the printer on The printer control
89. of 3 Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Filter large air RB 1 9807 000CN 1 2 Cover assembly top RG0 0111 000CN 1 2D Stop flip up media RA0 0073 000CN 1 5 Cover assembly rear RG0 0115 000CN 1 6 Cover left rear RA0 0065 000CN 1 6A Stopper open close RB1 6484 000CN 1 19 Filter small air RB1 9808 000CN 1 20 Cover auxiliary RA0 0078 000CN 1 39 Cover fan RF0 0012 000CN 1 51 Cover rear fan housing RG0 0017 000CN 1 51A Support cover RA0 0079 000CN 1 51B Spring compression RS5 2719 000CN 1 EN Illustrations and parts lists 455 J75 J1101 Printer covers and doors 3 of 3 Figure 216 EN 456 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 53 Printer covers and doors parts Ref Description Part number Qty 7 Cover right rear RA0 0067 000CN 1 16 Cover assembly right lower RG5 3096 000CN 1 16C Stopper open close RB1 6484 000CN 1 16D Lever right lower cover RB1 6485 000CN 1 16E Spring compression RB1 6486 000CN 1 16G Roller paper RB1 6488 000CN 2 17 Lever right upper door RB1 6485 000CN 1 22 Spring right lower door lever RB1 6486 000CN 1 26 Spring torsion RB1 9798 000CN 1 31 Cover right subassembly RF5 1995 000CN 1 32 Cover density sensor RB1 9537 000CN 1 35 Density sensor assembly RG5 3057 000CN 1 35A Brush cleaning RB1 9617 000CN 1 36 Preconditioning exposure LED asse
90. on page 172 and the controller board always monitors these sensors Automatic overhead transparency detection The printer enters overhead transparency OHT mode when the user selects to print on transparencies through the printer driver or by selecting OHT as the media type in the printer control panel The OHT sensors PS1801 and PS1802 see figure 60 on page 172 are installed in front of the registration roller to detect transparencies even if the media type has not been set at the printer control panel by the user The controller board monitors these sensors to execute the automatic overhead transparency detection PS1801 and PS1802 consist of light emission and light reception units When a transparency is used the light emitted from the light emitter unit goes through the transparency and is received by the light receptor As a result the controller board determines that the fed media is a transparency and enters the OHT mode Paper path 167 Paper pick up Paper pick up begins when the print signal is sent The pick up roller is lowered to the paper level and the main motor M4 rotates the roller This process feeds the paper into the printer from the input trays e Tray pick up When the pick up motor is in normal rotation the tray 2 pick up roller feed roller 1 and separation roller are driven The paper is then picked up from the tray 2 pick up roller In the case of reverse rotation the tray 3 pick up roller
91. otherwise specified all references in this section to horizontal or vertical directions of print quality problems refer to problems found on letter and A4 sized media These media sizes are fed into the printer long edge first Because media sizes other than letter or A4 are fed into the printer short edge first the orientations of print quality problems are the opposite of those on letter or A4 sized media Print quality problems that appear horizontally on a letter or A4 sized page when it is held with the short edge up run vertically on other media sizes when the page is held with the short edge up The same is true for a vertical defect on a letter or A4 sized page it will appear as a horizontal defect on other sizes of media The following figure shows a print quality problem printed on both a letter or A4 sized page and the same defect on an 11 by 17 inch or A3 sized page or any other size of media ABCDEFGHIJKLM 9ABCDEFGHIJKLM QARB D K 9ABCDEFGH 9ABCDEFGH 89ABCDEFG Figure 191 Image orientation and direction of travel 386 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Note EN Letter or A4 sized media 11 by 17 inch or A3 sized media or any other size of media Print quality problem Direction media moves through the printer process direction Direction streaking occurs on pages oOo o Bm QO N Direction banding occurs on pages PostScript print samples are located on the service and support CD wh
92. panel should display the message PRESS SELECT IF FUSER IS NEW If it displays the message go to step 10 If it does not go to step 11 When the printer control panel displays the message press SELECT to bring the printer online and reset the fuser life count Then go to step 12 If the printer control panel does not display the message a Press MENU until RESETS MENU appears on the printer control panel display b Press ITEM until RESET FUSER LIFE COUNT appears c Press SELECT to reset the fuser life count d Press Go to bring the printer online Place the used parts in the packaging from the new ones See the included recycling guide for recycling information Installing consumables 117 118 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance EN Theory of operation Chapter contents NIKOQUCLHON sre ke2 5860c05R804 bani ged KARNE eee Re 123 Color theory 0 0 0 ce eens 126 Subtractive color theory 126 Subtractive color absorption 126 Subtractive color mixing 127 Half toning 0 0 00 e eee eee eee 127 Process COONS xna aah KABABA ABG enn KAWA 127 Additive color theory 0 000 eee eee 128 Image formation 0 00 cee es 129 Electrostatic latent image formation block 131 1 Preconditioning exposure 131 2 Primary charging 132 3 Laser beam exposure 132 Developing block
93. pauses 82 carousel 323 controller 332 cycle power 328 density sensor 324 DIMM 322 firmware 318 flipper 437 fuser 319 errors continued illegal output 325 input feed 325 internal 329 laser 320 laser scanner 317 messages 316 motor 329 multi bin mailbox 330 332 NVRAM 333 438 PostScript printing 75 power on self test 333 RAM 329 330 scan buffer 330 ESD electrostatic discharge 203 Ethernet accessories 446 network connection 62 European Customer Care Center ECCC Assist Line 54 event log 353 clearing 81 description 364 printing 71 exchanging parts 51 Executive sized media See media expanding memory 19 expired fuser and paper rollers 344 imaging drum 343 external paper handling EPH controller board 180 188 F face down bins multi bin mailbox 192 face down output assembly 225 face down output bin See top face down output bin face down tray delivery sensor 166 face up bin multi bin mailbox 192 face up exit assembly 236 face up output bin See left face up output bin face up solenoid 234 factory defaults reset 78 factory settings restoring 355 failed hard disk 342 faint print 409 fan 1 motor location 159 operation 165 removing 250 fan 2 motor location 159 operation 165 removing 251 Index 531 532 Index fan 3 motor location 159 operation 165 fans left output failure 328 rear input failure 327 rear output failure 326 thermistor 165 fault log 82 Fax Information Retrieval Support
94. personnel the existing ozone filter is in poor condition e long continuous printing combined with any of the above Inspect your work environment for the operating conditions listed above if you believe ozone emissions are a problem in your area Your employer is responsible for providing a work environment that is free of these conditions 46 Chapter 1 Product information EN Service approach Chapter contents INTEOGUCTION 2 06 dono ba60e bebo ceed oh ewe be wees 49 Parts and supplieS 0 0 00 ee eee 49 Ordering information 0 000 c eee eee ees 49 Obtaining related documentation and software 50 MISE SCIVED mama AMBAG a ad eae OER Sao 50 Ordering consumables 51 Ordering field replaceable units 51 Parts exchange program 2 20 ee 51 Technical assistance 0 0 0 cc a 52 NAA PPT eee Clee een dane ean ones 52 Dealer Response Line 02 000 eee ees 53 HP Software Distribution Center 53 HABA AAP AA 53 Customer Support Sales Center 53 Parts identification 2 0 0 eee 53 Customer Information Centers 53 HP Customer Care Centers CCC 54 WALA cams Gacieedece get ates teem dee ees ees 55 lal AA AA b55 Toner cartridge information 55 Chapter contents 47 48 Chapter 2 Service approach EN Introduction Repair normally begins with
95. scanner Preconditioning exposure LED Post charging unit Transfer drum Transfer belt Tray 1 Tray 1 pick up roller Separation pad Feed roller 1 Feed roller 2 Separation rollers Pick up rollers 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Registration roller Transfer charger Upper fusing roller Lower fusing roller Tray 2 Tray 3 Duplexer deflector Left face up output bin deflector Left face up output bin delivery roller Cleaning roller Left face up output bin Color toner carousel Color toner cartridges Delivery roller s Introduction 125 Color theory There are two methods used to create color The subtractive process which is used in this printer and the additive process which is used in monitors and television Subtractive color theory The subtractive color theory deals with mixing color pigments such as those found in toner ink and paint to produce any color The subtractive primary colors are cyan yellow and magenta Primary colors will produce any color in the spectrum when combined in certain proportions The subtractive process begins with an external white light reflected from a white surface for instance paper The color components of the light are reflected or absorbed by the paper and toner Subtractive color absorption Table 24 describes how colors are mixed to produce subtractive colors Table 24 Subtractive color absorption Color of Colo
96. slot on the left side of the subassembly Figure 89 Spring on right cover subassembly EN Doors and covers 219 Removing the right rear cover 1 If you have a 2 000 sheet input unit open the vertical transfer unit VTU 2 Remove one screw callout 1 Right rear cover 3 Pull the bottom of the cover out and then down to remove the cover 220 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Removing the right lower cover assembly 1 Remove the front right cover see page 209 2 If you have a 2 000 sheet input unit open the VTU 3 Remove the right rear cover see page 220 4 Remove 4 screws on the right lower cover in place callout 1 Figure 91 Screws on the right lower cover Unfasten the holding strap on the right Remove tray 2 and tray 3 and release the locking tabs inside the tray 3 area 7 While holding the cover in place push down to release the tabs on the top of the cover and pull out on the bottom of the cover Notes on reinstalling e Insert the tabs on the top of the cover in the corresponding holes first then snap the bottom of the cover into place EN Doors and covers 221 Rear cover 1 Remove the rear lower left cover 1 screw callout 1 Rear cover 2 Remove the left rear cover see page 213 3 Open the right upper door 4 Remove 3 screws on the right in the sheet metal tab callout 2 5 Remove the right rear cover see page 220 6 Remove 2 screws callout 3 7 Re
97. subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation July 16 1997 For Compliance Information ONLY contact Australia Contact Product Regulations Manager Hewlett Packard Australia Ltd 31 41 Joseph Street Blackburn Victoria 3130 Australia Europe Contact A Local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett Packard GmbH Department HQ TRE Standards Europe Herrenberger Strasse 130 D 71034 B blingen Fax 49 7031 14 3143 USA Contact Product Regulations Manager Hewlett Packard Company P O Box 15 Mail Stop 160 Boise ID 83707 0015 Phone 208 396 6000 42 Chapter 1 Product information EN VCCI statement Japan TOE AU EERE BINAHA VCCI OR KIT ABBIE CT CORE RCTS Ce BWEL TUNE AN CORBAGUAPTLE Ya VY BIEL T PAe amp NOt SHES FHC YT EOY FI Fx Pel SRA II GES TEL ORY ROL T FEL EMI statement Korea ASA AUS BA NA Ol ADE WAaSSos ANUY AN JIS FS MATA FANGAME BE VE MAAA ASB AZUL Laser safety statement The Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the U S Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1 1976 Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States This printer is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U S Department of Health
98. sure that the drum cartridge is installed e Install the drum cartridge if it is not installed e f the drum cartridge is already installed turn the printer off reinstall the drum cartridge and turn the printer on again Reconnect connectors J641 to J643 and J647 on the main relay PCA connectors J671 and J673 on the subrelay PCA connector J102 on the power supply and connector J227 on the controller board Check electrical continuity between connector J641 1 24 VB and J642 3 PMP on the main relay PCA when the door switch SW641 is turned on If there is no electrical continuity replace the right cover switch on the main relay PCA Check electrical continuity between connector J671 2 PMP and J671 2 PFUPR on the subrelay PCA when the door switch SW671 is turned on If there is no electrical continuity replace the delivery cover front cover switches on the subrelay PCA Measure the voltage across connector J641 1 24 VB and J641 A1 GND on the main relay PCA after the printer is turned on If the voltage is not 24 V replace the power supply Measure the voltage across connector J647 B11 24UH and J647 4 GND on the main relay PCA after the printer is turned on If the voltage is not 24 V replace the main relay PCA Printer message troubleshooting 347 Table 40 Unnumbered printer messages continued INSTALL IMAGING DRUM OPEN FRONT DOOR continued INSTALL TRANSFER DRUM OPEN RIGHT DOOR
99. tape housing toward you to remove it Notes on reinstalling e Thread the end of the metal tape behind the rollers callout 4 and then pull the end of the tape to the top of the multi bin mailbox and reinsert it into place callout 1 e Use the guide pins to reinstall the tape housing callout 3 When the housing is correctly positioned it will click into place 298 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Controller PCA 1 Disconnect the power cable callout 1 Figure 169 Controller PCA 1 of 2 Disconnect the C link cable callout 2 Remove all paper bins and the blind cover see page 290 Carefully lay the multi bin mailbox on its front side oa fF O N Loosen 1 grounding screw and 2 self tapping screws on the right side of the PCA cover callout 3 6 Remove 2 self tapping screws and the grounding cable from the left side of the PCA cover callout 4 7 Open the cover to reveal the PCA Notes on reinstalling e Reinstall the grounding cable EN Multi bin mailbox 299 8 Unplug 8 connectors callout 5 and remove the PCA Figure 170 Controller PCA 2 of 2 300 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN EN Figure 171 Anti curl strings Remove the back cover see page 287 Remove all the paper bins and the blind cover see page 290 On the lower left side of the frame remove 2 screws securing the tension springs callout 1 a aa P aaa E cg Anti curl strings 1 of 2
100. the motor away from the frame Notes on reinstalling e Position the motor in the frame so that the cable grommets are face down EN Multi bin mailbox 293 Transport belt motor 1 Remove the back cover see page 287 Remove all paper bins and the blind cover see page 290 3 Release the controller PCA assembly from the bottom of the frame see page 299 steps 1 through 7 4 Unplug the J8 connector on the multi bin mailbox controller PCA callout 1 Figure 164 Transport belt motor 5 Remove 2 screws and washers on the transport belt motor callout 2 CAUTION When removing the motor be careful not to damage the internal drive belt 6 Gently pull out the motor 294 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Figure 165 EN Notes on reinstalling e Reroute the cable on the transport belt motor behind the flat cable and connect it to the J8 connector on the multi bin mailbox controller PCA callout 1 e Replace the internal drive belt onto the gear of the transport belt motor before replacing the screws that secure the motor to the frame Input paper guide 1 Remove the multi bin mailbox from the printer Remove the face up bin and the blind cover see page 290 Hold down the jam access door while unplugging the ground wire callout 1 Pa PAA Input paper guide 1 of 2 Multi bin mailbox 295 4 Use a flat blade screwdriver to release the retaining tabs on the top of the input paper
101. the sensor do not use any paper products such as tissue or paper towels to clean the sensor 3 Close the right upper door 100 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance EN Cleaning the transfer charger Clean the transfer charger when irregular wavy patterns appear in solid backgrounds 1 Open the front door 2 Pull the knob out and push it back in Figure 19 Cleaning the transfer charger EN Cleaning procedures 101 Cleaning the waste toner tray The waste toner tray will not normally have much toner in it Clean the waste toner tray before moving the printer to another location or when performing routine maintenance at the customer site 1 Open the front door 2 Remove the waste toner tray cover by releasing the tab on the right side of the cover with a small screwdriver Figure 20 Removing the waste toner tray cover 102 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance EN 3 Remove the waste toner tray 4 Vacuum toner out of the tray or use a hand wipe to clean the tray if there is a small amount of toner in the tray WARNING Do not use a regular vacuum to clean up toner The toner can penetrate the vacuum bag and toner might be harmful if inhaled Figure 21 Cleaning the waste toner tray 5 Reinstall the waste toner tray and cover and close the front door EN Cleaning procedures 103 Printer consumables N oO maps
102. the user to change the printable area of A4 sized media so that eighty 10 pitch characters can be printed on one line The printer will print past the normal 5 mm boundaries on the sides of the page This setting is useful if printing files formatted for letter sized media on A4 sized media These are control characters identified in ASCII to control the cursor which is the current printing position LF line feed moves the cursor down 1 row without changing the column position CR carriage return moves the cursor back to column 1 without moving it down a row EN Menu maps 77 I O Menu If an EIO card is installed an additional EIO menu will appear Table 18 I O Menu Item I O TIMEOUT PARALLEL ADV FUNCTIONS Default setting Value 5 30 300 ON OFF Description action Period of time that the printer will wait without seeing data before considering the job complete and printing it Does not have an effect for Jobs with end of job markers Forces parallel port to compatibility mode which can be more reliable in some cases but will not allow the printer status to be sent to the host computer Resets Menu Table 19 Resets Menu Item Value Description action FACTORY DEFAULT RESET None Resets menus to the factory settings I O Menu and Color Adjust Menu values do not change RESET ACTIVE I O None Resets I O to known state RESET ALL I O None Used to clea
103. the voltage across connector J647 B11 24 UH and J647 4 GND on the main relay PCA after the printer is turned on If the voltage is not 24 V replace the main relay PCA 8 5 Replace the controller board 62 lt x gt SERVICE CYCLE POWER Description Indicates that a problem exists with the internal memory lt X gt Description 0 Internal ROM or RAM 1 8 DIMM slots 1 8 Event log message 62 00 0 lt x gt Action 1 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer 2 Perform DRAM DIMM test from the formatter diagnostics in the Service Menu 3 If the problem persists replace the bad DIMM 63 SERVICE CYCLE POWER Description Indicates that the internal RAM memory test failed Event log message 63 00 00 Action 1 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer 2 Perform DRAM DIMM test from the formatter diagnostics in the Service Menu 3 Ifthe problem persists replace the bad DIMM EN Printer message troubleshooting 329 Table 39 Numbered printer messages continued 64 PRINTER ERROR CYCLE POWER Description Indicates a scan buffer error Event log message 64 00 00 Action Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer 65 PRINTER ERROR CYCLE POWER Description Indicates a DRAM controller error Event log message 65 00 00 Action 1 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer 2 Perform DRAM DIMM test from the formatter diagnostics in the Se
104. top face down output bin black detail value 79 smooth value 79 streaks 408 stripes 407 black and white print speeds 20 black toner cartridge cam assembly 450 guide assembly 450 illustration 124 installing 87 location 104 replace frequency 105 switch 175 toner level detection 147 blank page 400 blind cover multi bin mailbox 192 BNC accessories 446 connection 62 port 62 T connector 63 boards See PCAs PCAs 2 000 sheet input unit PCAs multibin mailbox bond media See media brown stripes 407 EN EN buffer ElO overflow 316 parallel I O overflow 317 scan error 330 bumps on printed page 410 buttons See keys on control panel C C5 sized media See media cables C link 61 188 coaxial 63 connection 60 interface 61 parallel 64 parts list 447 ThinLAN 63 calibration color density 148 flipper 437 message 334 Canadian Customer Care Center CCCC Assist Line 54 Canadian DOC regulations 39 Cancel Job key 66 canceling job 334 proof and print jobs 72 capacity circuit 21 input trays 28 media in multi bin mailbox 30 media in printer 28 card stock See media carousel color toner error 323 control process 150 position sensor 150 stop solenoid 151 carousel button switch 175 carousel motor description and illustration 160 location 159 PCA 256 removing 257 carousel position sensor 173 carousel stopper solenoid 177 carriage return command 77 cartridge motor description and illu
105. trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated TrueType is a U S trademark of Apple Computer Inc UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through X Open Company Limited Safety Information WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard To avoid electrical shock use only supplied power cords and connect only to properly grounded 3 hole wall outlets EN Contents List of figures List of tables 1 Product information Chapter contentS 0 0 aa 17 Printer features 00 eee ees 19 Specifications 0cccuced bomen ed pa meee ed Sew HE eee ee oe 21 Site requirements a 24 Media requirements eee eee 26 Identification model and serial numbers 34 Product overview nnana naaa a 35 Safety information 2 20 0 0 a 39 2 Service approach Chapter contents cece eee ee eee 47 alige o Pele 62 532 t0e bape dees AE 49 Parts and supplieS 0 0 cc eee 49 Technical assistance 2 0 cee ees 52 WANNA 4 soe Sol BRAKE KAED eee eee A LAMAD T oe ee eee oun 2 55 3 Operational overview Chapter contents 0c ccc eee eee 57 Verifying package contentS 0 000 cee eee eee 59 Verifying the cables are installed A A U 60 Connecting the printer to the network 62 Changing the printer control panel overlay 65 Printer con
106. transfer counter by pressing SELECT before attempting to print or use the RESETS menu on the printer control panel Event log message None Action Replace the transfer kit and reset the transfer counter by pressing SELECT before attempting to print or use the RESETS menu on the printer control panel For more information on configuring the printer response to this message see the description of the TONER LOW setting on page 75 TRAY 1 CONTAINS UNKNOWN MEDIA Description Media was stacked in tray 1 for continuous manual feed printing and the job has been completed However there is still media in the input tray The printer considers the input tray not to be configured EN Event log message None Action Configure the media type for tray 1 or remove the remaining media For more information on configuring the media type see page 90 Printer message troubleshooting 357 Table 40 Unnumbered printer messages continued TRAY 1 LOAD lt type gt lt size gt Description A user has requested a media size that is not currently installed in tray 1 lt type gt Last media type configured for the input tray lt size gt Last media size configured for the input tray Event log message None Action Load the media type and size specified on the printer control panel display After tray 1 is loaded the printer automatically brings itself online If the correct media type and size are lo
107. 0 A at 120 V 6 0 A at 220 V capacity for typical product Operating environment specifications Table 4 Operating environment specifications Item Operating Storage Temperature Recommended 20 to 26 C 68 to 79 F 0 to 35 C 32 to 95 F Allowed 15 to 30 C 59 to 86 F 20 to 60 C 4 to 140 F Humidity Recommended 20 to 50 RH 35 to 85 RH Allowed 10 to 80 RH 10 to 95 RH Altitude Allowed 0 to 3 048 m O to 10 000 ft Oto 3 048 m O to 10 000 ft EN Specifications 21 Acoustic emission specifications Table 5 Acoustic emissions Operation position per ISO 9296 DIN 45635 T 19 Printing L A 54 dB A Standby LpA 49 dB A Bystander 1 meter per ISO 7779 DIN 45635 T 19 Printing L A 50 dB A Standby LpA 45 dB A Sound power per ISO 9296 Printing 6 7 B A Standby 6 1 B A Printer dimensions Table 6 Printer dimensions Printer with 2 000 sheet input unit and Printer Printer with stand multi bin mailbox 750 mm 1111 mm 1230 mm Height 30 in 44 in 48 in 566 mm 566 mm 1056 mm Width 22 in 22 in 42 in 625 mm 625 mm 625 mm Depth 25 in 25 in 25 in Weight with 87 kg 100 kg 118 kg consumables 192 Ib 220 Ib 260 Ib 22 Chapter 1 Product information EN Consumable storage specifications The life of consumables is greatly affected by their storage environment Use the following table to determine shelf life of stored cons
108. 00 DN model Paper 11 by 17 in portrait 16 to 28 Ib 2 000 sheets of Plain A4 landscape 60 to 105 g m bond 7 20 Ib 75 g m2 bond Preprinted JIS B4 portrait Letterhead Legal portrait Limit to media fill mark on Prepunched Letter landscape the media width guides Bond Recycled Color Glossy HP recommends using transparencies that are 5 mil 0 13 mm thick with this printer EN Media requirements 29 Media capacity and sizes for the multi bin mailbox The following table lists the types and sizes of media supported by multi bin mailbox output bins Table 9 Media capacity and sizes for the multi bin mailbox Mailboxes Paper Plain Preprinted Letterhead Prepunched Bond Recycled Color Media type Left face up output bin Media size Media weight Maximum capacity 11 by 17 in 16 to 28 Ib 60 to 250 sheets of 20 Ib 3 105 g m bond 75 g m bond A4 JIS B4 Legal Letter Paper 11 by 17 in 16 to 58 Ib 60 to 125 sheets of 20 Ib Plain A3 216 g m bond 75 g m bond Preprinted A4 Letterhead A5 Prepunched Custom min 99 by 190 Bond mm 3 90 by 7 49 in Recycled Custom max 304 by 469 Color mm 11 98 by 18 48 in Card Stock Executive Heavy more JIS B4 than 28 lb JIS B5 105 g m Legal Glossy Letter Labels A4 Letter Transparency A4 4 to 5 mils 0 10 to 0 13 Envelopes B5 Maximum 24 Ib 90 g m 130 Monarch sized C5 bond envelopes Commercial 10 Com10 DL Double Post
109. 000CN Separation discharge high voltage converter 220 39 RH3 2185 000CN Power supply assembly 110V 218 25 RH3 2187 000CN Power supply assembly 220V 218 25 RH7 1323 000CN Motor main M4 221 21 RH7 1325 000CN Motor carousel M1 220 26 RH7 1328 000CN Motor cartridge M3 224 23 RH7 1330 000CN Fan 1 FM1 223 8 RH7 1350 000CN Motor pick up M5 228 87 RH7 1373 000CN Fan 2 FM2 223 7 RH7 1393 000CN Fan 3 FM3 216 42 RH7 5168 000CN Clutch transfer belt press CL4 220 27 RS5 1119 000CN Bushing 219 8 RS5 1317 000CN Bushing 219 29 30 EN Numerical parts list 511 Table 81 Numerical parts list continued 512 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Part number Description Figure Ref RS5 1319 000CN Bushing 223 19 RS5 1399 000CN Bushing paper deck drive 242 81 RS5 2465 000CN Spring tension 220 28 RS5 2561 000CN Spring tension 243 101 RS5 2697 000CN Spring torsion 223 20 RS5 2698 000CN Spring torsion 223 16 RS5 2719 000CN Spring compression 215 51B RS5 8380 000CN Label CAUTION 217 4A RS5 8611 000CN Cassette size labels 242 72 RY7 5044 000CN Screw kit 2 000 sheet input unit 242 243 Kit 1 VD7 1893 151CN Power supply fuse 250V 3 15A 243 100 WC4 5136 000CN Switch black toner cartridge SW644 219 22 WC4 5150 000CN Switch toner cartridge cover SW672 218 30 WG8 0291 000CN _ Photo interrupter IC TLP1230 228 52 WG8 5210 000CN Photo interrupter IC TLP12
110. 0014 Control panel overlay Italian C3983 40015 Control panel overlay Russian C3983 40016 Control panel overlay Czech C3983 67905 Formatter assembly C4781 60500 Power box C4785 60513 Multi bin mailbox repackaging kit C4785 70001 Multi bin mailbox short C link cable adapter C4787 60503 Multi bin mailbox shipping lock kit J3113 61003 PCA 10 100Base T RY7 5044 000CN Screw kit 2 000 sheet input unit XA9 0836 000CN Screw TP M3 x 6 quantity 10 XA9 0926 000CN Screw TP M4 x 8 quantity 10 XA9 0940 000CN Screw w washer M4 x 12 quantity 4 XA9 0951 000CN Screw w washer M3 x 8 quantity 10 Illustrations and parts lists The following illustrations and their assorted parts tables list the field replaceable units FRUs for this printer At the end of this chapter there are two cross reference tables of all of the parts listed in this chapter table 81 lists the parts in numerical order by part number and table 82 lists the parts in alphabetical order Both tables are cross referenced to the appropriate figure and reference number in this chapter EN Illustrations and parts lists 449 Major assembly locations Black cartridge Delivery assembly cam assembly Black cartridge guide assembly Delivery drive assembly Left cover feeder assembly Paper pick up assembly Transfer belt assembly Registration roller assembly Registration frame A pasa
111. 115 U S only For quotes on or purchase of new hardware or software agreements 1 800 743 8305 U S only Parts identification For service part number identification 1 916 783 0804 Customer Information Centers For further technical assistance service authorized HP and dealer service personnel can contact the nearest Hewlett Packard Customer Information Center at 1 800 752 0900 in North America Technical assistance 53 Note 54 Chapter 2 Service approach HP Customer Care Centers CCC HP representatives are available to answer technical questions at no charge for a period equivalent to the original HP hardware warranty period Questions regarding operating systems such as MS DOS UNIX or network configuration operating systems cannot be answered by the Customer Care Center and should be referred to your dealer Each time you call the HP Customer Care Centers you will be asked to provide the printer serial number and the original date of purchase U S Customer Care Center CCC The CCC can be reached at 208 323 2551 and is available weekdays from 6 00 am to 6 00 pm Mountain Standard Time European Customer Care Center ECCC The ECCC can be reached at 31 0 20 605 0505 and is available weekdays from 8 30 am until 6 00 pm Central European Time Multilingual customer support representatives are available to answer questions Canadian Customer Care Center CCCC The CCCC at 905 206 4663 is a
112. 19 29 30 RS5 1319 000CN 223 19 Cable C link from formatter board to the C3763 60502 2 000 sheet input unit Cable carousel RG5 3923 000CN 221 6 EN Alphabetical parts list 513 Table 82 Alphabetical parts list continued Description Part number Figure Ref Cable DC power RG5 3921 000CN 218 19 Cable delivery RG5 3104 000CN 221 20 Cable delivery connector RG5 3147 000CN 221 12 Cable main RG5 3097 000CN 218 16 RG5 3919 000CN 243 92 Cable main motor RG5 3942 000CN 221 5 Cable power signal RG5 3922 000CN 218 20 Cable sensor RG5 3144 000CN 218 18 Cables C4785 60520 246 Kit 2 2A Switch interlock 2B Delivery head motor cable 2C Flipper sensor controller cable 2D Flipper encoder controller 2E Flipper motor controller 2F ESD cable 2G Delivery head assembly flat cable Carousel stop assembly RG5 3053 000CN 218 6 Cassette crossmember assembly RG5 3089 000CN 223 30 Cassette size labels RS5 8611 000CN 242 72 Cassette size plate RB1 6894 000CN 242 73 Casters XZ9 0442 000CN 242 74 Casters fixed C4785 60510 244 30 Cleaning roller assembly RG5 3975 000CN 223 15 Clutch transfer belt press CL4 RH7 5168 000CN 220 27 Connector holder assembly RG5 3031 000CN 218 15 Control panel overlay Czech C3983 40016 Control panel overlay Danish C3983 40013 Control panel overlay Dutch C3983 40009 Control panel overlay English C3983
113. 220 9 RB1 9807 000CN Filter large air 215 1 RB1 9808 000CN Filter small air 215 19 RB1 9828 000CN Mount clutch 220 15 EN Illustrations and parts lists 507 Table 81 Numerical parts list continued Part number Description Figure Ref RB1 9836 000CN Filter charcoal 216 41 RB1 9928 000CN Media jam knob 217 TA RB1 9948 000CN Cover cable 222 3 RB1 9955 000CN Gear 14T 222 14 RB1 9956 000CN Gear 14T 222 15 RB2 0005 000CN Rail PCA 222 7D RB2 0057 000CN Cover left upper 237 13 RB2 2519 000CN Cover back 242 71 RF0 0003 000CN Latch roller action 217 6 RF0 0012 000CN Cover fan 215 39 RF0 0013 000CN Cover inner 4 217 4 RF5 1396 000CN Rail tray 3 223 32 RF5 1484 000CN Plate end 226 227 26 RF5 1834 000CN Feed and separation rollers 242 75 RF5 1834 000CN Roller feed 228 20 RF5 1835 000CN Roller pick up 228 242 21 83 RF5 1995 000CN Cover right subassembly 216 31 RF5 2025 000CN Holder fan 223 3 RF5 2036 000CN Plate duct mount 218 3 RF5 2556 000CN Locating pin metal positioning 242 78 RF5 2568 000CN Cover front with LED window 242 76 RF5 2646 000CN Left cover 242 77 RF5 2701 000CN Hinge stopper delivery 237 24 RF5 3850 000CN Plate paper reference front 242 86 RG0 0017 000CN Cover rear fan housing 215 51 RG0 0104 000CN Cover assembly inner left 217 1 RG0 0110 000CN Delivery assembly 236 RG0 0111 000CN Cover assembly to
114. 3 sized paper from tray 3 Type the following command at the DOS prompt to print the files copy lt file name gt lptl elf anew imaging drum has been installed recently this defect might appear during initial printing but should resolve itself If it does not replace the imaging drum Speckled print See also Rain and figure 197 on page 393 Speckled print or toner popping defects are characterized by small speckles caused by missing toner e This can be caused by excess moisture in the print media Prove the cause of this defect by printing with a properly stored ream of paper Check that the media Is stored in a dry area and is not opened until ready to be used Also verify that the printer is not in a humid area e Verify that the green lever on the fuser is locked down When the green lever is up the toner does not fuser properly and toner can flake off the page elf the print is speckled on the second side of a duplexed page use a heavier weight media greater than 28 Ib 105 g m bond EN Image defects troubleshooting 403 Smeared print e An undetected jam in the printer can smear print Open and close the front door to allow the printer to clear the jam If the problem persists remove the transfer drum Look between the transfer drum surface and the transfer drum handles for the piece of media Remove any media then reinstall the transfer drum e Ifthe printer recently had a media jam open and close the
115. 33 482 formatter 37 front 227 fuser 451 488 high voltage converter 1 262 high voltage converter 2 264 illustration of major 450 left 229 left cover feeder 450 main gear 261 paper pick up 243 450 PCA 491 rear 246 registration frame 450 registration roller 239 450 481 right 237 separation discharge converter 268 solenoid 451 top 223 transfer belt 450 487 tray 1 450 484 tray 1 pick up 244 450 483 tray 2 475 tray 3 474 assemblies 2 000 sheet input unit front LED PCA 280 main drive 282 paper pick up 278 paper size sensor 283 paper size switch 284 quantity switch 283 assemblies multi bin mailbox attachment 309 delivery head 192 303 flipper 192 291 metallic tape and housing 297 assistance See support atmospheric pressure 23 attachment assembly multi bin mailbox 309 Attention Indicator light 66 Automated Support Access Program ASAP 52 automatic paper override 74 axis adjusting neutral 418 B B4 sized media paper size detection switches 176 paper size detection switches 2 000 sheet input unit 183 B5 sized media paper size detection switches 176 See also media back cover 2 000 sheet input unit 273 multi bin mailbox 286 287 background toner scatter 407 banding 14 mm 411 black brown or orange 407 less than 10 mm 411 belts jams 437 replace frequency 105 transport 192 See also transfer belt bidirectional mode multi bin mailbox 187 binding 73 bins See left face up output bin output bins
116. 355 transfer life count 78 residual toner 136 138 140 resolution 20 resource save area full 351 data full 355 restoring factory settings 355 reverse stepper motor sensor multi bin mailbox 190 right assemblies 237 right cover subassembly 219 switch 175 right cover 2 000 sheet input unit 276 right front cover 209 right lower cover 35 right lower cover assembly 221 right rear cover 220 right upper cover 35 right upper cover assembly 217 rings on page 403 RJ 45 connection 62 roller cleaning charging process 138 control process 150 rollers illustration 124 installing 113 location 104 lower fusing 141 paper and fuser life low 344 paper and fuser life out 344 pick up 238 registration 239 repetitive defects 421 422 replace frequency 105 upper fusing 141 waste toner feed 140 rollers 2 000 sheet input unit feed 182 185 lower and upper VTU 185 pick up 182 185 separation 182 185 rollers multi bin mailbox eject 192 ROM read only memory firmware test 82 installing 93 ruler repetitive defect 420 S safety laser statement 43 ozone 46 removal and replacement 203 toner 45 scan buffer error 330 scanner illustration 124 motor lock detection circuit 158 motor not turning 321 process 157 removing 224 sealed envelopes 379 Select key 66 selecting binding 73 color 385 display language 84 media 26 self test mode 436 sensors carousel position 150 173 cleaning density 335 color cartridge 145 227 color
117. 383 images early or late on page 399 printed repeatedly 406 resolution 20 skewed 399 troubleshooting defects 386 imaging drum cartridge 124 cleaning process 140 detecting expiration 142 error 342 illustration 124 installing 110 kit 110 laser beam exposure 132 life out 343 location 104 not installed 347 preconditioning exposure 131 primary charging 132 repetitive defects 424 replace frequency 105 switch 175 Information Menu 71 initializing ElO accessory 343 hard disk 353 printer hard disk 75 input feed error 325 input paper guide multi bin mailbox 192 295 input trays See 2 000 sheet input unit tray 1 tray 2 tray 3 tray 4 trays input output I O See I O input output inside left panel 210 installing air filters 110 black toner cartridge 87 cables 60 61 charcoal filter 106 consumables 85 105 DIMMs 93 fuser kit 113 imaging drum 86 imaging drum kit 110 parts 199 printer on network 62 rollers 113 safety 203 transfer belt 106 transfer charger 106 transfer drum 106 transfer kit 106 verifying printer 92 insufficient memory 316 interface cable 61 features 20 interlock switch multi bin mailbox 190 306 internal components 460 internal print server See print server ISO B5 sized media See media ITD intermediate transfer drum See transfer drum ltem key 66 J jams delivery head assembly 438 delivery head position system 438 detection process 180 duplexer 335 flipper area 43
118. 4 Transfer belt press clutch STRCLD Controller board Figure 44 Transfer belt control EN Consumable detection mechanisms 149 Figure 45 Cleaning roller press cam Cleaning roller press solenoid Cleaning roller control The controller board activates the cleaning roller press solenoid SL1 SL1 presses the cleaning roller to the transfer drum just after the secondary transfer begins When the SL1 signals on the cleaning roller press cam presses the cleaning roller and the cleaning roller presses against the transfer drum When the transfer drum cleaning and secondary transfer are complete the controller board sets the SL1 off to detach the cleaning roller from the transfer drum Transfer drum Cleaning roller Cleaning roller control Carousel control The controller board controls the rotation speed and the stop position of the carousel by monitoring the timing of the eight flags that pass through the carousel position sensor PS3 The rotation position flags are located on the back side of the carousel The eight rotation position flags consist of the home position flag also the black toner 150 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN cartridge stop position flag the yellow magenta and cyan cartridge stop position flags three flags and the fetch removal or replacement flags four flags When the controller board receives the print signal from the formatter the carousel motor M1 is turned
119. 4 Remove the anti curl strings from the lower pulleys callout 2 5 Remove the delivery head assembly see page 303 Multi bin mailbox 301 6 Release the upper ends of the anti curl strings from the jam access door by pushing the retaining tabs that secure the strings to the door callout 3 Figure 172 Anti curl strings 2 of 2 302 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Delivery head assembly 1 Remove the back cover see page 287 2 Remove all paper bins and the blind cover see page 290 WARNING The sharp edges of the metal tape can cause serious injury When rewinding the metal tape into its housing hold the tape securely and rewind it slowly 3 With the delivery head assembly at the top of the multi bin mailbox hold the metal tape near the end and release the retainer tab that secures the end of the tape to the top of the frame callout 1 Then let the tape slowly rewind into its housing LIKES pw oe Figure 173 Delivery head assembly 1 of 4 4 Remove the anticurl strings see page 301 EN Multi bin mailbox 303 5 Release the flat ribbon cable from the cable clip callout 2 and gently disconnect the cable callout 3 A Figure 174 Delivery head assembly 2 of 4 6 Raise the assembly to the top of the frame 7 Hold up the assembly and remove 2 screws callout 4 Figure 175 Delivery head assembly 3 of 4 304 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Note The screw that
120. 40 219 231 23 4 40 234 WG8 5362 000CN _ Photo interrupter IC TLP1241 221 24 XA9 0836 000CN Screw TP M3 x 6 quantity 10 XA9 0849 000CN Screw RS M3 x 6 221 26 XA9 0926 000CN Screw TP M4 x 8 quantity 10 XA9 0940 000CN Screw w washer M4 x 12 quantity 4 222 37 XA9 0951 000CN Screw w washer M3 x 8 quantity 10 XB4 7401 007CN Screw tapping pan head M4 x 10 228 501 XD2 1100 502CN Ring E 220 501 XD2 1100 642CN Ring E 219 501 XZ9 0442 000CN Casters 242 74 EN Alphabetical parts list Table 82 Alphabetical parts list Description Part number Figure Ref 10 100Base TX J3113A 110 volt fuser kit C4155A Fuser 6 paper rollers Hand wipe 220 volt fuser kit C4156A Fuser 6 paper rollers Hand wipe 4 MB synchronous DIMM C4140A NOTE For all DIMM products you must install DRAM DIMMs in synchronized pairs for example two 4 MB DIMMs 8 MB synchronous DIMM C4141A 16 MB synchronous DIMM C4142A 32 MB synchronous DIMM C4143A 64 MB synchronous DIMM C3913A Adjustable fixed caster C4785 6051 1 244 21 Arm sensor RB1 6417 000CN 231 3 RG5 1859 000CN 228 51 Attachment assembly rod bracket cables C4785 60516 244 22 Attachment clip C4785 60512 246 36 Black toner cartridge C4149A Blind cover C4785 60503 244 23 Brush cleaning RB1 9617 000CN 216 35A Bushing RS5 1119 000CN 219 8 RS5 1317 000CN 2
121. 5 HP Peripherals Connectivity Solutions Guide HP JetDirect Software Installation Guide English HP Color LaserJet 8500 8500N 8500 DN Service and Support CD ROM C3983 67902 C3893 67903 C3983 90919 HP Color LaserJet 8500 8500N 8500 DN Self Paced Training Kit NTSC HP Color LaserJet 8500 8500N 8500 DN Self Paced Training Kit PAL HP Color LaserJet 8500 8500 N 8500 DN Quick Reference Guide English C3989 90901 C3989 90937 HP Color LaserJet 8500 8500 N 8500 DN Getting Started Guide English HP Color LaserJet 8500 8500 N 8500 DN Users Guide English Miscellaneous parts Table 50 Miscellaneous parts Part number C3983 40001 C3983 40002 C3983 40003 C3983 40004 C3983 40005 C3983 40006 C3983 40007 C3983 40008 C3983 40009 C3983 40010 C3983 4001 1 C3983 40012 C3983 40013 Description Control panel overlay English Control panel overlay Traditional Chinese Control panel overlay Korean Control panel overlay Simplified Chinese Control panel overlay Portuguese Control panel overlay French Control panel overlay German Control panel overlay Spanish Control panel overlay Dutch Control panel overlay Norwegian Control panel overlay Swedish Control panel overlay Finnish Control panel overlay Danish 448 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams EN Table 50 Miscellaneous parts continued Part number Description C3983 4
122. 6 Configuring operating modes 187 Power On sequence a aa 187 Communication link C link cables 188 Sensors switches motors and controller board PCA 189 Receiving paper eee eee 190 Delivering paper 0 0 00 cee eee 191 PaADeDdl lis wincens 5 GA eae badd eae eee eee 191 DUDICXOT meruna aae ak etude ebek a cae Sead hac up al on ented 192 FUL TG 225 hoot Getter SS AA AT 192 Chapter contents 121 122 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN Introduction EN This chapter presents the theory of operation and the functional overview for the printer It provides the service representative with an understanding of the printing process required to service the printer This chapter discusses the following e Color theory Image formation Paper path Mechanical drive system Control board system Formatter system Power distribution system 2 000 sheet input unit Multi bin mailbox Introduction 123 Figure 26 shows a cross sectional view of the internal components of the printer 27 10 L AES 7 JOQ Q N 12 A TTR D p III BAN TERENY DOD ODO OO Figure 26 Cross section view of internal components 124 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN EN O O N O OF FP Q N a A l Ge Ge O Aa a W N Q Black toner cartridge Imaging drum Charging roller Imaging drum cartridge Laser
123. 7 fuser 336 general media 340 input tray 338 multi bin mailbox 338 selecting media to prevent 26 top output bin 339 transfer belt 437 transfer drum 340 tray 4 340 troubleshooting 379 unexpected paper size 340 Japan VCCI statement 43 JetDirect internal print server See print server JIS B4 sized media See media JIS B5 sized media See media EN EN job separator mode multi bin mailbox 186 jobs canceling 334 canceling proof and print 72 cleared because memory out 351 processing 354 JPOSTD Double Post Card sized media See media K keys on control panel description 66 See also individual keys kits drum parts list 447 fuser parts list 447 replace frequency 105 transfer life low 357 transfer life out 357 transfer parts list 447 Korean EMI statement 43 L labels See media language control panel overlay 65 not available 353 selecting display 84 laser error 320 illustration 124 motor lock detection circuit 158 process 157 removing 224 safety statement 43 scanner error 317 statement for Finland 44 laser beam exposure on imaging drum 132 process 157 LaserJet printing demonstration 71 last page sensor tray 1 170 tray 2 168 LCD display 66 ledger sized media paper size detection switches 176 paper size detection switches 2 000 sheet input unit 183 See also media LEDs 2 000 sheet input unit 182 427 429 control panel 66 multi bin mailbox 307 308 436 preconditioning exposure 124 status 94 l
124. 8 Attachment assembly 309 Chapter contents 201 202 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Introduction WARNING CAUTION KA EN Removal and replacement strategy This chapter explains how to remove and replace major printer components Replacement is generally the reverse of removal Occasionally directions for difficult or critical replacement procedures are included Repair notices Turn the printer off and disconnect the power cord before servicing the printer Failure to follow this instruction could result in severe injury Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from the scanner assembly The reflected beam although invisible can damage your eyes The sheet metal parts can have sharp edges Be careful not to cut yourself when handling sheet metal parts Always protect the imaging drum from light and physical contact when removed from the printer HP recommends reinstalling the original cover whenever the drum is removed from the printer Electrostatic discharge ESD The printer contains parts that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge ESD Watch for the ESD reminder shown at the left while removing printer parts Protect the parts that are sensitive to ESD by using an ESD wrist strap and protective ESD pouches Introduction 203 Required tools The following tools are needed to service the printer Phillips 1 magnetized scre
125. 8 3 Plate end RF5 1484 000CN 226 227 26 Power box C4781 60500 Power supply C4785 60501 246 40 Power supply assembly 110V RH3 2185 000CN 218 25 Power supply assembly 220V RH3 2187 000CN 218 25 Power supply cable RG5 3909 000CN 243 99 Power supply fuse 250V 3 15A VD7 1893 151CN 243 100 Preconditioning exposure LED assembly RG5 3980 000CN 216 36 Rail PCA RB2 0005 000CN 222 7D Rail tray 3 RF5 1396 000CN 223 32 Registration frame assembly RG5 3007 000CN 231 Registration roller assembly RG5 3009 000CN 232 Ring E XD2 1100 502CN 220 501 XD2 1100 642CN 219 501 Rod power switch RB1 6463 000CN 220 5 Roller feed RF5 1834 000CN 228 20 Roller paper RB1 6488 000CN 216 16G EN Alphabetical parts list 521 Table 82 Alphabetical parts list continued Description Part number Figure Ref Roller pick up RF5 1835 000CN 228 242 21 83 Roller tray 1 pick up RB1 9526 000CN 234 10 Screw kit 2 000 sheet input unit RY7 5044 000CN 242 243 Kit 1 Screw RS M3 x 6 XA9 0849 000CN 221 26 Screw tapping pan head M4 x 10 XB4 7401 007CN 228 501 Screw TP M3 x 6 quantity 10 XA9 0836 000CN Screw TP M4 x 8 quantity 10 XA9 0926 000CN Screw w washer M3 x 8 quantity 10 XA9 0951 000CN Screw w washer M4 x 12 quantity 4 XA9 0940 000CN 222 37 Sensor assembly color toner RG5 3034 000CN 220 8 Sensor assembly toner waste RG5 3934 000CN 222 24 Sensor slid
126. 8 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Attachment assembly 1 Remove the controller PCA but leave cables connected see page 299 2 Set the controller PCA on top of the unit callout 1 ipa Ji INAS DI i p i 3 Cal P i Kg P j p i fa 4 J E 4 am i 1 el N r J Mik o sm TO n to e NN a ky K3 F Ma Bi i ae F f wi f k s Figure 180 Attachment assembly Remove the e ring callout 2 Release the pivot pin that holds the attachment assembly rod to the frame 5 Remove the assembly EN Multi bin mailbox 309 310 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Troubleshooting Chapter contents Pre troubleshooting checklist 315 Printer message troubleshooting 316 Aids to troubleshooting a 361 Configuration page 361 Continuous configuration page 363 Demonstration page 364 BUG l0 Ma ad at KANA aor GA eer we AS 364 Service mode engine diagnostics 365 Disabling interlocks 370 Service mode formatter diagnostics 375 CORTESE esane re E AA AA AA 376 FAUR Ossc maw wed ien dk ead eee e AT 377 Paper path troubleshooting nanana nananana aana 378 General paper path checklist 378 Wrinkled pages nanana naaa 378 Sealed envelopes 2 0000 eee eee eee 37
127. 9 Media jams 2 ccc ee eee 379 Image formation troubleshooting 383 Understanding color variations 384 Common causes of color variation 384 Chapter contents 311 Image defects troubleshooting 386 Image orientation aa 386 Image defect examples 387 Incorrect registration late and early print 399 IMAGE SKEW ann Gre cndawat ae oes Gma ANOS 399 Blank or partially blank page 400 Horizontal streaks in one color 401 Horizontal streaks in all colors CMYK 402 PRAM sodas kaanak ie a i E tech dhe 403 Speckled print 0 0 0 0 ce ee eee 403 Smeared print 0 0 cee ees 404 Print on back of page non duplexed page 405 POOF TUSING sc eda ew aoe Uh vee She ee ee 405 GINOSUNG AA 406 Black brown or orange bands 407 Background toner scatter 407 Yellow or black streaks 408 Mottled process colors or poor transfer 408 POMP ORIN Us Kamag RAMA GANG ANGLA we eats aero 409 Shay Ione erein Coa eee oes 410 Banding less than 10 mm 411 Banding 14 MIM is aise Na hea ae YY GL 411 Overhead transparency defects 412 Dark yellow print or contaminated print 413 Color balance adjustment 0 00000 eee 414 312 Chapter 7 Tr
128. 9 Numbered printer messages continued 57 2 FAN FAILURE Description One of the cooling fans failed or is obstructed 2 Fan 2 FM 2 Event log message 57 00 02 Action Caution Turn the printer off and do not operate the printer in this condition or it can be seriously damaged 1 2 Turn the printer off and on to reset it Reconnect connectors J703 and J706 on the carousel motor PCA and connector J220 on the controller board Reconnect connector J701 on the carousel motor PCA connector J648 on the main relay PCA and connector J102 on the DC power supply Measure the voltage across connector J703 3 FAN2ON and J703 1 GND on the carousel motor PCA after the printer is turned on If the voltage changes from 0 V to 24 V replace fan 2 Measure the voltage across connector J701 1 24 VB and J701 2 GND on the carousel motor PCA after the printer is turned on If the voltage is about 24 V replace the carousel motor Measure the voltage across connector J641 1 24 VB and J641 4 GND on the main relay PCA after the printer is turned on If the voltage is 24 V replace the main relay PCA Check the AC power supply If the problem is not rectified after the printer is turned off and on again find the cause of activation of the overcurrent overvoltage detection circuit in the power supply Wait for more than two minutes before turning the printer back on Replace the power supply EN Pri
129. 92 294 mottled print 408 MSDS Material Safety Data Sheet 45 52 multi bin mailbox accessories 19 446 anti curl strings 301 attachment assembly 309 back cover 287 blind cover 290 capacities 30 clearing jams 338 communication 188 communication error 330 components 286 496 controller board 190 192 controller PCA 299 delivery head assembly 303 delivery head position motor 293 description 186 diagnostic LED PCA 307 diagnostic tests 434 error 332 flipper assembly 291 front cover 287 full 349 input paper guide 295 interlock switch 306 location 38 messages 436 metallic tape and housing assembly 297 not attached correctly 349 operating modes 186 187 output bin full 355 overflow 186 paper bins 290 paper supply 289 power on sequence 187 power up sequence test 435 removable parts 286 removing 229 sensors switches motors and controller board 189 top cover 288 top output bin face up full 344 transport belt motor 294 Index 537 538 Index multi bin mailbox continued troubleshooting 434 unlatched 437 user status LED PCA 308 multipart forms 33 multipurpose tray See tray 1 N networks 100Base TX 62 10Base2 63 10Base T 62 accessories parts list 446 connections 62 printer connection 62 troubleshooting 439 non volatile random access memory NVRAM See NVRAM non volatile random access memory number formatter board serial 80 printer model 34 printer serial 80 numerical parts lists 502 NVRAM non vo
130. A Hdi o Ea a ALS HIS INdd HINI AGLs A puodes IUN puewwos sousnbes jud jeufis NHd o o ai Ad15 dls LNdd HINI puo08s lUn seld DC seld lt seq 118 plol seq od amp seid 9g 10 selg OC seid 9 puewwoo souenbes JUL EUBIS NHd EN Removal and replacement Chapter contents INTOGUCTION AAP 203 Removal and replacement strategy 203 Repair notices 2 0 ce eee 203 Electrostatic discharge ESD 203 Required tools 00 00 eee eee 204 Maintenance unitS n anaana a 205 Doors and covers eee 206 Front covers and panels 208 Top cover assembly eee eee 211 Left covers and doors 213 Right covers and doors 217 Meal COVE es sidi eaae MAAN BAWAL ene eens ees 222 Top assemblies 0 cee eee 223 Control panel a 223 Laser scanner unit eee ee eee 224 Face down output assembly 225 Front assemblies cc ee 227 Toner lock sensor and color cartridge sensor 227 S brelay PCA 4 cow num AGA WANG bo we ayn eae 4 228 Chapter contents 199 Leftassemblies 0 0 0 0 eee ee ee es 229 Multi
131. A 64 MB synchronous DIMM C2985A EIO hard disk J3110A Ethernet 10Base T J3111A Ethernet combo 10Base T BNC and Local Talk C4785 60500 Multi bin mailbox product number C4785A NOTE You must have a 2 000 sheet input unit in order to install a multi bin mailbox C4785A 69501 Exchange multi bin mailbox 446 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams EN Table 49 Options accessories and consumables continued Part number Description C4149A Black toner cartridge C4150A Cyan toner cartridge C4151A Magenta toner cartridge C4152A Yellow toner cartridge Drum kit Imaging drum 2 air filters Hand wipe Transfer kit Transfer drum Transfer belt Cleaning roller Charcoal filter Hand wipe 110 volt fuser kit Fuser 6 paper rollers Hand wipe 220 volt fuser kit Fuser 6 paper rollers Hand wipe Cables 92215S Macintosh DIN 8 printer cable 92215N HP LocalTalk cable kit C2946A IEEE 1284 compliant parallel cable of 3 m approximately 10 ft with 25 pin male micro 36 pin male C size connector C3763 60502 C link cable from formatter board to the 2 000 sheet input unit HP Color LaserJet transparencies letter sized 50 sheets HP Color LaserJet transparencies A4 sized 50 sheets HP Color LaserJet soft gloss paper letter sized 200 sheets HP Color LaserJet soft gloss paper A4 sized 200 sheets EN Ordering parts 447 Table 49 Options accessories and consumables continued 5091 6456 5966 5171 C3989 6011
132. ARA GB sate 268 Tray 2 and tray 3 media size sensing PCAs 269 200 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 2 000 sheet input unit 2 0 0 0 eee 271 PRON COVED AA Bd kkk edd Me a PG 2 2 BACK COVE har weed hee tee ce en St 273 ECT COVEN a ana nA Nd Akda oe KA AG HA 274 Vertical transfer unit VTU 275 Right cover Naawa Hah GINANG ae UNG ea 276 e AA PA 277 Paper pick up assembly 278 Controller AA 279 Front LED PCA assembly 280 Power SUpply a 281 Main drive assembly 0000 cee eee 282 Paper size sensor assemblies 283 TENSION SPINGS 3 044 Hoa pranin AAAH 285 Multi bin mailbox 0 0 aaa 286 Front and back coverS 000 cece eae 287 WOP COVO s 2 a5 sects NG KATAY Kna we ee A 288 Power supply nannan 0 0 00 eee eee eee 289 Paper bins and blind cover 290 Flipper assembly 0 0000 eee eee 291 Delivery head position motor 293 Transport belt motor 000 00 eee 294 Input paper QUide 0 ce eee 295 Metallic tape and housing assembly 29 Controller POA aco ic NAKA een Sais BS ose 299 ANUSCUM SININGS n ati edb a thea dt dks we Sig 301 Delivery head assembly 303 IMEHOCKSWICh nada kah PNA MGA AA ADA DL Eka 306 Diagnostic LED PCA crire a haaa kana abala 307 User status LED PCA 0 30
133. Description Indicates a multi bin mailbox flipper motor error Event log message 66 22 08 Action 1 a A W N Verify that the c link and power cables are connected Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer Check for jams in the flipper assembly area Replace the flipper assembly Replace the multi bin mailbox controller board PCA 66 22 09 OUTPUT DEVICE FAILURE CHECK CABLES AND CYCLE POWER Description Indicates a multi bin mailbox external memory error 66 22 lt xx gt OUTPUT DEVICE FAILURE CHECK CABLES AND CYCLE POWER Description Indicates a multi bin mailbox error lt XX gt Error code from the optional device Event log message 66 22 09 Action 1 Verify that the c link and power cables are connected Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer Replace the multi bin mailbox controller board PCA Event log message 66 22 lt xx gt Action 1 Verify that the c link and power cables are connected Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer Replace the C link cables Replace the multi bin mailbox controller board PCA 67 lt x gt ERROR POWER CYCLE Description Indicates an electronic controller error lt x gt Description 1 Controller board error 2 Controller board IC malfunction 3 Internal communication malfunction Event log message 67 00 0 lt x gt Action 1 2 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer
134. Description The printer is online and ready for data No status or printer attention messages are pending Event log message None Action No action is required RESETTING Event log message None ACTIVE IO Description Action The printer is resetting active I O ports No action is required RESETTING Event log message None ALL IO Description Action The printer is resetting all I O ports No action is required RESTORING Event log message None FACTORY SETTINGS Description Action The printer is resetting the printer s factory defaults The printer is in the process of completing a cold reset When the reset is completed the printer returns to the ready state but remains offline SEPARATOR OUTPUT BIN FULL Description The multi bin mailbox output bins are full Reset the EIO type and configure the printer before bringing the printer online For more information on factory defaults and configuring the printer control panel see page 68 Event log message None Action Remove all media from the output bins on the multi bin mailbox to continue printing STACKER OUTPUT BIN FULL Description The multi bin mailbox output bins are full EN Event log message None Action Remove all media from the output bins on the multi bin mailbox to continue printing Printer message troubleshooting 355 Table 40 Unnumbered printer messages continued TONER LOW TONER LOW Eventlog message N
135. ER OFF TO EXIT PAPER PATH EXECUTE TEST REPETITIONS TRAY 1 TRAY 2 TRAY 3 OUTPUT DEVELOPER MOTOR REPETITIONS EXECUTE TEST REPETITIONS EXECUTE TEST EXECUTE TEST DRUM MOTOR SENSOR MONITOR EXIT SERVICE MODE Default setting Value 1 10 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF TOP OUTPUT BIN LEFT OUTPUT BIN 1 10 1 210 0123456789AB 000000000000 Description action Turn the printer off and on to exit the formatter diagnostics and reset the printer Press SELECT to execute tests Once EXECUTE TEST is selected the current value 0 or 1 of each of the 10 sensors is shown on the display on the lower line The upper line of the display shows digits to be used as an identifier See page 368 for information on performing this test and an explanation of what sensors each digits in the upper line of the display represent EN Menu maps 83 Selecting the display language Note Use the printer control panel to set the printer to display printer messages and print configuration pages in a variety of supported languages 1 To enter configure language mode hold down SELECT while turning the printer on When CONFIG LANGUAGE in English appears on the printer control panel display for approximately one second release SELECT Once the printer has restarted LANGUAGE ENGLISH appears on the display Only VALUE SELECT and Go are active while the display language is b
136. Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology is a phone in fax service providing technical information for HP LaserJet end users as well as service personnel Receiving a fax requires a type 3 facsimile machine or fax card Service related information includes service notes HP Authorized Dealers Product Data Sheets Material Safety Data Sheets MSDSs typeface and accessory information printer support software information toner information driver request form and Software Matrix HP FIRST U S Call the HP ASAP system at 1 800 333 1917 and follow the voice prompts to enter HP FIRST HP FIRST Europe Call HP FIRST at one of the following numbers U K 0800 96 02 71 Belgium 078 111906 Dutch Switzerland 155 1527 German Netherlands 06 0222420 Germany 0130 810061 e Austria 0660 8128 For English service outside the countries listed above call 31 20 681 8192 52 Chapter 2 Service approach EN EN Dealer Response Line For further technical assistance on pre post sales and service support HP dealer service authorized personnel can contact the Dealer Response Line 1 800 544 9976 U S only 1 800 363 6584 Canada HP Software Distribution Center For printer drivers and application note orders 805 257 5565 HP Direct For supplies and accessories orders 1 800 538 8787 U S only Customer Support Sales Center For existing hardware and software service agreements 1 800 386 1
137. Figure Ref 5021 0337 PCL PJL Technical Reference Package 5021 8956 HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide 5091 6456 HP Peripherals Connectivity Solutions Guide 5966 5171 HP JetDirect Software Installation Guide English 92215N HP LocalTalk cable kit 92215S Macintosh DIN 8 printer cable C2934A HP Color LaserJet transparencies letter sized 50 sheets C2936A HP Color LaserJet transparencies A4 sized 50 sheets C2946A IEEE 1284 compliant parallel cable of 3 m approximately 10 ft with 25 pin male micro 36 pin male C size connector C2985A EIO hard disk _ C2986 60001 Hard disk internal C3763 60502 C link cable from formatter board to the 2 000 sheet input unit C3764 60505 Face up bin 244 25 C3764 60507 Delivery head position motor 246 38 C3764 60555 Cover top 244 31 C3764 60561 Input paper guide nosepiece 246 39 C3913A 64 MB synchronous DIMM C3983 40001 Control panel overlay English C3983 40002 Control panel overlay Traditional Chinese C3983 40003 Control panel overlay Korean C3983 40004 Control panel overlay Simplified Chinese C3983 40005 Control panel overlay Portuguese C3983 40006 Control panel overlay French 502 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams EN Table 81 Numerical parts list continued Part number Description Figure
138. G5 3065 000CN 224 Duct RB1 9682 000CN 223 4 Duct rear lower air RB1 9401 000CN 218 4 Duplexer product number C4782A C4782 60501 EIO hard disk Ethernet 10Base T C2985A J3110A 516 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams EN Table 82 Alphabetical parts list continued Description Part number Figure Ref Ethernet combo 10Base T BNC and J3111A LocalTalk Exchange duplexer C4782 69501 Exchange multi bin mailbox assembly C4785 69500 244 27 Face down bin C4785 60502 244 24 Face up bin C3764 60505 244 25 Face up solenoid assembly RG5 3022 000CN 218 140 Fan 1 FM1 RH7 1330 000CN 223 8 Fan 2 FM2 RH7 1373 000CN 223 7 Fan 3 FM3 RH7 1393 000CN 216 42 Feed and separation rollers RF5 1834 000CN 242 75 Feeder assembly RG5 3059 000CN 233 Filter charcoal RB1 9836 000CN 216 41 Filter large air RB1 9807 000CN 215 1 Filter small air RB1 9808 000CN 215 19 Flag paper sensing RB1 6557 000CN 228 48 Flipper assembly with cable request C4785 60509 245 32 Formatter assembly C3983 67905 Front LED PCA with holder and cable RG5 4204 000CN 243 91 Fuser assembly 120V RG5 3060 000CN 239 Fuser assembly 220V RG5 3061 000CN 239 Gear 11T RB1 9424 000CN 220 7 Gear 14T RB1 9955 000CN 222 14 RB1 9956 000CN 222 15 Hard disk internal C2986 60001 Hardware C4785 60521 245 Kit 3 3A Screw Torx 3B Screw Torx T20 M4 x 10 3C
139. IMM IDE ASIC DISK VX ASIC FAULT LOG Default setting Value NO YES BREAK CONT PAUSE YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO first fault message last fault msg Description action When set to BREAK stops at error and only the printer control panel displays a message When set to CONTINUE does not stop at error and error is posted only to the fault log When set to PAUSE stops at error and the printer control panel displays a message Press SELECT to continue Then error is also posted to the fault log Firmware ROMs are tested Installed DIMMs are tested to ensure that they are supported by the formatter board and functioning properly This test ensures the read and write integrity of the formatter IDE ASIC Used to verify the integrity of the printer hard disk and the interface between the printer hard disk and the printer This test also ensures that the printer hard disk buffering and caching are working properly This test ensures the read and write integrity of the formatter VX ASIC Records all errors that occurred while formatter diagnostics tests were executing FAULT LOG does not appear until the formatter diagnostics have been run and a failure exists The fault log is cleared when the printer is turned off 82 Chapter 3 Operational overview EN Table 21 Service Mode Menu continued Service Mode Menu ltem POW
140. Imaging drum Symptoms Print defects occurring every 195 mm Causes Damage such as scratches or dents on the imaging drum These usually appear as dark or light marks on the page e Paper dust adhering to the imaging drum These usually appear as white marks in the dark printed areas of the page e Exposure of portions of the imaging drum to light This causes dark sections in the printed output The life of the imaging drum is shortened by exposure to strong light Actions e Print at least four configuration pages to determine if the defect repeats in the same vertical orientation e Inspect the imaging drum for scratches dents or other damage Replace if needed e Ifthe problem is dust remove the dust with 70 isopropyl alcohol applied with a hand wipe Try this only if the print defect is unacceptable and the only other alternative is replacing the imaging drum e Defects caused by exposure to light might clear up over time If severe replace the imaging drum Do not expose the imaging drum to direct sunlight and be careful not to scratch or get fingerprints on the drum surface during cleaning 424 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN EN Transfer belt Symptoms Print defects occurring every 222 mm Cause Defects on the transfer belt surface Actions Remove the transfer belt and inspect the entire belt surface Use the transfer belt gears to rotate the belt throughout its travel Repetitive defects troubleshootin
141. L Description CANCEL JOB was pressed and there is no job to cancel Event log message None Action No action is required NO JOBS PENDING Description While in the Proof and Print Menu ITEM was pressed and there are no pending proof and print jobs Event log message None Action No action is required OFFLINE Description The printer is offline 350 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Event log message None Action Press Go to bring the printer online EN Table 40 Unnumbered printer messages continued OUT OF MEMORY JOB CLEARED Description The printer personality for the current job could not be run in the available memory The job was canceled and no pages were printed PCL MEMORY FULL STORED DATA LOST Description The resource save area for the printer personality is full Fonts downloaded to the printer RAM might have been deleted Event log message None Action 1 Reprint the job If the message still appears turn the printer off and on to reset the printer before sending the print job again 2 Install more printer memory For more information on printer memory options see page 445 Event log message None Action Turn the printer off and on to clear the printer RAM PJL OPERATIONS FAILED Description The requested PJL operation could not be completed because the option is unavailable or the PJL data was corrupt PLEASE WAIT Description The prin
142. LI I A 5 ing Fans 1 and 2 housing assemblies 6 Release 2 cable stays and unplug 1 connector on the right side of the assembly callout 2 to remove the housing 7 Remove 1 screw from the fan 2 assembly callout 3 Rear assemblies 257 8 Release 1 cable stay and unplug 1 connector from the fan 2 assembly callout 4 to remove the housing 9 On the right side of the carousel motor unplug 1 connector callout 5 Carousel motor 10 Remove 4 screws from the motor and lift it out callout 6 258 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Figure 129 EN Delivery drive assembly The delivery drive assembly is located behind the fan 1 housing and the formatter pan 1 Remove the carousel motor PCA see page 256 2 Remove fan 1 housing see page 257 steps 4 through 6 3 Remove 2 screws callout 1 from the lower air duct and remove the lower air duct callout 2 Lower air duct Rear assemblies 259 4 Release 3 cable stays on the bottom of the delivery drive assembly 5 Remove 1 screw callout 3 and the gear cover Screws on the delivery drive assembly 6 Remove 7 screws from the delivery drive assembly callout 4 7 Lift the assembly up and off the tabs Notes on reinstalling Ensure that the metal swing arm is above the face up solenoid callout 5 260 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Figure 131 EN Main gear assembly not shown Open the left lower cover and remove th
143. NG Release the safety catches only after tightening the screws that secure the VTU to the chassis Right cover 1 Remove the vertical transfer unit VTU see page 275 2 Remove the 2 screws near the middle of the right cover callout 1 Figure 145 Right cover with VTU removed 3 Using a flat blade screwdriver release the plastic retaining tab on 276 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Figure 146 EN the upper left corner of the cover callout 2 4 Carefully pull out on the top of the cover while lifting it upward to clear the retaining tabs that are along the cover s bottom edge Notes on reinstalling Make sure the retaining tabs that are along the cover s bottom edge are placed over the chassis rail Tray 4 1 Open tray 4 and remove any paper 2 Remove the vertical transfer unit VTU see page 275 3 Remove the left and right covers see page 274 and page 276 4 Remove 1 screw and 1 metal retaining tab from each side of the chassis callout 1 Tray 4 removal 5 Support the rear of the tray while sliding it straight out of the chassis 2 000 sheet input unit 277 Paper pick up assembly The paper pick up assembly is located on the right side of the unit 1 Remove the VTU see page 275 Remove the right cover see page 276 Open tray 4 to the stops Bb O N Unplug 3 connectors callout 1 Figure 147 Paper pick up assembly 5 Remove 5 screws callout 2 6 Slide t
144. O slot number 1 Bottom EIO slot 2 Top EIO slot Event log message 53 lt x gt lt y gt lt Zz gt Action 1 Verify that the DIMM board is installed correctly and the DIMMs are configured correctly DRAM DIMMs must be installed in synchronous pairs in adjacent slots with the same size and speed in both slots Only SDRAM is supported Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer Remove and replace the DIMM that caused the error For more information about installing DIMMs see page 93 322 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Table 39 Numbered printer messages continued 54 1 TEMPERATURE SENSOR ERROR CYCLE POWER Description Indicates that the temperature humidity sensor in the printer has malfunctioned The temperature humidity sensor is located below tray 2 Event log message 54 00 01 Action 3 Reconnect connector J801 and relay connector J55 on the temperature humidity sensor and connector J206 on the controller board Replace the cassette crossmember assembly which includes the temperature humidity sensor Replace the controller board 54 2 CAROUSEL ERROR CYCLE POWER Description Indicates that the color toner carousel is not working correctly This could be caused by an obstruction in the carousel path such as a loose shutter or disengaged toner cartridge EN Event log message 54 00 02 Action Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer Open t
145. O ysej zc AeL YBIH Josues F Z HX D Aypiuny 5 Jorr ms lt 4 r ONO L finyereduey c e N9 lt GG WSS NL Z HAt yun Buibigyo sod oL ASS G ING Hi F t AALOV oror coos Lose OE kl 3 ge l WOd 10 0W i N99 et jasnoreg AL orr tter c z UvArKe E o Kidd nao CA GA AA zr l uWwAre 9 Gt Ns KA je KU KU je Ki Ki Ki Ki ie sror plousjos T j i 7 JOMO la o Jad fom fon 4 Jeo ho W3 d saaa jesnoleg alslolslalolzialole Cre ofalo vao o 5 Koko ok ek oh CHAPIZPZ ZR z z Bed 102r OL JZ 802 e526 to Z SISISS SSIS SISSIES zzz a 23 PEPE cPe elk 9 Dy yo yy SARSAN Reo n ols ma lat m G v Gr 3 EERE EE Sae SRE S A Eok pousos sseud los Nje gt jno Fas 43 OJ DU CIC Aejoaqn COUPS E wer OO GH It Er vod Aejeigng z Ot 1v0r COdOododod dg z e ser Ga NOUN TO nnn mooo E evo eLor Co vor oo r a len fas ko no Josues 9 garet I 9 Hiret L EZ9MS la ha osea al olo nofeo no feo F dArer F GND uon e o jasnolegp oe LMS GND F YOd Kelas ure ZIMS LIMS E MSXI F ZO6 Le Tele Bia YOJMS UND S YOUMs YO IMS Z SNS9H2 9 oo HOO Baki ay JOMOg L OND sor eBpupeo wnq 18A09 1YyBIY L 0319420 9 ai need Led OLS o Zolr LIMS Josues JosuesAlsAllop Josues njieded YOUMS JSAOS U01 J a00 We AelUMOp s0e4 AelLUMOp 80e4 T vod an AOD Alaala g ainsodxa IN JOSUSS AHAH 9 E Buuonpuosasd lt rnoet abpiiueo jojow Sd IS L Jojo LI YHdid F zao P89 1 NOl SNSDUDD L 4009 lasnales ETI
146. Press SELECT to perform the sensor monitor test Determine whether each sensor is working by viewing the test results for each sensor on the printer control panel A single character in the upper line of the display provides a label for each sensor bit A O off or 1 on is displayed for each sensor bit indicating whether the sensor is activated or deactivated See table 41 for an explanation of the test results 368 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Table 41 Sensor monitor test Designator 0 Sensor name Registration roller paper sensor PS1 1 Pick up unit paper sensor PS17 Separation sensor PS5 Fusing delivery sensor PS1903 Top face down output bin delivery sensor PS11 Tray 1 paper sensor PS1301 Tray 2 sensor PS1202 CO N O11 A O N Tray 3 sensor PS1201 Duplex paper sensor P524 Paper sensor in the duplexer in the output position Reverse sensor P526 Paper sensor in the duplexer at the reversing position Bit O of temperature humidity sensor Bit 1 of temperature humidity sensor The ambient temperature and humidity sensor data are combined into 2 bits showing 4 states of temperature and humidity 00 Normal normal 01 High high 10 Normal low 11 Low low See figure 60 on page 172 for more information on these sensors Exiting the service mode Exit the service mode by cycling through the menu until EXIT SERVICE MODE is reached and press
147. RC test 82 curl reducing on transparencies 378 Customer Care Center CCC Assist Line 54 Customer Care Online 50 Customer Information Centers 53 Customer Support Sales Center 53 cyan detail value 79 smooth value 79 cyan toner cartridge installing 88 location 104 replace frequency 105 D damaged media 341 transfer drum 335 dark transparencies 412 Data Indicator light 66 data corrupt PUL 351 Dealer Response Line 53 dealer finding 445 declarations of conformity 40 defaults Courier setting 77 factory 355 fonts 76 number of copies 76 orientation 76 paper size 76 PCL symbol set 77 resetting factory 78 defects input tray switches 378 repetitive 419 repetitive ruler 420 sensors 379 deleted fonts 351 355 delivery assembly 450 485 delivery cover assembly 486 switch 175 delivery drive assembly location 450 parts list 473 removing 259 delivery frame assembly 451 delivery head multi bin mailbox assembly 192 303 assembly jams 438 line 192 motor 190 192 position motor 293 position system jams 438 roller motor 190 Index 529 530 Index delivery rollers 124 extended sensor multi bin mailbox 190 demonstration page printing 353 denied access 334 density sensor cleaning 100 335 description 148 error 324 removing 242 depth of printer 22 detail color value 79 developer DSD wheels repetitive defects 421 developer motor test 83 developer roller repetitive defects 421 diagnostic LED multi bin mail
148. RF5 2568 000CN 242 76 Cover gear RB1 9403 000CN 221 7 Cover hinge RA0 0068 000CN 214 8 Cover inner 2 RA0 0026 000CN 217 2 Cover inner 3 RA0 0027 000CN 217 3 Cover inner 4 RF0 0013 000CN 217 4 Cover left RF5 2646 000CN 242 77 EN Alphabetical parts list 515 Table 82 Alphabetical parts list continued Description Part number Figure Ref Cover left lower RB1 6480 000CN 214 10 Cover left rear RA0 0065 000CN 215 6 Cover left upper RB2 0057 000CN 237 13 Cover power switch RB1 6492 000CN 214 12 Cover rear fan housing RG0 0017 000CN 215 51 Cover right RB1 7832 020CN 242 87 Cover right rear RA0 0067 000CN 216 7 Cover right rear lower corner RA0 0074 000CN 220 1 Cover right subassembly RF5 1995 000CN 216 31 Cover sensor RB1 9586 000CN 231 6 Cover top C3764 60555 244 31 Cover top label included RG5 2644 000CN 242 88 Cover tray 1 side gear RB 1 9547 000CN 216 46 Cover waste toner tray RA0 0083 000CN 217 10 Cyan toner cartridge C4150A Delivery assembly RG0 0110 000CN 236 Delivery cover assembly RG5 3108 000CN 237 Delivery drive assembly RG5 3067 000CN 225 Delivery head position motor C3764 60507 246 38 Density sensor assembly RG5 3057 000CN 216 35 Developing rotary RG5 3033 000CN 224 36 Diagnostic LED PCA with cable C4785 60514 246 35 Drum kit C4153A Imaging drum 2 air filters Hand wipe Drum cartridge drive assembly R
149. ROR CYCLE POWER Description Indicates that the paper diverter inside the right upper door is out of position causing an error feeding media from tray 1 Event log message 58 00 01 Action 1 Open the right upper door and check for a media jam or misfed media 2 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer 328 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Table 39 Numbered printer messages continued 59 lt x gt MOTOR ERROR CYCLE POWER Description Indicates that the main motor M4 is not working properly lt x gt Description 0 General error 1 Startup error 2 Rotation error Event log message 59 00 0 lt x gt Action 1 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer 2 Reconnect connector J219 and relay connector J1 on the controller board Replace the main motor M4 Reconnect connectors J641 to J643 and J647 on the main relay PCA connectors J671 and J673 on the subrelay PCA connector J102 on the power supply and connector J227 on the controller board 5 Check electrical continuity between connector J641 1 24 VB and J642 3 PMP on the main relay PCA when the door switch SW641 is turned on If there is no electrical continuity replace the main relay PCA 6 Check electrical continuity between connector J671 2 PMP and J671 2 PFUPR on the subrelay PCA when the door switch SW671 is turned on If there is no electrical continuity replace the subrelay PCA 7 Measure
150. Ref C3983 40007 Control panel overlay German C3983 40008 Control panel overlay Spanish C3983 40009 C3983 40010 Control panel overlay Dutch Control panel overlay Norwegian C3983 4001 1 Control panel overlay Swedish C3983 40012 Control panel overlay Finnish C3983 40013 C3983 40014 Control panel overlay Danish Control panel overlay Italian C3983 40015 Control panel overlay Russian C3983 40016 Control panel overlay Czech C3989 60115 HP Color LaserJet 8500 8500N 8500 DN Service and Support CD ROM C3983 67902 HP Color LaserJet 8500 8500N 8500 DN Self Paced Training Kit NTSC C3893 67903 HP Color LaserJet 8500 8500N 8500 DN Self Paced Training Kit PAL C3983 67905 Formatter assembly C3983 90919 HP Color LaserJet 8500 8500 N 8500 DN Quick Reference Guide English C3989 90901 HP Color LaserJet 8500 8500 N 8500 DN Getting Started Guide English C3989 90937 HP Color LaserJet 8500 8500 N 8500 DN User s Guide English C4140A 4 MB synchronous DIMM NOTE For all DIMM products you must install DRAM DIMMs in synchronized pairs for example two 4 MB DIMMs C4141A 8 MB synchronous DIMM C4142A 16 MB synchronous DIMM C4143A 32 MB synchronous DIMM C4149A Black toner cartridge C4150A Cy
151. SELECT It is not necessary to turn the printer off and on again unless you have accessed the formatter diagnostics EN Aids to troubleshooting 369 Disabling interlocks Figure 182 Right upper cover detection interlock Figure 183 Drum cartridge detection interlock 370 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Figure 184 Black toner cartridge detection interlock Figure 185 Toner carousel door detection interlock EN Aids to troubleshooting 371 Front cover X N Na Ss Left lower door detection interlock Delivery cover Front cover detection interlock Front cover detection interlock cA Figure 186 Front cover delivery cover detection interlocks 372 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Laser shutters I Laser shutter jea interlocks B Laser shutters Figure 187 Aids to troubleshooting 373 Figure 188 Left upper cover detection 1 1 ka 1 1 ee 1 1 ks 1 1 1 1 PI tn a 1 a 1 i 1 1 i w 1 J 1 1 1 ara ae v7 a p i Las rs ma Figure 189 Right lower cover detection 374 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Service mode formatter diagnostics 1 From the Service Mode Menu press MENU until FORMATTER DIAGNOSTICS appears 2 Press SELECT WARNING MEMORY LOSS appears on the printer control panel briefly Then EXECUTE TESTS appears 3 Press ITEM until one of the following tests appears on the p
152. SOR ERROR CYCLE POWER Description Action Matag toner sensor has failed Printing cannot 1 Replace the waste toner sensor assembly 2 Replace the imaging drum 324 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Table 39 Numbered printer messages continued 55 PRINTER ERROR CYCLE POWER Description Indicates a printer command error The commands cannot be exchanged between the printer and its controller Event log message 55 00 01 Action 1 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer 2 Verify the controller board is fully seated 56 1 ERROR CYCLE POWER Description Indicates an input feed error Such as requesting to feed transparencies through the duplexer or the input tray is not installed Event log message 56 01 01 Action 1 If the input tray you are trying to print from is not installed install the input tray 2 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer 56 2 ERROR CYCLE POWER Description Indicates an illegal output error For example the multi bin mailbox is not installed and it was selected as the output destination or there are transparencies in the duplexer Event log message 56 00 02 Action Open the printer and remove media from the paper path 2 Verify that the media type is set in the printer control panel 3 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer EN Printer message troubleshooting 325 Table 39 Numbered printer messages continued
153. Screw Torx Tapping T20 M4 x 10 3D Screw Torx T20 M4 x 12 3E Screw Torx Tapping T10 3F Screw Caster Head assembly with metallic tape C4785 60506 245 33 EN Alphabetical parts list 517 Table 82 Alphabetical parts list continued Description Part number Figure Ref High voltage converter 1 RH3 0211 000CN 220 24 High voltage converter 2 RH3 0228 000CN 220 25 Hinge stopper delivery RF5 2701 000CN 237 24 Hinge stopper tray 1 delivery assembly RG5 3962 000CN 216 54 Holder fan RF5 2025 000CN 223 3 Holder flapper RB1 9751 000CN 237 12 HP Color LaserJet 8500 8500 N 8500 DN C3989 90901 Getting Started Guide English HP Color LaserJet 8500 8500 N 8500 DN C3983 90919 Quick Reference Guide English HP Color LaserJet 8500 8500N 8500 DN C3983 67902 Self Paced Training Kit NTSC HP Color LaserJet 8500 8500N 8500 DN C3893 67903 Self Paced Training Kit PAL HP Color LaserJet 8500 8500N 8500 DN C3989 60115 Service and Support CD ROM HP Color LaserJet 8500 8500 N 8500 DN C3989 90937 User s Guide English HP Color LaserJet soft gloss paper A4 sized 38 C4179B 200 sheets HP Color LaserJet soft gloss paper letter sized C4179A 200 sheets HP Color LaserJet transparencies A4 sized C2936A 50 sheets HP Color LaserJet transparencies letter sized C2934A 50 sheets
154. See page 402 for a resolution to this print defect 392 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Rain or speckled print See page 403 for a resolution to this print defect EN Image defects troubleshooting 393 Figure 198 Black brown or orange bands See page 407 for a resolution to this print defect 394 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN qtqataqatatatatatataqate qteqataqatatatatatatate aqtaqtaqatatatatatatate 6 oe e ee a qtataqtatataqtatatate Ll Ta da la ta la Al la KO UA KK KAHA NG Ki DP PP gti IA Aetatatatate Aalaga AA Ala Pepe ere KO Background toner scatter Figure 199 See page 407 for a resolution to this print defect Image defects troubleshooting 395 EN Figure 200 Mottled process colors or poor transfer See page 408 for a resolution to this print defect 396 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Figure 201 Stray toner See page 410 for a resolution to this print defect EN Image defects troubleshooting 397 Example of Good Quality Example of Poor Quality Dark yellow or contaminated print See page 413 for a resolution to this print defect 398 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Incorrect registration late and early print See figure 192 on page 388 for an example Incorrect registration is when the entire image is offset from the leading edge of the page the left edge for letter and A4 sided media and the top of the page for all other media sizes Before tr
155. Tray4 242 79 RG5 3849 000CN Plate paper limit middle 242 85 RG5 3851 000CN Paper deck drive assembly 242 80 RG5 3854 000CN Vertical transfer unit VTU 242 89 RG5 3908 000CN Paper deck PCA 243 96 RG5 3909 000CN Power supply cable 243 99 RG5 3919 000CN Cable main 243 92 RG5 3921 000CN Cable DC power 218 19 RG5 3922 000CN Cable power signal 218 20 RG5 3923 000CN Cable carousel 221 6 510 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams EN Table 81 Numerical parts list continued Part number Description Figure Ref RG5 3934 000CN Sensor assembly toner waste 222 24 RG5 3936 000CN Laser scanner unit 222 18 RG5 3942 000CN Cable main motor 221 5 RG5 3943 000CN PCA high voltage converter 2 220 21 RG5 3961 000CN PCA cartridge release lever 218 21 RG5 3962 000CN Hinge stopper tray 1 delivery assembly 216 54 RG5 3966 000CN Separation discharge high voltage converter 220 30 PCA RG5 3973 000CN Static charge eliminator assembly 223 14 RG5 3975 000CN Cleaning roller assembly 223 15 RG5 3980 000CN Preconditioning exposure LED assembly 216 36 RG5 3992 000CN PCA fusing delivery sensor 218 8 RG5 4021 000CN Universal power supply assembly 243 102 RG5 4201 000CN Plate paper limit back 242 84 RG5 4204 000CN Front LED PCA with holder and cable 243 91 RG5 4205 000CN Outriggers 243 95 RH3 0211 000CN High voltage converter 1 220 24 RH3 0228 000CN High voltage converter 2 220 25 RH3 0234
156. U ar W 1 Figure 156 Front and back covers 3 Rotate the cover outward to release it from the frame EN Multi bin mailbox 287 Top cover 1 Remove the front and back covers see page 287 2 Disconnect the cable from the LED PCA callout 1 at the upper front side of the frame Figure 157 Top cover 3 Remove 1 screw that secures the LED PCA to the frame callout 2 Remove 2 screws close to the upper right side callout 3 Slide the top cover to the left side of the unit then lift it up and out of the frame 288 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Power supply 1 Unplug 1 connector from the controller PCA callout 1 Figure 158 Power supply 2 Press the plastic retaining tabs on each side of the power supply to remove it callout 2 EN Multi bin mailbox 289 Paper bins and blind cover The procedure for removing the paper bins and the blind cover is the same Each bin rests in its labeled slot 1 Remove the face up bin first Lift the outer edge of the bin to clear the retaining notch in the frame and then pull the bin away from the frame 2 Remove the blind cover Figure 159 Paper bins 3 Remove each face down bin starting at the top and working down in sequence Notes on reinstalling e Slide a bin into its designated slot and then lower the bin into the retaining notch in the frame e Replace the paper bins beginning with the bottom face down bin
157. a Ol Ai i KAAW A N WX Cay LA LNL Figure 22 Location of consumables in printer 1 Color toner cartridges 7 Air filters 2 Black toner cartridge 8 Transfer charger 3 Imaging drum 9 Pick up feed rollers 4 Cleaning roller 10 Charcoal filter 5 Transfer belt 11 Fuser 6 Transfer drum 104 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance EN Replacement frequencies Table 23 lists the approximate schedule for replacing consumables and the printer messages that appear when each consumable should be replaced Part numbers for each consumable can be found on page 447 For best print quality output use HP consumables that have been designed to work together in this printer For an explanation of printer control panel messages see page 316 HP encourages responsible disposal of HP printer consumables through its printing supplies recycling program All consumables listed above can be disposed of through the printing supplies recycling program Table 23 Replacement frequencies for printer consumables Consumable Printer message TONER LOW REPLACE BLACK TONER LOW Page count 17 000 pages 8 500 pages Approximate time period 2 8 months Black toner cartridge 1 4 months Color toner cartridges Imaging drum Air filters 2 Hand wipe REPLACE DRUM KIT only pages or 10 000
158. a standard light source for reference and understand that the perceived color will change as the light changes e Long term color variations occur as the paper ages Use high quality paper and protect the paper from sunlight to help minimize discoloration e Environmental changes can cause color variation The development process places a high potential across an air gap to attract toner to the imaging drum Changes in relative humidity vary the point at which the toner travels to the imaging drum The 384 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN EN printer has a humidity sensor that adjusts operating parameters as the humidity changes to minimize the effects of environmental changes e All consumable components have a finite life span and as these components reach the end of their useful life their ability to produce consistent print quality diminishes e When printing on transparencies OHT must be selected in the printer driver in order for the colors to be treated properly on the transparencies Color selection process The user selects the color in the application but the operating system might convert or modify some characteristics of the color before sending the information to the printer driver The printer driver might also modify color characteristics depending upon the selected output mode Any color characteristics not addressed by the printer driver or applications are set to the printer default The default color might
159. action is required CLOSE lt location gt DOOR Description The printer senses that one of the doors is not closed properly lt location gt A printer door COLD RESET Description The printer has recognized the key sequence for performing a cold reset The printer will reset to the factory default settings Note Before performing a cold reset print a configuration page as a reference for resetting the printer settings See page 361 for information on printing a configuration page Event log message None Action 1 Close the door indicated in the message 2 Check the function of the door interlocks see page 370 for interlock locations Event log message None Action No action is required For more information on factory default settings see the menu maps beginning on page 68 See page 376 for more information on performing a cold reset CONFIG LANGUAGE Description The printer has recognized the key sequence for selecting the display language CONTINUOUS TEST PRESS CANCEL JOB Description A continuous configuration page is printing Event log message None Action Wait for the display language options to appear and select the appropriate language For more information on selecting the display language see page 84 Event log message None Action Press CANCEL JOB to exit the configuration page printout mode If the printer is in the process of printing when CANCEL JOB Is pre
160. ade in Japan Fabrique au Japon WA Packano C4082A Figure 2 Example of printer model number and serial number label 110 V and 220 V 34 Chapter 1 Product information EN Product overview Figure 3 EN External views Front view 1 Printer control panel see 7 page 66 8 2 Left face up output bin 9 3 Front door 10 4 Input tray 2 11 5 Power button 42 6 Input tray 3 Lat o SO A 12 Top face down output bin Flip up media stop Right upper cover Input tray 1 Right lower cover Printer stand Product overview 35 e a p N SSS 5S Figure 4 Rear view Air filter door Formatter board Left upper cover Left lower cover ao FF N Power connector 36 Chapter 1 Product information EN Formatter assemblies IO Aj pm gt a 9 ES DTI I5 NA MM A a 7 g a e J Figure 5 Formatter assemblies Formatter board DIMM slots Printer hard disk location factory installed EIO slot 2 shown with HP JetDirect internal print server Parallel IEEE 1284 interface port C size EIO slot 1 C link connector N DB 0a FP WO N rm Note Either EIO slot can have a hard disk installed if there is not a factory installed internal hard drive mounted on the formatter board
161. aded in tray 1 and the media does not feed into the printer verify that the printer control panel settings for tray 1 Cassette mode match the media type and size requested TRAY 1 SIZE lt size gt Description This message is displayed when media is placed in tray 1 and the tray is configured for Cassette Mode lt size gt Last media size configured for the input tray TRAY 4 Event log message None Action 1 Press VALUE to view the choices 2 Press SELECT when the choice you want is displayed 3 Press Go to bring the printer online If no key is pressed for 30 seconds after the media is detected in the input tray the displayed size is automatically selected the message is cleared and printing begins Event log message None COMM ERROR CHECK CABLES CYCLE POWER Description Communication with the 2 000 sheet input unit has been lost Action 1 Verify all cables are connected correctly 2 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer 358 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Table 40 Unnumbered printer messages continued TRAY lt x gt EMPTY lt type gt lt size gt Description An input tray not currently selected has run out of media lt X gt Input tray number 2 3 or 4 lt type gt Last media type configured for the input tray lt size gt Last media size configured for the input tray TRAY lt x gt LIFTING Description The specified input tray is lift
162. age None Action No action is required Event log message None Action 1 From the host computer delete data from the printer hard disk using the printer drivers or a disk management application 2 To clear all data from the printer hard disk reformat the printer hard disk from the printer control panel To reformat the printer hard disk a Press MENU until CONFIGURATION MENU appears on the display b Press ITEM until INITIALIZE DISK appears on the display c Press SELECT to reformat the printer hard disk Event log message None Action See the system administrator for access to the printer hard disk Event log message None Action Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer NI Reconnect connector J209 and relay connectors J47 and J48 on the controller board 3 Replace the drum kit EN Table 40 Unnumbered printer messages continued DRUM LIFE LOW REPLACE DRUM KIT Description The imaging drum is almost past its specified life Printing can continue however print quality might be degraded DRUM LIFE OUT REPLACE DRUM KIT Description The imaging drum is past its specified life or the waste toner cartridge in the imaging drum is full Printing cannot continue until the drum kit has been replaced DUPLEX ERROR CHECK DUPLEXER Description The printer has detected an error in the duplexer Event log message None Action Although printing can continue th
163. age 420 Ifthe transparencies have spots or smudges reprint them being careful not to touch the surface of the media Oil from your hands can contaminate transparencies causing spots and smudges Small random dark areas on the trailing edge of solid fill pages might be caused by transparencies sticking together in the left face up output bin Try printing the job in smaller batches Small random spots can be caused by dust on the transparency surface Note Allow transparencies to cool at least 30 seconds before handling them Transparencies created on the printer should not be used on reflective type portable transparency projectors Colors will project better on transmissive projectors Dull or dark transparencies If the transparency colors are dull or dark Try printing the image on plain paper to verify the image is good e Ensure the transparencies meet the specifications for this printer see page 31 e Verify that the green lever on the fuser is locked down 412 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Dark yellow print or contaminated print See figure 202 on page 398 for an example This defect can be caused by toner being deposited on yellow areas If the transfer kit is past its maximum life colors might be contaminated EN Try to avoid printing black or dark colored images on pages preceding yellow or light colored images The cleaning roller might not be cleaning the transfer drum correctly Open
164. age in the location of the prepunched holes then this toner is deposited on the back of the next page printed Open and close the front door to complete a printer self cleaning cycle e f smears appear on the back of the page the transfer belt is dirty Open and close the front door to complete a printer self cleaning cycle e Print a configuration page to check the percentage of life remaining for the transfer kit If the transfer kit is past its rated life replace it e Ensure the transfer belt is installed correctly and is seated in its notches e Inspect the imaging drum for a jammed page Remove the media Poor fusing Poor fusing is characterized by loose toner on the printed output Unfused or poorly fused toner can be easily wiped off the page e Verify that the green lever on the fuser is locked down Also check that the fuser does not have toner build up in the input area Clean any loose toner accumulated around the fuser e Verify that the media type is set correctly in the printer driver and the printer control panel e Check that the media is within the weight and smoothness specifications listed in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide e Check that the printer does not multi feed If more than one sheet enters the fuser toner on the top sheet might not fuse Image defects troubleshooting 405 Ghosting Ghosting appears as a latent image of previously printed material on the page wit
165. aging drum cleaning block 10 Transfer drum cleaning 5 Primary transfer 9 Cleaning roller charging CELAD Post chargin Transfer block Transfer drum cleaning block i gg Fusing block N a gt 8 Separation la 12 Fusing 7 Secondary transfer Registration Cassette pick up lt t Flow of the paper lt Rotation direction of imaging drum oS Rotation direction of transfer drum Figure 28 Electrostatic latent image formation block Note In the following sections the text is numbered to match each of the numbered steps in the process flowchart above 130 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN Figure 29 EN Electrostatic latent image formation block One of the differences between color and black and white laser imaging is that the color image is created with multiple layers This printer contains four toner cartridges cyan magenta yellow and black The electrostatic latent image formation block consists of three steps for forming the image on the imaging drum At the end of the last step the negative charge on the unexposed area remains while the negative charge on the exposed area is decreased This potential image on the drum is invisible to the human eye and is called electrostatic latent image 1 Preconditioning exposure To prepare for primary charging the preconditioning exposure LED unit removes the residual charge on the imaging drum surface This
166. al parts list continued Part number Description Figure Ref C4785 60510 Fixed casters 244 30 C4785 6051 1 Adjustable fixed caster 244 21 C4785 60512 C4785 60513 Attachment clip Multi bin mailbox repackaging kit 246 36 C4785 60514 Diagnostic LED PCA with cable 246 35 C4785 60515 User LED PCA with cable 244 20 C4785 60516 C4785 60518 Attachment assembly rod bracket cables Transport belt motor with fan 244 246 22 41 C4785 60519 Plastic parts 1A Anti curl string 1B Spring for anti curl string 1C Pulley small bottom 1D Cable holder round gasket 1E Flat cable holder edge 1F Flat cable holder 1G Spacer plastic 245 Kit 1 C4785 60520 Cables 2A Switch interlock 2B Delivery head motor cable 2C Flipper sensor controller cable 2D Flipper encoder controller 2E Flipper motor controller 2F ESD cable 2G Delivery head assembly flat cable 246 Kit 2 C4785 60521 Hardware 3A Screw Torx 3B Screw Torx T20 M4 x 10 3C Screw Torx Tapping T20 M4 x 10 3D Screw Torx T20 M4 x 12 3E Screw Torx Tapping T10 3F Screw Caster 245 Kit 3 C4785 69500 Exchange multi bin mailbox assembly NOTE You must have a 2 000 sheet input unit in order to install a multi bin mailbox 244 21 C4785 70001 Multi bin mailbox short C link cable adapter C4787 60503 Multi bin
167. an toner cartridge C4151A Magenta toner cartridge C4152A Yellow toner cartridge EN Illustrations and parts lists 503 Table 81 Numerical parts list continued 504 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Part number Description Figure Ref C4153A Drum kit Imaging drum 2 air filters Hand wipe C4154A Transfer kit Transfer drum Transfer belt Cleaning roller Charcoal filter Hand wipe C4155A 110 volt fuser kit Fuser 6 paper rollers Hand wipe C4156A 220 volt fuser kit Fuser 6 paper rollers Hand wipe C4179A HP Color LaserJet soft gloss paper letter sized 200 sheets C4179B HP Color LaserJet soft gloss paper A4 sized 200 sheets C4781 60500 Power box C4782 60501 Duplexer product number C4782A C4782 69501 Exchange duplexer C4785 60500 Multi bin mailbox assembly 244 28 product number C4785A Note You must have a 2 000 sheet input tray in order to install a multi bin mailbox C4785 60501 Power supply 246 40 C4785 60502 Face down bin 244 24 C4785 60503 Blind cover 244 23 C4785 60504 Cover front 244 26 C4785 60505 Back cover 246 37 C4785 60506 Head assembly with metallic tape 245 33 C4785 60507 Metallic tape and housing assembly 245 34 C4785 60508 Multi bin mailbox controller with metal box 244 29 C4785 60509 Flipper assembly with cable request 245 32 Table 81 Numeric
168. and able to accept and process data e Off trThe printer is offline and unable to accept or process data Flashing The printer is going from online to offline or from offline to online On Data is in the printer buffer or the printer is processing data e Off The printer buffer is empty e Flashing The printer is receiving or processing data e On An error has occurred in the printer Off The printer does not require attention Flashing The printer requires attention Selects the item or value currently shown on the printer control panel display An asterisk is displayed when an item has been selected Printer control panel layout 67 Menu maps Note Press MENU to cycle through the printer control panel menus Each menu is described in a separate table in this section Menu items are displayed only if their associated option or function is installed or activated All menus and their associated items are accessible when the printer is online In a menu mode if no keys are pressed for approximately 30 seconds the system automatically returns to the top level and displays one of the following e READY if the printer was online e OFFLINE if the printer was offline e an existing error or service message Making selections in the printer control panel menus 1 Press MENU until the menu you want appears on the printer control panel display Press ITEM until the item you want appears on the display Pre
169. and continuing upward in order Be sure to place the blind cover between face down bin 1 and the face up bin 290 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Figure 160 EN Flipper assembly 1 Remove all paper bins and the blind cover see page 290 2 Remove the front back and top covers see page 287 and page 288 3 Remove 2 screws closest to the upper left side callout 1 TK Flipper assembly 1 of r ka 4 Hold down the jam access door and unplug the ground wire callout 2 that runs from the input paper guide to the flipper motor Multi bin mailbox 291 Figure 161 Flipper assembly 2 of 3 Mm Unplug 3 connectors figure 160 callout 3 Use a flat blade screwdriver to release the plastic retaining tab that secures the assembly to the top of the frame callout 4 Figure 162 Flipper assembly 3 of 3 7 Hold down the jam access door callout 5 and pull the assembly out Notes on reinstalling e Hold down the jam access door to reconnect the ground wire to the flipper motor callout 2 292 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN CAUTION Do not over tighten the screws that secure the flipper assembly to the multi bin mailbox frame The nuts in the flipper assembly can rotate in their slots Delivery head position motor 1 Remove the back cover see page 287 2 Unplug 1 connector callout 1 Figure 163 Delivery head motor 3 Remove 2 screws from the motor callout 2 4 Pull
170. and sizes for input trays 28 Media capacity and sizes for the multi bin mailbox 30 Ordering information 0 00 00 c cee eee 49 Technical support websites 50 Printer control panel menu map overview 69 Information Menu a 71 Proof and Print Menu 020000 a ee 72 Paper Handling Menu 00 00 eae 72 Configuration Menu a 75 PANUNG MENU 4 pn sana KNA KAG GA YG deste Ap Bd 76 VO MENU nak oe tes maureen aed eae ek 78 Resets Menu 2 aaa 78 Color Adjust Menu a 79 Service Mode Menu 0000 eee eens 80 Paper handling accessory status LEDs 95 Replacement frequencies for printer consumables 105 Subtractive color absorption 126 Subtractive color mixing 127 Additive color mixing 000c eee eee 128 Fusing temperatures 154 Printer motor and heater names and descriptions 159 FanMODEFALON Asaovnsteacach de ayant dnd dick Ve deal eat 165 Feed speeds based on media type 167 Printer sensor names and descriptions 173 Printer switch names and descriptions 175 Tray 2 and Tray 3 paper size detection 176 Printer clutch and solenoid names and descriptions 177 2 000 sheet input unit sensors switches clutches ANd MOOLS aens ri Banay MGa Na GR GAGA Anay os 182 Paper quantity detection
171. another file system 352 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Event log message None Action 1 NI If the fuser has been replaced press SELECT to reset the internal counter If the message clears before pressing SELECT the value can be reset in the RESETS menu If the fuser has not been replaced press Go Event log message None Action 1 NI If the transfer drum has been replaced press SELECT to reset the internal counter If the message clears before pressing SELECT the value can be reset in the RESETS menu If the transfer drum has not been replaced press Go Event log message None Action 1 Press SELECT to reformat the printer hard disk All data currently on the printer hard disk will be lost If you don t want to initialize the printer hard disk wait until the message clears 10 seconds or press Go and the disk will not be initialized This will render the disk non functional but the configuration page will show that the disk is installed EN Table 40 Unnumbered printer messages continued PRESS SELECT TO LOSE DISK DATA PRESS GO KEY TO CANCEL Description This is a request to confirm initialization of the printer hard disk see PRESS SELECT TO INITIALIZE DISK above Initialization will perform a high level check of the disk and register the disk with the disk manager software PRINTER LANGUAGE NOT AVAILABLE JOB CANCELED Description PJL encountered a request for a prin
172. anually from the default settings by changing the densities of the four toners black cyan magenta and yellow Changing the Detail Half tone Adjust and Smooth Half tone Adjust allow you to independently adjust the color of objects on a page that use the smooth and detail half tones such as text and graphics Any settings you change remain in effect until you change them again or restore the factory defaults Do not perform the color balance adjustment procedure until all of the following troubleshooting methods have been completed Experiment with the printer driver and application settings to adjust the color output For more information on application settings see the online help e Clean the density sensor see page 100 Complete the troubleshooting solutions earlier in this chapter for the color printing problem you are experiencing 414 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Figure 203 EN SOE HS Few oh ja Color adjust page A B C D Smooth Half tone Adjust section Color ramps Detail Half tone Adjust section Neutral axis Color balance adjustment 415 1 Print the color adjust page a Press GO and VALUE at the same time COLOR ADJUST MEHU appears on the printer control panel display b Press ITEM until FEIHT TEST PAGE appears on the display c Press SELECT to print the color adjust page d Press Go to exit the Color Adjust Menu The color adjust page allows you to adjust the printer s two
173. aper diverter and remove 2 screws callout 1 a f o ae i Bb OE T bt ETE E AA Fi LINGA Registration roller assembly front Right assemblies 239 5 Remove 2 screws on the back of the assembly callout 2 Hint You might need to use a shorter screwdriver to get the back screws out Figure 110 Registration roller assembly back 240 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Figure 111 EN 6 Release and remove the cover over the connectors on the right side of the registration roller assembly 7 Unplug the innermost connecior on the right side callout 3 CG ara F Connectors on registration roller assembly 8 Remove 1 screw from the green knob on the front of the printer and remove the knob 9 Pull the registration roller assembly out Notes on reinstalling When you replace the registration roller assembly make sure the gears mesh or you could cause scarring Paper photo OHT sensors The paper photo sensors are located under the registration frame assembly and are used to sense overhead transparencies 1 Remove the registration roller assembly see page 239 2 Remove the 2 paper photo sensors by releasing the 2 clasps on each sensor and unplugging one connector on each sensor Right assemblies 241 Density sensor The density sensor is located on the right upper door 1 Open the right upper door 2 With a flat screwdriver release the 6 tabs on the sensor cover callo
174. ation frame assembly RG5 3007 000CN 1 2 Spring torsion RB1 6409 000CN 1 3 Arm sensor RB1 6417 000CN 1 4 PCA photo interrupter IC TLP1240 WG8 5210 000CN 1 6 Cover sensor RB1 9586 000CN 1 7 PCA photosensor RG5 3032 000CN 1 8 PCA photosensor RG5 3079 000CN 1 480 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams EN Registration roller assembly a REL Figure 232 Registration roller assembly Table 67 Registration roller assembly parts Ref Description Part number Qty Registration roller assembly RG5 3009 000CN 1 EN Illustrations and parts lists 481 Feeder assembly Figure 233 Feeder assembly Table 68 Feeder assembly parts Ref Description Part number Qty Feeder assembly RG5 3059 000CN 1 482 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams EN Tray 1 pick up assembly i J1303 ZA A J32 40 J34 S Ba ya paaa a l Figure 234 Tray 1 pick up assembly Table 69 Tray 1 pick up assembly parts Ref Description Part number Qty Tray 1 pick up assembly RG5 3054 000CN 1 10 Roller tray 1 pick up RB1 9526 000CN 1 40 Photo interrupter IC TLP1240 WG8 5210 000CN 1 EN Illustrations and parts lists 483 Tray 1 assembly o J1701 F i g Figure 235 Tray 1 assembly Part number Table 70 Tray 1 assembly parts RG5 3134 000CN Description Qty 1 Ref
175. back RG5 4201 000CN 1 85 Plate paper limit middle RG5 3849 000CN 1 86 Plate paper reference front RF5 3850 000CN 1 87 Cover right RB1 7832 020CN 1 88 Cover top label included RG5 2644 000CN 1 89 Vertical transfer unit VTU RG5 3854 000CN 1 Kit 1 screws kit 2 000 sheet input unit RY7 5044 000CN 1 EN Illustrations and parts lists 493 92 Kit 1 a Kit 1 Mi QY Kit 1 Figure 243 2 000 sheet input unit internal components 494 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams EN Table 77 2 000 sheet input unit internal component parts Ref Description Part number Qty 91 Front LED PCA with holder and cable RG5 4204 000CN 1 92 Cable main RG5 3919 000CN 1 93 Metallic retaining spring spring leaf RB1 7835 000CN 2 94 Metallic retaining tab plate stop RB1 7677 000CN 2 95 Outriggers RG5 4205 000CN 1 96 Paper deck PCA RG5 3908 000CN 1 97 Paper quantity sensor PCA assembly RG5 2166 000CN 1 98 Paper size sensor PCA assembly RG5 2168 000CN 1 99 Power supply cable RG5 3909 000CN 1 100 Power supply fuse 250V 3 15A VD7 1893 151CN 1 101 Spring tension RS5 2561 000CN 2 102 Universal power supply assembly RG5 4021 000CN 1 Kit 1 Screws kit 2 000 sheet input unit RY7 5044 000CN 1 EN Illustrations and parts lists 495 Multi bin mailbox components Multi bin mailbox components 1 of 3 Figure 244 EN 496 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 78 Multi bin mailbox com
176. ber of repetitions Press SELECT to choose the number of repetitions Press ITEM until EXECUTE TEST appears on the display oOo 0O ma GW N Press SELECT to perform the developer motor test Aids to troubleshooting 367 Note Note Drum motor test This test activates the drum motor M2 imaging drum transfer drum and imaging drum waste paddle simultaneously To view the printer components run the test with the right upper door open the transfer drum and imaging drum removed and the right upper door interlock defeated see figure 182 on page 370 The engine runs this test for a fixed duration and then stops For safety reasons the fuser high voltage supplies and scanner are all turned off during testing 1 From the Service Mode Menu press MENU until DRUM MOTOR appears Press ITEM until REPETITIONS appears Press VALUE to display the possible number of repetitions Press SELECT to choose the number of repetitions Press ITEM until EXECUTE TEST appears on the display oOo o FF o N Press SELECT to perform the drum motor test Sensor monitor test This test allows service personnel to activate and deactivate sensors in the printer to verify that the sensors are working properly For safety reasons the fuser high voltage supplies and scanner are all turned off during testing 1 From the Service Mode Menu press MENU until SENSOR MONITOR appears Press ITEM until EXECUTE TEST appears on the display
177. bin mailbox 2 0 0 0 0 cee ee 229 Formatter board 0 0 ce eee 230 Internal printer hard disk DN model 232 Feeder assembly 00 00 eee eee 233 Face up Solenoid 0 0 cee eee 234 Face up exit assembly 236 FIGMtASSCMDNGS co dul a cari aaa oa NS alle 23 AA AA AA AA 237 Pick up roller 0 0 aaa 238 Registration roller assembly 239 Paper photo OHT sensors 241 Density SENSOr 2 aaa 242 Paper pick up assembly 243 Tray 1 pick up assembly 244 Rear assemblies 00 eee 246 Formatter pan eee eee 248 Pana 5 ask th dein cate ates oe Peet eth ae em iol ag em one 250 PAN 2 orada eh ie das wi wad sae ANNA wee we eee 251 FOWO SUDD aaa 2 oe Ree ate dee PSA Sane eR ee 202 Controller DOI 34 43 20 ante econ awhdtawss a teatte 253 Cartridge motor M3 2 0 00 0c e eee 254 Main motor M4 2 0 0 eee ee eee 255 Carousel motor PCA aaa 256 Carousel motor M1 0a 257 Delivery drive assembly 259 Main gear assembly not shown 261 High voltage converter 1 assemblies 262 High voltage converter 2 assemblies 264 Main relay PCA 0a padaan akma na ASANG 266 Drum cartridge drive assembly 267 Separation discharge high voltage converter ASSEMDIIES 4 sapak KHAN RANA KAM
178. box 307 diagnostic LEDs 2 000 sheet input unit 182 diagnostics 2 000 sheet input unit 431 formatter board 81 multi bin mailbox 434 switch 182 diagrams circuit 440 DIMMs dual inline memory modules accessories 19 errors 322 expanding memory 19 installing 93 ordering 445 parts list 446 removing 356 slot locations 37 test 82 DIN 8 connection 62 DIP switches 2 000 sheet input unit 428 430 directories printing file 71 disk See hard disk dithering 127 diverter for paper out of position 328 DL sized media See media DOC regulations Canadian 39 documentation ordering 50 parts list 448 doors location 206 parts lists 452 457 492 vertical transfer unit open 345 dots per inch DPI printer resolution 20 Double Post Card JPOSTD sized media See media double sided printing See duplexer duplex printing DPI dots per inch printer resolution 20 DRAM dynamic random access memory installing 93 test 82 Driver Distribution Center 53 drivers See printer drivers drum imaging error 342 imaging life out 343 imaging not installed 347 imaging problems 424 new transfer 352 transfer damaged 335 transfer jams 340 transfer not installed 348 transfer problems 422 drum kit low and out messages 75 parts list 447 replace frequency 105 drum motor 159 description and illustration 161 test 83 Drum MSDS 45 drum cartridge drive assembly illustration 451 illustration and parts list 472 removing 267 drums cleaning transfer 422
179. brelay PCA 9 Check electrical continuity between connector J642 1 PYMC and J648 1 24 VAR on the main relay PCA when the door switch SW642 is turned on If there is no electrical continuity replace the main relay PCA 10 Measure the voltage across connector J648 1 24 VAR and J648 3 GND on the main relay PCA after the printer is turned on If the voltage is not 24 V replace the main relay PCA 11 Reconnect connectors J704 and J706 on the carousel motor PCA and connector J220 on the controller board 12 Reconnect connector J43 on the carousel position sensor relay connector J42 and connector J207 on the controller board 13 Measure the voltage across connector J220 A6 RLSROT and J220 B5 GND on the controller board after the printer is turned on If the voltage changes to about 3 5 V from 0 V replace the carousel motor PCA 14 Replace the carousel motor M1 15 Replace the controller board 54 3 DENSITY SENSOR ERROR Event log message 54 00 03 CYCLE POWER Description Action Indicates a density sensor error or the printer is not 1 Sai Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer receiving data back from the density sensor P p 2 Clean the density sensor see page 100 3 Reconnect connector J1101 on the density sensor PCA intermediate connectors J75 and J46 and connector J206 on the controller board 4 Replace the density sensor 54 4 WASTE TONER Event log message 54 00 04 SEN
180. by 17 inch sized Dade 20124 wapak nha AWA LAGDAAN 198 EN EN Figure 75 Figure 76 Figure 77 Figure 78 Figure 79 Figure 80 Figure 81 Figure 82 Figure 83 Figure 84 Figure 85 Figure 86 Figure 87 Figure 88 Figure 89 Figure 90 Figure 91 Figure 92 Figure 93 Figure 94 Figure 95 Figure 96 Figure 97 Figure 98 Figure 99 Figure 100 Figure 101 Figure 102 Figure 103 Figure 104 Figure 105 Figure 106 Figure 107 Figure 108 Figure 109 Figure 110 Figure 111 Figure 112 Figure 113 Figure 114 Figure 115 Orientation of printer and accessories top front PGW CHR Sp ache cece aie sees AA AA 206 Orientation of printer and accessories rear ANO re aca kta Lp kaan DAN aha NADA Sra et GALE NN PEN oe 207 Removing the front cover 208 FONCION COVEI aaa mamakaa Kaha an 209 Inside left panel AA AA 210 Screws behind left door 211 Screws behind right door 212 Connector on top cover 212 Left door and strap 213 Screws on left rear cover 214 Screws on upper left door 215 Stopper hinges on lower left cover 216 Connectors on the right upper door 217 FEAL a EE ct AGA A AA APA DEAN te ie 218 Spring on right cover subassembly 219 Right rear cover cee eee 220 Screws on the right lower cov
181. c mode to enable the new diagnostic test 428 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Service LED interpretation If the 2 000 sheet input unit is working properly it will pick up paper from tray 4 and expel it the bottom service LED will flash regularly every 0 5 seconds Table 46 Patterns of LED flashing 2 second pause between each pattern Long Short 1 sec 0 3 sec Description Recommended action Lifter malfunction Verify that the tray lifts freely by lifting it by hand Verify that the paper size plates are installed correctly in the same corresponding slots and are not bent If neither of these is the problem replace tray 4 Registration sensor delay jam The media does not reach the sensor Open the VTU door and remove the media Replace the paper feed VTU assembly or the paper pick up assembly Registration sensor stationary Open the VTU door and remove the jam initial jam media Check the sensors and replace the corresponding field replaceable unit Jam sensor delay jam The media did not reach the sensor Open the VTU door and remove the media Replace the paper feed VTU assembly or the paper pick up assembly 2 4 Jam sensor stationary jam Open the VTU door and remove the initial jam media 1 1 VTU door is open Close the door Tray 4 is open Close the tray Wrong paper size loaded Load the correct size of paper or check sensors 1 3 No paper in tray 4 Load paper or check sensors Note If the LEDs do
182. ccurred in the 1 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer 2 Verify the fuser is completely seated inside the printer 3 Reconnect connector J222 on the controller board connector J26 on the fuser and connector J101 on the power supply 4 Replace the fuser kit 5 Replace the power supply 6 Replace the controller board 51 LASER ERROR Event log message 51 00 01 CYCLE POWER Description Action Indicates that a laser malfunction has occurred 1 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer 2 Reconnect connector J1001 on the laser driver PCA and connector J205 on the controller board 3 Reconnect connector J2 on the beam detect PCA relay connector J40 and connector J211 on the controller board Replace the laser scanner unit Measure the voltage across connector J211 1 5 V and J211 3 GND on the controller board after the printer is turned on If the voltage is not 5 V replace the laser scanner unit 6 Replace the controller board 320 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Table 39 Numbered printer messages continued 52 SCANNER ERROR Event log message 52 00 00 CYCLE POWER Description Action Indicates that the scanner motor is not turning 1 properly 2 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer Reconnect connector J901 on the scanner motor PCA relay connector J40 and connector J211 on the controller board Measure the voltage across connector J647 B11 24UH and
183. ce the power supply PCA 50 2 FUSER ERROR CYCLE POWER Description Indicates that a warmup error has occurred in the fuser Event log message 50 00 02 Action 1 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer 2 Verify the fuser is completely seated inside the printer 3 Check for media jams in the fuser 4 Replace the fuser kit 50 3 FUSER ERROR CYCLE POWER Description Indicates that a high temperature error has occurred in the fuser This error is saved in the controller board by an electrical charge in capacitor C259 Event log message 50 00 03 Action Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer Turn the printer off and unplug it Place a flat blade of a screwdriver between the two wires of C259 to short out the capacitor and clear the memory Replace the fuser kit Replace the power supply Replace the controller board EN Printer message troubleshooting 319 Table 39 Numbered printer messages continued 50 4 FUSER ERROR Event log message 50 00 04 CYCLE POWER Description Action Indicates that a fuser drive or power unit error has 1 Turn the printer off and on to r he printer occurred in the fuser p eset the printe 2 Verify the fuser is completely seated inside the printer 3 Replace the power supply 4 Replace the controller board 50 6 FUSER ERROR Event log message 50 00 06 CYCLE POWER Description Action ea that a heater error has o
184. cessories as they are referred to in this chapter Figure 75 Orientation of printer and accessories top front and right Top cover assembly Front cover Front right cover Right upper cover assembly includes the right upper door Right cover subassembly Right lower cover assembly includes the right lower door Right rear cover Vertical transfer unit VTU O N O Ad FP WD N 206 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN le 3 4 5 Z goo A 7 te n pi N N N Rear Left Figure 76 Orientation of printer and accessories rear and left 1 Exhaust fan cover 2 Rear cover 3 Left upper cover includes the left upper door 4 Left rear cover 5 Left lower cover EN Doors and covers 207 Front covers and panels Removing the front cover 1 Open the front cover 2 Remove 1 screw holding the strap in place callout 1 A f emen m rr epp b amam a 7 Figure 77 Removing the front cover 3 Remove 1 screw holding the cover callout 2 4 Open the cover to approximately a 45 degree angle and lift it up to remove it 208 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN EN Removing the front right cover 1 Open the front door 2 Remove 1 screw in the upper right hand side that holds the front right cover on callout 1 Front right cover 3 Pul
185. cover see page 215 4 Remove 6 screws callout 1 img Ka E A ae E j BP 4 z 5 asap T f Feeder assembly 5 Lift the feeder assembly up and out Left assemblies 233 Notes on reinstalling Verify that the gears on the left mesh together on both the top and the bottom of the assembly Replace the screw inside the front door for the right side of the bar Face up solenoid The face up solenoid is below the carousel stop 1 2 3 Remove the feeder assembly see page 233 Remove the face up output bin Remove the formatter board and formatter pan see page 230 and page 248 Remove 1 screw inside the back of the printer callout 1 Face up solenoid 234 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN 5 Lift the face up solenoid up to release the tab and pull out to remove the solenoid callout 2 k oa a T Ta 5 Saw n a TI a i i j S an AT Face up solenoid Notes on reinstalling Ensure that the plastic arm from the solenoid is engaged under the delivery drive swing arm callout 3 figure 104 EN Left assemblies 235 Face up exit assembly The face up exit assembly is located on the left lower cover 1 Remove the left lower cover see page 216 2 Remove 6 screws callout 1 E Figure 106 Screws on the face up exit assembly 3 Remove the stopper hinges by popping the peg out of the door assembly 4 L
186. ct size paper width and length is loaded in tray 1 Verify the paper guides are set correctly Load the requested size media in tray 1 Or press Go to print on the default paper size Verify that the media width sensor on the paper guides are working properly Reconnect connector J1701 on the tray 1 width detection PCA relay connector J33 and connector J208 on the controller board Replace the tray 1 pick up assembly 41 5 UNEXPECTED PAPER TYPE LOAD TRAY lt x gt lt type gt lt size gt Description The printer was expecting one type of media to be fed from an input tray and a different type was fed For example the printer was expecting transparencies and plain paper was fed lt x gt Input tray number 2 3 or 4 lt type gt Media type specified in the printer driver or application lt size gt Media size specified in the printer driver or application Note The size error in this message applies only to tray 1 Event log message 41 00 05 Action 5 6 Open and close the front door to remove the page from the printer Verify that the correct media is loaded in the input tray and the printer control panel is configured correctly Clean the detection windows of OHT sensors 1 and2 Reconnect connectors J1801 and J1802 of OHT sensors 1 and 2 connector J214 on the controller board and relay connector J17 Replace OHT sensors 1 and 2 Replace the controller board
187. d 5 mils 0 10 to 0 13 mm thick HP recommends using transparencies that are 5 mil 0 13 mm thick e To prevent damage to the printer transparencies must be able to withstand the printer s fusing temperature approximately 190 C or 374 F e Handle transparencies by the edges Oil from your fingers can be deposited on the transparencies causing print quality problems Also allow transparencies to cool before handling to prevent curling Allow transparencies to cool before handling to prevent burns Media requirements 31 Glossy media If you want the effect of glossy media use only HP LaserJet glossy media in this printer For ordering information see page 445 Heavy paper stock Heavy paper stock is any paper heavier than 28 Ib up to 58 Ib 105 to 216 g m bond Always print heavy paper stock from tray 1 In the printer driver select Heavy Paper or Cardstock as the paper type on the paper tab to ensure the correct finish on the media Also use the left face up output bin to prevent media jams For more information on changing the printer driver settings see the online help Do not use extremely heavy paper stock greater than 58 Ib or 216 g m bond Misfeeds mis stacking media jams poor toner fusing poor print quality and excessive mechanical wear can result Colored media Colored media should be of the same high quality as white xerographic paper Pigments used must be able to withstand the printer s fus
188. d diagrams EN Overview The figures in this chapter illustrate the major assemblies in the printer and their component parts A table materials list follows each exploded assembly diagram Each table lists a reference number to the illustration part number quantity and description for each part Note When looking for a part number pay careful attention to the voltage listed in the description column if there is one to ensure that the part number selected is for the correct printer model Ordering parts All standard part numbers are stocked and can be ordered from Support Materials Organization SMO or Support Materials Europe SME For information on contacting SMO or SME see page 49 Note Parts that have no reference number or part number are not field replaceable and cannot be ordered Consumables options and accessories The items listed in table 49 are available through your local authorized HP dealer To find a dealer near you or if your local dealer is temporarily out of stock call the HP Customer Information Center at 1 800 752 0900 Note Order two sets of DIMMs if upgrading the printer memory order one set of DIMMs if replacing memory EN Overview 445 Table 49 Options accessories and consumables Part number Description C2986 60001 Hard disk internal 4 MB synchronous DIMM NOTE For all DIMM products you must install DRAM DIMMs in synchronized pairs for example two 4 MB DIMMs C3913
189. der related documentation and software contact SMO or SME at the numbers listed on the previous page Part numbers for related documentation are listed beginning on page 448 For information through the World Wide Web visit the following websites Table 11 Technical support websites HP Customer Care Online http www hp com go support Software drivers support documentation and answers to frequently asked questions HP Technical Training http www hp com go resellertraining North America Classes and schedules Parts http outfield external hp com spi Parts information welcom htm List server A list server is a mail program that allows users to subscribe or unsubscribe to certain mail lists by sending e mail to the server Once subscribed a user receives all messages sent to the list name The following list server will allow HP LaserJet technical marketing to make the support community aware of new or urgent information by pushing the information out to those who subscribe to a list To subscribe to the HP LaserJet hardware external list server send e mail to Listserv HPBS8305 boi hp com with the word subscribe no quotes the list name Ij hardware external and your name in the text of the message Example Subscribe lj hardware external John Doe Within each list subscribers can filter which products they want information on by typing the product name in the subject line of the subscription me
190. dges parts lists 447 cleaning from fabric 87 cleaning from waste tray 102 color carousel error 323 color level detection 145 fusing process 141 lever unlocked 349 loose 405 low 356 low and out messages 75 out 356 popping 403 product information sheet 45 residual 136 138 140 safety 45 stray 410 toner continued waste 140 waste level 143 Toner Cartridge MSDS 45 toner cartridges cover switch 175 installing black 87 installing color 88 location 104 recycling 55 refilling 55 replace frequency 105 warranty 55 toner lock sensor 227 tools required for service 204 top face down output bin delivery sensor 173 178 179 location 35 paper full sensor 173 179 paper path test 83 top assemblies 223 top cover multi bin mailbox 288 top cover assembly 211 top output bin full 357 jams 339 multi bin mailbox full 344 total color pages printed 80 duplex page count 81 page count 80 training 50 transfer belt assembly 450 487 control process 149 illustration 124 installing 106 jams 437 location 104 press clutch 177 repetitive defects 425 replace frequency 105 transfer charger 124 cleaning 101 installing 106 transfer drum cleaning 422 cleaning post charger 99 cleaning process 138 damaged 335 illustration 124 jams 340 location 104 new 352 Index 545 546 Index transfer drum continued notinstalled 348 repetitive defects 422 replace frequency 105 transfer Jams 338 transfer kit installing 106 life detectio
191. door 2 Swing the upper blue lever to the right Then press the white button on the lower green lever and swing it to the right 3 Pull the drum partway out Grasp the blue handle on the top of the drum and remove the imaging drum CAUTION A gray cover protects the new imaging drum Do not remove this cover it will come off during the next step 4 Line up the guides and push firmly to slide the new drum into the printer The cover will slide off as the drum enters the printer 5 Swing the upper blue lever to the left Then swing the lower green lever to the left making sure it clicks into place 6 Close the front door and open the upper door on the right side of the printer 7 On the inside of the door locate the density sensor and the density sensor brush Use the brush to brush toner particles from the density sensor Then replace the brush and close the upper right door EN Installing consumables 111 112 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance 12 On the back of the printer release the two latches on the filter door and lower the door Remove both filters from the door Insert the new filters in
192. e 139 Figure 140 Figure 141 Figure 142 Figure 143 Figure 144 Figure 145 Figure 146 Figure 147 Figure 148 Figure 149 Figure 150 Figure 151 Figure 152 Figure 153 Figure 154 Figure 155 Figure 156 Figure 157 Figure 158 Figure 159 10 List of figures Rear of printer with cover removed 246 Rear of printer with formatter pan removed 247 FOMMAUCh DAM samaan GA ae aed ee aTa wi 248 Formatter pan left side 249 PONG waa Dace EE RRIA MG PPO NAN KAG OS 250 Pan a an Paros toh lee hs ees maan ae adn 251 Power supply wagka eis Gall Gata dra aha 202 Controller board erres Paki ARN ha KANAN 253 Cartridge motor 0 0 0 eee eee eee 254 AE a 3S ded tcde aio a cet cdo thane eke ee 255 Carousel motor PCA 00 eee 256 Fans 1 and 2 housing assemblies 257 Carousel motor 0 0000 cece eee eee 258 OWE ab GUCI thie DAANG KA ott ays 209 Screws on the delivery drive assembly 260 Access to main gear assembly 261 High voltage converter 1 PCA 262 High voltage converter1 263 High voltage converter 2 PCA 264 High voltage converter2 265 High voltage converter2 266 Drum cartridge drive assembly 267 Separation discharge high voltage converter 268 Plate over media size sensing PCAS 269 Media size sensi
193. e counts see table 19 on page 78 Drum kit life detection The imaging drum cartridge contains a memory device The number of images printed is written to the imaging drum cartridge memory The controller board senses the imaging drum life expiration based on the data from the imaging drum cartridge memory When the image count reaches approximately 35 000 images DRUM LIFE LOW REPLACE DRUM KIT is displayed on the printer control panel This error is also written into the imaging drum cartridge memory and cannot be erased The printer is still able to print after the imaging drum life expiration warning The controller board counts the number of printed images after notification occurs When the number reaches approximately 40 000 images the controller board stops the printer and signals DRUM LIFE OUT REPLACE DRUM KIT Printing cannot continue until a new imaging drum is installed An image is one layer of toner cyan magenta yellow or black A full color page is counted as four images Waste toner level detection The waste toner detection unit in the printer senses the waste toner level by emitting light into the detection window and passing the light through the imaging drum cartridge when the stirring plate in the drum removes the waste toner around the detection window The controller board detects the toner level by timing from the moment that the detection window is cleared to the time the waste toner recovers the window
194. e drum kit should be replaced for optimum printer operation Event log message None Action 5 6 Replace the drum kit Remove the drum cartridge from the printer and clean the waste toner sensor window with a dry cloth Reconnect connector J221 on the controller board and connectors J631 to J633 and relay connector J71 on the waste toner sensor Reconnect connector J209 and relay connectors J47 and J48 on the controller board Replace the drum cartridge Replace the waste toner sensor Event log message 54 00 03 Action 1 2 3 Open the left lower cover press the green tab on the right side of the duplexer and pull the duplexer out of the printer Check for and remove any jammed media from the duplexer Reinstall the duplexer Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer Replace the duplexer EIO lt n gt INITIALIZING Description An EIO accessory is initializing lt n gt EIO slot number 1 Bottom EIO slot 2 Top EIO slot EN Event log message 40 00 01 Action No action is required Printer message troubleshooting 343 Table 40 Unnumbered printer messages continued EIO lt n gt NOT FUNCTIONAL Description Indicates an EIO card error but printing can continue The configuration page will indicate that EIO lt n gt is not supported lt n gt EIO slot number 1 Bottom EIO slot 2 Top EIO slot ENGINE TEST Description The printer is ru
195. e fuser Open the right upper door and remove the transfer drum Remove the registration roller assembly see page 239 Remove the paper pick up assembly see page 243 Remove the main motor M4 see page 255 Remove the lower air duct see figure 129 on page 259 N Oa OF FP WD N Remove the lowest gear callout 1 on the delivery drive assembly 3 screws and 1 e ring Access to main gear assembly Remove tray 2 and tray 3 from the printer Remove the tray 2 rail from the front of the printer 1 screw 2 connectors 10 Remove the inner cover 4 see reference 4 on page 459 11 Remove the lower green lever 2 screws 12 Remove the pressure lever 2 e rings and 2 bushings 13 Remove 2 screws and pull the main gear assembly callout 2 Rear assemblies 261 High voltage converter 1 assemblies The high voltage converter 1 assemblies are located on the mid upper of the rear of the printer Removing high voltage converter 1 PCA 1 Remove the top cover assembly see page 211 Remove the rear cover see page 222 Remove 5 screws from the sheet metal cover plate and lift it off Bb O N Unplug 4 connectors callout 1 i High voltage converter 1 PC Release 2 cable stays Remove 2 screws on the bottom of the PCA housing callout 2 Remove 1 screw on the PCA callout 3 Lift the PCA up and off oN OO O 262 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN EN Removing high voltage converter 1 1
196. e into the printer Note If the cartridge does not slide completely into the printer make sure that the color of toner in the cartridge matches the colored sticker on the slot 5 Place one hand on the cartridge and use the other hand to pull the orange ring and remove the seal Discard the seal 6 Push the blue locking lever back to the left and close the carousel door Note If toner gets on fabric wipe the toner off with a dry cloth and then wash the clothing in cold water Heat will set toner into fabric Note If the carousel door does not close make sure that the blue lever is locked and that the seal has been completely removed from the toner cartridge 7 Rotate the carousel to the two remaining slots by closing the carousel door and pushing the carousel rotation button and repeat steps 3 through 6 for each color 8 Close the front door CAUTION To prevent contamination or damage to the printer do not move the printer after the imaging drum or any of the toner cartridges have been installed Installing the consumables 89 Configuring input trays When input trays are configured correctly the printer prints based on media type and size and automatically uses the correct input tray Note Setting the media type is necessary for best print quality on envelopes paper greater than 24 up to 28 Ib 90 to 105 g m2 bond paper and paper greater than 28 Ib 105 g m2 bond For example tray 2 could contai
197. e printer senses a media jam in the transfer or registration area in an input tray or in the duplexer CLEAR MAILBOX JAM Description The printer senses a media jam in the multi bin mailbox 338 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Event log message None Action 4 Open the front door press the white button on the lower green lever and swing the lever to the right Open the right upper door remove the transfer drum and remove the jammed media from under the metal paper guide Reinstall the transfer drum and close the right upper door Swing the lower green lever to the left and close the front door Open each input tray remove any jammed media and close the input tray Open the left lower cover remove the duplexer remove the jammed media reinstall the duplexer and close the left lower cover Check the entire paper path for paper Event log message 13 22 01 13 22 02 Action 1 Open the jam access door and remove any media Verify that the left face up output bin full sensor PSFaceFull flag moves freely Verify that the flipper shaft is in place Replace the flipper assembly Replace the multi bin mailbox controller board PCA Event log message 13 22 03 Action 1 Check for a jam at the double belt system and delivery head assembly 2 FEnsure free movement of the double belt both belts 3 Ensure parallel position of the double belt system 4 Verify that the metallic tape is in
198. econds overhead transparency mode letter sized media landscape 7 2 seconds high gloss mode letter sized media landscape 4 2 seconds normal mode 11 by 17 inch sized media 17 0 seconds overhead transparency mode 1 1 by 17 inch sized media 12 7 seconds high gloss mode 11 by 17 inch sized media Wrong media size feed jam The controller board detects media size with the registration roller paper sensor PS1 and it stops the engine if the media size differs more than 15 mm between the specified media size and the actual media size On the other hand if the difference is within 7 5 to 15 mm or 3 7 mm or more the media is automatically delivered Door open jam The sensors listed below detect the media when a cover is opened or closed registration paper roller sensor PS1 pick up unit paper sensor PS17 separation sensor PS5 top face down output bin delivery sensor PS1 1 fusing delivery sensor PS1903 Initial residual jam The sensors listed below detect the media the specified time after the power switch is turned ON separation sensor PS5 fusing delivery sensor PS1903 382 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Image formation troubleshooting Before beginning image formation troubleshooting 1 EN Verify the media type is set correctly in the printer control panel and that the media type selected in the printer driver matches the media being printed on V
199. ed pair for 10Base T networks BNC coaxial for 10Base2 networks and DIN 8 for LocalTalk networks This print server supports only one Ethernet connection at a time RJ 45 or BNC e HP JetDirect 10 100TX print server supports RJ 45 unshielded twisted pair for 10Base T or 100Base TX networks Figure 10 Network connections The locations of ports on the HP JetDirect internal printer server are A RJ 45 port this is the only connector available with the HP JetDirect 10 100TX card B BNC port C LocalTalk DIN 8 port 62 Chapter 3 Operational overview EN Note EN Connecting to a 10Base T or 100Base TX network LI The connector of the unshielded twisted pair network cable plugs into the RJ 45 port Connecting to a 10Base2 network LI Attach one section of the ThinLAN coaxial cable to a BNC T connecior LI Attach another ThinLAN cable section or if it is at the end of the network a 50 ohm terminator on the other side of the BNC T connector LI Plug the BNC T connector into the BNC port Connecting to a LocalTalk network O Plug the end of the DIN 8 cable into the LocalTalk port The printer can be connected to a Local Talk network in addition to an Ethernet or 10Base2 network If you use only the LocalTalk port EIO 1 INITIALIZING appears every time you turn the printer on if you have an HP JetDirect internal print server installed in EIO p
200. ee page 273 2 Unplug 1 connector from the controller PCA callout 1 Figure 154 Paper size switch assembly 3 Remove 1 screw callout 2 and the metal retaining spring callout 3 that hold the assembly in place 4 Remove the assembly Notes on reinstalling Seat the retaining spring callout 3 onto the locating pins that are on the chassis 284 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Figure 155 EN Tension springs 1 Remove the left cover see page 274 Open tray 4 to the stops Inside the tray remove 1 spring on the left runner and 1 spring on the right runner callout 1 Tension springs 2 000 sheet input tray 285 Multi bin mailbox The following covers and assemblies can be removed from the multi bin mailbox front back and top covers controller PCA power supply e anti curl strings paper bins and blind cover 5 delivery head assembly e flipper assembly interlock switch e delivery head position motor diagnostic LED PCA e transport belt motor user status LED PCA input paper guide attachment assembly e metallic tape and housing assembly Hint Place the multi bin mailbox on a table for ease in servicing the unit 286 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Front and back covers 1 Remove the multi bin mailbox from the printer 2 For each cover use a small flat blade screwdriver to release the 3 retaining tabs that secure the cover to the frame callout 1 T
201. eee oes ee 110 FUSER Wns aa maana dm de Bahay doa at an ed BC AG KANG 113 Chapter contents 97 98 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance EN Cleaning procedures Cleaning the post charger unit Clean the post charger unit on the transfer drum if there are light streaks in halftone areas Open the front door N On the lower green lever push the white button and swing the lever to the right Open the right upper door Pull the transfer drum out until it stops Locate the post charger unit cleaner by the transfer drum handle Figure 17 Cleaning the post charger unit Slide the post charger unit cleaner across the bar several times Push the cleaner back into place and reinstall the transfer drum Close the right upper door swing the lower green lever to the left and close the front door of the printer EN Cleaning procedures 99 Figure 18 Note Cleaning the density sensor Clean the density sensor after replacing the imaging drum when printer colors are inaccurate and when the message 54 3 DENSITY SENSOR ERROR CYCLE POWER appears on the printer control panel display 1 Open the right upper door 2 Use the brush located next to the sensor to remove all toner particles from the sensor Cleaning the density sensor You can also use a hand wipe to clean the density sensor To prevent scratches on
202. eft face up output bin delivery roller 124 full 349 437 full sensor 190 illustration 124 location 35 paper path test 83 solenoid 177 179 left assemblies 229 left cover feeder assembly 450 sensor 173 left cover 2 000 sheet input unit 274 left lower cover 36 216 left rear cover 213 left upper cover 36 215 legal sized media paper size detection switches 176 paper size detection switches 2 000 sheet input unit 183 See also media length configuring form 76 letterhead See media letter sized media overriding with A4 74 paper size detection switches 176 paper size detection switches 2 000 sheet input unit 183 See also media lever unlocked toner 349 life drum kitlow 343 drum kit out 343 fuser and paper roller low 344 fuser and paper rollers out 344 transfer kit low 357 transfer kit out 357 life detection fuser kit 144 imaging drum 142 transfer kit 144 lifting plate position sensor 171 173 solenoid 171 177 lifting plate 2 000 sheet input unit 184 185 lights See LEDs Index 535 536 Index line feed command 77 lines horizontal all colors 402 horizontal one color 401 horizontal yellow or black 408 list server 50 lists font 71 parts 443 LocalTalk accessories 446 networks 62 parts list 447 port 62 lock detection for laser scanner motor 158 logs error 426 event 71 81 353 364 fault 82 loose toner 405 low toner 356 lower fuser heater 159 fusing roller 124 141 VTU rollers 185 M
203. eing configured All other keys are ignored If you press Go without selecting a language the printer brings itself online and all subsequent messages are displayed in English However since no display language was selected the LANGUAGE ENGLISH message reappears after the power on self test when the printer is turned on again This message displays every time the printer is turned on until you select a language through the configure language mode 2 Press VALUE until the language you want appears on the display 3 Press SELECT to save the selection An asterisk appears to the right of the selection The language selected is the default language until another selection is made by restarting the printer in the configure language mode Press Go Turn the printer off and back on 84 Chapter 3 Operational overview EN Installing the consumables When installing a new printer install the consumables in the printer in this order N wih Figure 14 Consumable installation order 1 Imaging drum 2 Black toner cartridge 3 Color toner cartridges EN Installing the consumables 85 86 Chapter 3 Operational overview To install the imaging drum 1 Open the front door of the printer A Swing the upper blue lever to the right B Press the white button on the lower green
204. emory accessories 19 expanding 19 external error NVRAM 438 full 355 installing DIMMs 93 insufficient 316 internal error 329 model differences 19 out and job cleared 351 parts list 446 PCL full 351 shortage 350 Menu key 66 menu maps description 68 printing 71 EN menus Color Adjust 79 Configuration 75 control panel 68 I O 78 Information 71 Paper Handling 72 Printing 76 Proof and Print 72 Resets 78 Service Mode 80 messages cold reset 341 control panel 316 language used 84 low and out 75 multi bin mailbox 436 numbered 316 unnumbered 334 metallic tape and housing assembly multi bin mailbox 297 minimum media sizes 28 misfed paper 341 model numbers 34 models of printer different features 19 modes CASSETTE 90 FIRST 90 OHT 167 Power Save 75 153 351 service 80 tray1 72 90 modes multi bin mailbox bidirectional 187 job separator 186 self test 436 unidirectional 187 virtual stacker 186 Monarch sized media See media motors carousel 159 160 257 cartridge 159 162 254 developer 83 drum 83 159 161 error 329 fan 159 165 laser scanner lock detection 158 main 159 163 names and locations 159 not turning 321 pick up 159 164 motors 2 000 sheet input unit main 182 names and locations 181 test 431 motors multi bin mailbox delivery head 190 192 delivery head position 293 delivery head roller 190 ejector 190 flipper roller with encoder 190 names and locations 189 transport belt 190 1
205. enna via high voltage PCA 1 The controller board checks the signal at the moment that the black developing AC bias is applied to the black developing cylinder If the toner level is less than specified the controller board signals the formatter that the black toner cartridge has no toner The black toner cartridge is detected by the black toner cartridge switch SW644 in the printer Environment change control The controller board judges the temperature humidity environment based on temperature humidity sensor signals from the temperature humidity sensors on the temperature humidity sensor PCA and executes the following controls to obtain the appropriate image e Controls the value of the secondary transfer bias the transfer drum cleaning bias and the transfer charger bias e Performs a color calibration if the environmental change is great enough The controller board checks for an environment change before starting image density control after the power is turned on or every 30 minutes after the image density control is completed Consumable detection mechanisms 147 Figure 43 Note Color calibration density sensor The density sensor inside the right upper door senses the density detection pattern for each color formed on the transfer drum during a calibration cycle The sensor emits light from the LED and the density detection pattern on the transfer drum reflects the light The sensor then receives the light with the ph
206. ensor unit in place secured by 1 screw see figure 153 callout 2 and figure 154 callout 2 c Pull out the sensor unit Use the switch that is located on the unit s power supply to switch to diagnostic mode Manually activate the sensor e When you activate the sensor the bottom service LED on the controller PCA comes on When you release the sensor the LED goes off e Ifthe LED does not come on there is a problem with the sensor Replace the corresponding field replaceable unit To stop the test turn the power supply switch back to operational mode and set the DIP switches on the controller PCA to the off position 2 000 sheet input unit troubleshooting 433 Multi bin mailbox troubleshooting The multi bin mailbox standalone diagnostic tool is a troubleshooting aid that verifies how the multi bin mailbox functions alone The tests are designed to be used without C link commands from the EPH controller on the printer Switching the multi bin mailbox to test mode 1 Turn the printer off and remove the multi bin mailbox from the printer 2 Move the multi bin mailbox power supply switch to test mode callout 1 Note Reset the power supply switch to normal mode when you finish running diagnostic tests otherwise the multi bin mailbox will not work Figure 208 Multi bin mailbox power supply test mode switch 434 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Note EN Power up sequence test 1 Push in and hold the mult
207. er 221 Rear COVE px GN Nan ha Poe Cade eh eee 222 Bottom of the control panel 223 CAMISOLE aman Mana NAA e E AT BELAT 224 Upper airflow vent 0 225 Face down exit sensor rail 225 Face down output assembly 226 Toner lock sensor and color cartridge sensor 227 Subrelay PCA mada BA ANA gage had oa ete et 228 Formatter board 0 0 0 cece eee 230 Connector on formatter board 232 Back side of formatter board 232 Feeder assembly 00 00 eee eee 233 Face up solenoid 000 cece a 234 Face up Solenoid 00 eee eee 235 Screws on the face up exit assembly 236 TAN aaah kA NAA hha 237 PICK UDTONGCE 22 cane ows mina oc eRe aM KAKA OS 238 Registration roller assembly front 239 Registration roller assembly back 240 Connectors on registration roller assembly 241 Density sensor 2 es 242 Paper pick up assembly 243 Paper pick up assembly 244 Paper pick up assembly 245 List of figures 9 Figure 116 Figure 117 Figure 118 Figure 119 Figure 120 Figure 121 Figure 122 Figure 123 Figure 124 Figure 125 Figure 126 Figure 127 Figure 128 Figure 129 Figure 130 Figure 131 Figure 132 Figure 133 Figure 134 Figure 135 Figure 136 Figure 137 Figure 138 Figur
208. er hard disk and two have been detected Printing will not be possible until one of the hard disks has been removed Event log message None Action Turn the printer off and remove the extra printer hard disk Note The DN model comes with a factory installed internal hard disk on the formatter board 356 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Table 40 Unnumbered printer messages continued TOP OUTPUT BIN FULL Description The top face down output bin of the printer is full Event log message None Action 1 Remove all media from the top face down output bin on the printer to continue printing 2 Verify that PS30 PS10 PS11 and PS3 sensors and the surrounding area are clean TRANSFER KIT LOW REPLACE KIT Description The transfer drum transfer belt cleaning roller and charcoal filter are almost past their specified life The transfer kit has approximately 750 color or 1 000 black and white images left until the printer will signal the end of the kit life TRANSFER KIT OUT REPLACE KIT Description The transfer drum transfer belt cleaning roller and charcoal filter are past their specified life If TONER LOW is set to continue printing can continue with degraded print quality otherwise printing will be halted Event log message None Action Although printing can continue the transfer kit should be replaced for optimum printer operation Replace the transfer kit and reset the
209. er assembly transfer drum 219 6 RG5 3047 000CN Transfer belt assembly 238 RG5 3053 000CN Carousel stop assembly 218 6 RG5 3054 000CN Tray 1 pick up assembly 234 RG5 3057 000CN Density sensor assembly 216 35 RG5 3059 000CN Feeder assembly 233 RG5 3060 000CN Fuser assembly 120V 239 EN Numerical parts list 509 Table 81 Numerical parts list continued Part number Description Figure Ref RG5 3061 000CN Fuser assembly 220V 239 RG5 3065 000CN Drum cartridge drive assembly 224 RG5 3066 000CN Main drive assembly 221 18 RG5 3067 000CN Delivery drive assembly 225 RG5 3079 000CN PCA photosensor 231 8 RG5 3080 000CN PCA photosensor 218 2 RG5 3084 000CN PCA carousel motor M1 241 4 RG5 3085 000CN PCA subrelay 241 5 RG5 3087 000CN Lever assembly black cartridge 219 10 RG5 3089 000CN Cassette crossmember assembly 223 30 RG5 3096 000CN Cover assembly right lower 216 16 RG5 3097 000CN Cable main 218 16 RG5 3104 000CN Cable delivery 221 20 RG5 3108 000CN Delivery cover assembly 237 RG5 3111 000CN Transfer drum cleaner holder assembly 223 21 RG5 3131 000CN Sensor slider assembly 223 37 RG5 3132 000CN Paper pick up assembly 228 RG5 3134 000CN Tray 1 assembly 235 RG5 3144 000CN Cable sensor 218 18 RG5 3147 000CN Cable delivery connector 221 12 RG5 3843 000CN Paper pick up assembly 242 82 RG5 3845 000CN
210. er assembly RG5 3131 000CN 223 37 Separation discharge high voltage converter RH3 0234 000CN 220 39 Separation discharge high voltage converter RG5 3966 000CN 220 30 PCA Shield case assembly RG5 3023 000CN 222 T Spring compression RB1 6486 000CN 216 16E RB1 9675 000CN 220 4 RS5 2719 000CN 215 51B Spring leaf RB1 6909 000CN 220 6 Spring left upper door lever RB1 6486 000CN 214 4C Spring right lower door lever RB1 6486 000CN 216 22 Spring tension RS5 2465 000CN 220 28 RS5 2561 000CN 243 101 Spring torsion RB1 6409 000CN 231 2 RB1 6558 020CN 228 49 RB1 9798 000CN 216 26 RS5 2697 000CN 223 20 RS5 2698 000CN 223 16 Static charge eliminator assembly RG5 3973 000CN 223 14 Stop flip up media RA0 0073 000CN 215 2D 522 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams EN Table 82 Alphabetical parts list continued Description Part number Figure Ref Stopper open close RB1 6484 000CN 215 216 6A 16C Strap front door support RB1 4497 000CN 214 3D Support cover RA0 0079 000CN 215 51A Switch black toner cartridge SW644 WC4 5136 000CN 219 22 Switch toner cartridge cover SW672 WC4 5150 000CN 218 30 Token Ring J3112A Transfer belt assembly RG5 3047 000CN 238 Transfer drum RG5 3039 000CN 222 17 Transfer drum cleaner holder assembly RG5 3111 000CN 223 21 Transfer drum contact assembly RG5 3044 000CN 220 2 Transfer kit C4154A Transfer drum Transfer belt Clean
211. er fusing roller Left face up output bin solenoid PS10 Top face down output bin drive signal paper full sensor Top face down output bin delivery PS11 Top face down output bin detection signal Top face down output bin paper full detection signal Fusing delivery detection signal Main motor M4 drive signal delivery sensor PS1903 Fusing delivery sensor SL2 Left face up output bin solenoid M4 Main motor Paper path 179 Media jam detection The controller board checks if paper is at the appropriate sensor at the proper time If the controller board detects a media jam the printer stops printing and signals a jam condition to the formatter board EPH controller board The external paper handling EPH controller board controls the communication from the printer to the input and output devices The EPH controller board PCA is integrated onto the printer formatter PCA 2 000 sheet input unit The 2 000 sheet input unit is a multi speed high capacity device that feeds paper to the printer The 2 000 sheet input unit also automatically senses the paper size Power supply The 2 000 sheet input unit has an internal power supply that is activated when the printer power switch is turned on The EPH controller board on the printer sends a power on signal to the power supply on the 2 000 sheet input unit When the signal is high the power supply provides both 24V and 5V to the paper deck drive
212. er is from using different toner formulations found in refilled cartridges e The print quality of HP LaserJet toner cartridges influences the customer s perception of the printer HP has no control over the actual print quality of a refilled toner cartridge Recycling toner cartridges In order to reduce waste HP offers a recycling program for used toner cartridges Cartridge components that do not wear out are recycled Plastics and other materials are recycled HP pays the shipping costs from the user to the recycling facility Warranty 55 56 Chapter 2 Service approach EN EN Operational overview Chapter contents Verifying package contentS 2 000 e eee 59 Verifying the cables are installed 60 Printer with stand 0 a 60 Printer with a 2 000 sheet input unit 61 Connecting the printer to the network 62 Connecting to a 10Base T or 100Base TX network 63 Connecting to a 10Base2 network 63 Connecting to a LocalTalk network 63 Connecting a parallel cable 64 Changing the printer control panel overlay 65 Printer control panel layout A A 66 Menu MAPS se cance nee hee ewe ae beak Wk OS we 68 Information Menu a 71 Proof and Print Menu 0 2 0000 ee 72 Paper Handling Menu 000 00 eee eee 72 Configuration Menu eee ees 75
213. erify that the media meets the specifications listed in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide The following media related items are responsible for many image formation and print quality defects e rough paper heavy paper heavier than 58 Ib 216 g m bond e transparencies out of the specified thickness range thicker than 0 5 mil e paper that has absorbed moisture from the atmosphere e room environment humidity too high or low Print a configuration page The configuration page tests the ability to print each primary and process color For information on printing a configuration page see page 361 In addition to items listed above the configuration page does the following e shows that all colors print e checks that the room humidity is within specifications e shows varying levels of color e shows that the formatter board is working properly Print a demonstration page to check the following e image quality e half tones e process colors Image formation troubleshooting 383 Understanding color variations The printed output might not match the computer screen and the colors printed on successive pages might not match While color variations are inherent in this printing method they also might indicate changes in the printing environment print media or printer components Common causes of color variation The following list outlines the major causes of color variations between computers ap
214. errors are listed with the most recent error first Reoccurring events give indications of failing parts or problem areas within the printer See the printer control panel message descriptions beginning on page 316 for more information on items found in the event log Printing the event log 1 Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears on the control panel display Press ITEM until PRINT EVENT LOG appears on the display Press SELECT to print the page 364 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN WARNING CAUTION EN Service mode engine diagnostics Engine diagnostics can be used to perform mechanical tests on the print engine and its related components to help pinpoint components in the printer that need replacement or repair Take care when you use engine diagnostics some tests require door interlocks to be defeated and defeating interlocks can expose potential hazards in the engine High voltage supplies and the laser are shut down whenever the printer is in diagnostic mode However any defeating of interlocks without entering the engine diagnostic mode results in potential exposure to the laser and high voltages Entering the Service Mode Menu 1 From a READY state press MENU until SERVICE MENU appears 2 Press ITEM the left side of the key and VALUE simultaneously For a menu map of the Service Mode Menu see page 80 Paper path test The paper path test simulates a page moving through the paper path from
215. erter assemblies are located in the bottom right corner of the rear of the printer Removing separation discharge high voltage converter PCA 1 Remove the rear cover see page 222 2 Remove the formatter board and formatter pan page 230 and page 248 3 Unplug 3 connectors from the PCA callout 1 Figure 138 Separation discharge high voltage converter 4 Release 1 cable stay 5 Remove 2 screws callout 2 6 Lift the PCA up and off 268 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Removing separation discharge high voltage converter 1 Remove the high voltage converter 3 PCA see page 268 2 Unplug 1 connector 3 Pull the converter toward you and lift out Tray 2 and tray 3 media size sensing PCAs 1 Remove the rear cover see page 222 2 Remove the formatter board and formatter pan see page 230 A and page 248 3 Remove the power supply see page 252 ESD V power supply see pag Release 1 cable stay Remove 1 screw callout 1 from the plate and remove the plate Tig aT oy Ki Figure 139 Plate over media size sensing PCAs EN Rear assemblies 269 6 Open the corresponding tray 7 Remove 3 screws callout 2 and unplug 1 connector on each PCA to remove Figure 140 Media size sensing PCAs Note The two PCAs and wire sensing finger assemblies are interchangeable 270 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN 2 000 sheet input unit EN You do not need to detach the 2 000 sheet input unit
216. es and carries the CE marking accordingly the EMC directive 89 336 EEC the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC 1 The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett Packard Personal Computer Systems This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This printer contains Local Area Network LAN options When the interface cable is attached to either of the IEEE 802 3 connectors the printer meets the requirements of EN55022 Class A February 12 1997 For Compliance Information ONLY contact Australia Contact Product Regulations Manager Hewlett Packard Australia Ltd 31 41 Joseph Street Blackburn Victoria 3130 Australia Europe Contact A Local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett Packard GmbH Department HQ TRE Standards Europe Herrenberger Strasse 130 D 71034 B blingen Fax 49 7031 14 3148 USA Contact Product Regulations Manager Hewlett Packard Company P O Box 15 Mail Stop 160 Boise ID 83707 0015 Phone 208 396 6000 40 Chapter 1 Product information EN DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 Manufacturer s Name Hewlett Packard Company Manufacturer s Address Montemorelos 299 Guadalajara Jalisco 45060 Mexico declares
217. es are connected to the printer correctly Printer with stand AD Figure 8 Power cord connection WARNING An unstable printer can tip over and cause injury verify that the printer is secured properly and the printer wheels are locked LI The power cord plugs into the connector on the back left corner of the printer and into a surge protector or other grounded power source 60 Chapter 3 Operational overview EN Printer with a 2 000 sheet input unit Power k ower pac abia Power cords Figure 9 C link and power cables connections O The interface cable attaches to the printer above the parallel connector and to the connector on the 2 000 sheet input unit LI The power pack attaches to the back of the printer LI The shorter of the two cables from the power pack plugs into the connector on the back left corner of the printer LI The longer of the two cables from the power pack plugs into the connector on the back left corner of the 2 000 sheet input unit LI The power cord plugs into the bottom of the power pack and into a surge protector or other grounded power source EN Verifying the cables are installed 61 Connecting the printer to the network If the printer was shipped with an optional HP JetDirect internal print server one of two types is installed e HP JetDirect Ethernet print server supports up to three different network interface cables RJ 45 unshielded twist
218. eshooting General paper path checklist Verify the green lever on the fuser is down Check that the post charger cleaner is pushed all the way to the right Media jams could occur when it is out of place Clean the printer Toner and paper dust in the paper path inhibit free movement of media through the printer and block the sensors Vary the input and output selections of the printer to determine if the problem is associated with a particular area of the printer Worn separation rollers on the input tray cause last page multi feeds Check the condition of the pick up rollers and separation rollers when troubleshooting multi feeds Bent separation tabs cause misfeeds and multi feeds Replace the tray if necessary Defective input tray switches can cause media jams by indicating the wrong size media to the formatter board Scraps of paper left in the paper path can cause intermittent media jams Always check that the paper path is clear when cleaning the printer and when clearing media jams Also remove the fuser and carefully check it for jammed media Reduce curl of black only transparencies by e placing the transparencies in a presentation sleeve e printing to the left face up output bin Verify the media requirements starting on page 26 are met Wrinkled pages Verify the green fuser lever is down Verify the media size and type are set correctly in the printer driver and the printer control panel Verify the med
219. et in the printer driver and printer control panel is correct e Ensure the transfer belt is installed correctly and is seated in its notches Image defects troubleshooting 409 Stray toner See figure 201 on page 397 for an example Check for toner build up inside the printer especially on horizontal surfaces Use a hand wipe to remove any toner Check the paper weight and smoothness Rough paper can stick together causing multi feeds Heavy media or the extra thickness of multiple sheets of paper can cause poor fusing which deposits toner on the fuser rollers This toner comes off on later pages as Stray toner If a media jam occurred recently open and close the front door to complete a printer self cleaning If the stray toner is on the back of a simplex page the reverse charge to clean the transfer belt is not being applied or there is not enough bias to transfer the toner back to the transfer drum Clean the printer by opening and closing the front door Verify the cleaning roller rotates freely and is clean Replace if necessary Check the event log for fusing errors If the fuser does not heat properly the unfused toner accumulates around the fuser and is deposited on the page as stray toner Clean the waste toner tray see page 102 If contamination is made up of all four toner colors verify that the imaging drum is not contaminated and that the waste toner cartridge is not too full a full waste toner cartr
220. etitive defects troubleshooting 419 First occurrence of print defect Color developer roller 38 mm Charging roller 44 mm Black developer roller 52 mm Cleaning roller 56 mm Developer DSD wheels 65 mm Transfer roller 66 mm Transfer drum once per 11 by 17 inch or A3 sized page or every other letter or A4 sized page Fuser 150 5 mm Imaging drum 195 mm Transfer belt 222 mm Figure 204 Repetitive defect ruler 420 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Color developer roller Symptoms Print defect occurring every 38 mm Cause Dirty or damaged developer roller Actions Replace the toner cartridge Charging roller Symptoms Print defect occurring every 44 mm Cause Dirty or damaged charging roller Actions Replace the toner cartridge Black developer roller Symptoms Print defect occurring every 38 mm Cause Dirty or damaged developer roller Actions Replace the toner cartridge Cleaning roller Symptoms Print defects occurring every 56 mm Cause Dirty or damaged cleaning roller Actions Clean the cleaning roller with a hand wipe If cleaning does not resolve the defect replace the cleaning roller Developer DSD wheels Symptoms Print defect occurring every 65 mm Cause Dirty or damaged developer DSD wheels These wheels are located on the outer ends of the color toner cartridge and appear as a black bushing Actions Replace the toner cartridge of the color producing the repetitive defect
221. ever holding right RB1 9704 000CN 1 9 Lever holding left RB1 9705 000CN 1 25 Lever release RB1 9748 000CN 1 490 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams EN PCA assembly location diagram Ng 1 Figure 241 PCA assembly location diagram Table 75 PCA assembly parts Ref Description Part number Qty 1 PCA cassette size sensing RG5 1845 000CN 1 2 PCA main relay RG5 3036 000CN 1 3 PCA controller board RG5 3037 000CN 1 4 PCA carousel motor M1 RG5 3084 000CN 1 5 PCA subrelay RG5 3085 000CN 1 6 PCA tray 1 RG5 1884 000CN 1 EN Illustrations and parts lists 491 2 000 sheet input unit covers and doors 2 000 sheet input unit covers and doors Figure 242 EN 492 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 76 2 000 sheet input unit cover and door parts Ref Description Part number Qty 71 Cover back RB2 2519 000CN 1 72 Cassette size labels RS5 8611 000CN 1 73 Cassette size plate RB1 6894 000CN 1 74 Casters XZ9 0442 000CN 4 75 Feed and separation rollers RF5 1834 000CN 2 76 Cover front with LED window RF5 2568 000CN 1 77 Cover left RF5 2646 000CN 1 78 Locating pin metal positioning RF5 2556 000CN 3 79 Tray 4 RG5 3845 000CN 1 80 Paper deck drive assembly RG5 3851 000CN 1 81 Paper deck drive bushing RS5 1399 000CN 1 82 Paper pick up assembly RG5 3843 000CN 1 83 Roller pick up RF5 1835 000CN 1 84 Plate paper limit
222. f the media selected for the print job 334 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting See page 91 for information on configuring media type and size for each input tray Event log message None Action Adjust the media width guides to the edge of the page Ensure the media size selected for the print job is the same as the size of media loaded in tray 1 EN Table 40 Unnumbered printer messages continued CLEAN DENSITY SENSOR CYCLE POWER Description The density sensor values are out of range or inconsistent The density sensor might be dirty or the transfer drum might be damaged A defective toner cartridge could cause this error as well CLEAR DUPLEX JAM LOWER LEFT DOOR Description The printer senses a media jam in the duplexer EN Event log message 54 00 0 lt x gt lt x gt Description 5 Sensor abnormality 6 Out of range cyan 7 Out of range magenta 8 Out of range yellow 9 Out of range black Action 1 Verify the right upper door is closed all of the way Clean the density sensor Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer Clean the transfer drum For information on cleaning the printer see page 422 5 Ifthe problem persists in one color replace the faulty toner cartridge 6 Replace the density sensor Event log message 13 00 0 lt x gt lt x gt Description 7 Two sided turn around paper late jam 8 Two sided turn around paper stopped jam 9 Two sided path paper
223. f the printer and pull the wires through the printer frame than to unplug the connectors from the right upper door Figure 115 Paper pick up assembly 5 Remove 4 screws callout 4 6 Release 2 clips and lift the assembly off EN Right assemblies 245 Rear of printer with cover removed 1 High voltage converter 1 PCA 7 2 High voltage converter2 PCA 8 the main relay PCA is located behind this assembly 7 3 Cartridge motor M3 4 High voltage converter 1 UI 5 Controller board le 6 Sheet metal cover plate 246 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement Fan 2 Carousel motor M1 Fan 1 High voltage converter 2 Formatter pan Power supply EN EN p Rear of printer with formatter pan removed 1 Delivery drive assembly 4 Separation discharge high 2 Lower air duct voltage converter PCA 3 Main motor M4 5 Separation discharge high voltage converter The main relay PCA is behind the high voltage converter 2 PCA The main gear assembly is behind the high voltage converter 1 PCA The tray 2 and tray 3 media size sensing PCAs are located behind the power supply Rear assemblies 247 Formatter pan 1 Remove the rear cover see page 222 2 Remove the formatter board from the formatter pan see A page 230 ESD 3 On the back of the printer remove 2 screws on the top and 3 on the bottom of the pan callout 1 z bo Ni pe E j Pa r 5 a _ E LI a ma
224. fer belt The residual toner moves back to the transfer drum and is then collected in the waste toner case in the imaging drum Transfer drum Transfer belt Figure 34 Secondary transfer 136 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN 8 Separation The paper is separated from the transfer drum because of the paper s elasticity When duplex printing or overhead transparency OHT printing is performed an AC bias is applied to the transfer charger In high temperature high humidity conditions the AC bias is not applied since excessive charge does not build up in high humidity conditions The AC bias is applied to the transfer charger to prevent discharge between the paper and the transfer belt which can disrupt the image Transfer drum Transfer charger A AC bias Transfer belt Figure 35 Separation EN Image formation 137 Transfer drum cleaning block This block follows two steps to clean the transfer drum Even though most of the toner is transferred to the paper during secondary transfer some toner particles remain on the transfer drum surface This residual toner on the transfer drum is returned to the imaging drum where it will be moved to the waste toner case 9 Cleaning roller charging Bias is applied to the cleaning roller so that the residual toner on the transfer drum surface is charged positive The cleaning roller is usually separated from the transfer drum However the cleanin
225. figuring 73 jams 340 removing 277 See also 2 000 sheet input unit trays tray pick up solenoid 169 trays capacities 28 configuring 72 73 90 defective switches 378 empty 359 jams 338 media specifications 28 waste toner 102 See also tray 1 tray 2 tray 3 tray 4 troubleshooting 2 000 sheet input unit 426 431 checklist 315 cold reset 376 configuration page 361 event log 364 image defects 386 image formation 383 media jams 379 message 316 multi bin mailbox 434 network 439 paper path 378 EN EN troubleshooting continued registration plate 399 repetitive defects 419 transparencies 412 See also diagnostics errors TrueType fonts 20 typeface support 52 types configuring media 90 91 U unexpected paper size jams 340 paper size type 318 unidirectional mode multi bin mailbox 187 unknown media 357 unlatched multi bin mailbox 437 unlocked toner lever 349 unrecoverable error 333 upper fuser heater 159 fusing roller 124 141 VTU rollers 185 user guide parts list 448 user interface features 20 user replaceable parts 205 V Value key 66 VCCI statement Japan 43 ventilation requirements 24 vertical transfer unit VTU See VTU vertical transfer unit virtual stacker mode multi bin mailbox 186 VTU vertical transfer unit closed sensor 182 clutch 182 door open 345 illustration 185 process 183 removing 275 rollers 185 VX ASIC test 82 W warnings configuring 75 contr
226. g roller can be brought into contact with the transfer drum by the cleaning roller press cam which is activated by the cleaning roller press solenoid SL1 When contact is made positive bias is applied to the cleaning roller to charge the toner on the transfer drum surface positive After the charging is complete the bias is turned off and the cleaning roller press cam separates the cleaning roller from the transfer drum After printing is complete negative bias is applied to the cleaning roller to remove the residual toner Residual Toner positively charged Cleaning roller Cleaning roller press cam Transfer drum AC bias DC bias O Residual toner negatively charged Figure 36 Cleaning roller charging 138 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN 10 Transfer drum cleaning The bias on the imaging drum is negative and the bias on the transfer drum is positive Since the charge on the residual toner is made positive by the transfer drum cleaning roller the toner moves from the transfer drum to the imaging drum where it will be removed during imaging drum cleaning Primary charging roller Waste toner case Imaging drum Imaging drum cartridge Primary charging bias Charted residual toner Cleaning roller Ni Cleaning roller press cam Co Transfer drum DC bias Figure 37 Transfer drum cleaning EN Image formation 139 Imaging drum cleaning block In the primary transfer not all of the toner
227. g 425 2 000 sheet input unit troubleshooting This section provides a systematic approach to identifying the causes of malfunctions and errors in the 2 000 sheet input unit Ways to troubleshoot the unit In general there are three possible sources of malfunction e the 2 000 sheet input unit itself printer electronics e C link cable that connects the unit and the printer Begin troubleshooting 1 Print or display the error log Evaluate the error log for any specific error trends in the last 10 000 printed pages 2 Printa configuration page to verify the proper installation of the paper handling accessories If any of the installed accessories are not shown on the configuration page check the corresponding cable connections Verify that the C link cable is correctly connected and functional Verify that DC power is available to the paper handling accessories 3 If necessary use one of the following diagnostic tools to isolate the problem Status LED on the front of the unit Indicates the status of the unit see page 427 Service LED inside the back cover The pattern of flashing long and short isolates the problem see page 428 Standalone running test You can use this to test whether the unit itself is functioning properly see page 430 Motor test Lets you check the motor to see if it is working properly see page 431 Sensor tests Lets you check the sensors to see if they are w
228. ge converter assemblies 268 PCA 268 removing 269 separation pad 124 separation rollers 2 000 sheet input unit 182 185 printer 124 separation sensor 173 serial number formatter board 80 printer 34 80 server list 50 service agreements 53 service LEDs 2 000 sheet input unit 428 Service Materials Organization SMO ordering information 49 Service Mode Menu 80 service notes HP FIRST 52 ordering 50 service tool requirements 204 setting color registration values 81 color values 79 settings factory 355 NVRAM 80 shutter loose 323 simplified page 350 site requirements 24 sizes cold reset paper 81 configuring default paper 76 configuring media 91 configuring PCL font point 76 configuring tray 1 73 media in duplexer 31 media in input trays 28 overriding media 74 printer 22 skewed images 399 sliders problem 437 SLx See solenoids SME Support Materials Europe ordering from 49 smeared print 404 SMO Service Materials Organization ordering from 49 smooth color value 79 software matrix 52 ordering 50 support from HP FIRST 52 solenoids assembly 451 carousel stop 151 carousel stopper 177 cleaning roller 150 cleaning roller press 177 face up 234 left face up output bin 177 179 lifting plate 171 177 names and locations 177 tray 1 and tray 2 pick up 177 tray pick up 169 space requirements 25 Index 543 544 Index specifications acoustic emissions 22 altitude 21 atmospheric pressure 23 consumable st
229. h the currently printed text or graphic It also can look like a repetitive defect and is generally caused by a toner cartridge transfer drum imaging drum or transfer belt problems Open the right upper door and front door and defeat the right upper cover detection interlock see figure 182 on page 370 Place a piece of paper over the density sensor remove and reinstall the imaging drum and close the front door As the engine begins calibrating verify the red preconditioning exposure LED is lit e Print a configuration page see page 361 and verify the consumable kits are not past their specified life e Print the following files from the service and support CD to help troubleshoot print quality problems e Print optdto31 ps on 11 by 17 inch sized paper or optda331 ps on A3 sized paper from tray 3 to troubleshoot the imaging drum e Print glictb31 ps on 11 by 17 inch sized paper or glica331 ps on A3 sized paper from tray 3 to troubleshoot the toner cartridges Type the following command at the DOS prompt to print the files copy file name gt lpti f ghosting is occurring at a frequency of 150 mm this defect could be a hot fuser offset If the media does not meet the specifications for this printer such as transparencies that are too thin the fuser can lift the toner off of the page The toner will stick to the fuser roller and be transferred to the next page thus giving the appearance of a ghosted image Ver
230. he assembly straight out of the chassis 278 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Controller PCA The controller PCA is located on the back of the unit 1 Remove the back and left covers see page 273 and page 274 2 Unplug 11 connectors callout 1 Figure 148 Controller PCA 3 Remove 4 hex screws from the two C link cable connectors callout 2 Remove 2 screws from the right side of the PCA callout 3 Release the 2 plastic retaining posts from the left side of the PCA callout 4 6 Pull the PCA out from the chassis EN 2 000 sheet input unit 279 Notes on reinstalling e Ensure that the DIP switches on the PCA are in the Normal Setting off callout 5 For information on DIP switch settings see page 430 Front LED PCA assembly 1 Open tray 4 halfway to the stops 2 On the upper left corner of the front of the chassis remove 1 screw callout 1 Figure 149 Screw on front LED PCA assembly 3 Reach behind the LED PCA assembly and pull it away from the chassis 4 Release 3 plastic retaining tabs that secure the LED PCA to the connector callout 2 280 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Figure 150 Front LED PCA 5 Unplug the LED PCA from the connector Power supply 1 Unplug the power cord and the C link interface cables from the 2 000 sheet input unit Remove the back and left covers see page 273 and page 274 Unplug 1 connector callout 1 Figure 151 Power supply
231. he black toner cartridge and the imaging drum are all the way in the printer and that the orange seal was removed from the toner cartridge Installing the consumables 87 88 Chapter 3 Operational overview To install the color toner cartridges 1 With the printer on press the blue button beneath the carousel door to turn the carousel to a toner cartridge slot Note The carousel will not rotate unless all of the following conditions are met each of these actions engages an interlock switch which allows the carousel motor to receive power e the carousel door is closed e the imaging drum is installed completely e the black toner cartridge is installed completely e the orange seal is removed from the black toner cartridge the upper left lever is to the left the right upper door is closed 2 Open the carousel door and push the blue locking lever to the right 3 Remove the toner cartridge from the package that matches the color of the sticker in the carousel slot from its packaging and gently rock the cartridge several times to distribute the toner CAUTION Do not lift or remove the shutter A on the cartridge EN EN 4 Align the arrows on the top of the cartridge and at the top of the slot Slide the cartridg
232. he carousel door and waste toner tray Look for an obstruction such as a toner cartridge shutter catching on the waste toner tray Verify the toner lock lever is fully locked If the message does not clear after closing the doors turn the printer off and on to reset the printer Clean the carousel position sensor PS3 with compressed air If the problem persists replace the sensor Reconnect connector J701 on carousel motor PCA connectors J641 J642 J644 and J648 on the main relay PCA connector J672 on the subrelay PCA and connector J102 on the power supply Check operation of the carousel stopper arm Replace the carousel stopper solenoid Check electrical continuity between connector J641 1 24 VB and J642 3 PMP on the main relay PCA when the door switch SW641 is turned on If there is no electrical continuity replace the main relay PCA Check electrical continuity between connector J644 1 PBK and J644 2 PMP on the main relay PCA when the door switch SW644 is turned on If there is no electrical continuity replace the black toner cartridge on off switch Printer message troubleshooting 323 Table 39 Numbered printer messages continued 54 2 CAROUSEL ERROR 8 Check electrical continuity between connector i J642 1 PYMC and J642 2 PBK on the O EAEE conunued subrelay PCA when the door switch SW673 is turned on If there is no electrical continuity replace the toner cartridge cover switch in the su
233. he way in the printer In the front of the printer swing the lower green lever to the left making sure it clicks into place Close the front door and turn the printer on The printer control panel should display the message PRESS SELECT IF TRANSFER IS NEW If it displays the message go to step 20 If it does not go to step 21 When the printer control panel displays the message press SELECT to bring the printer online and reset the transfer drum life count Then go to step 22 If the printer control panel does not display the message a Press MENU until RESETS MENU appears on the printer control panel display b Press ITEM until RESET TRANSFER LIFE COUNT appears c Press SELECT to reset the transfer drum life count d Press Go to bring the printer online Place the used parts in the packaging from the new ones See the included recycling guide for recycling information Installing consumables 109 Drum kit Replace the parts in the imaging drum kit when the printer control panel displays either of the following messages DRUM LIFE LOW REPLACE DRUM KIT DRUM LIFE OUT REPLACE DRUM KIT DRUM ERROR REPLACE DRUM KIT 3 S Figure 24 Contents of drum kit 1 Two air filters 2 Hand wipe 3 Imaging drum cartridge 110 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance EN To replace the imaging drum and air filters 1 Open the front
234. helps prevent uneven surface charge on the imaging drum Preconditioning exposure D unit Primary charging roller Imaging drum Transfer drum Preconditioning exposure Image formation 131 Figure 30 2 Primary charging In preparation for the latent image formation the imaging drum surface is charged so that it has a uniform negative potential AC and DC bias are applied to the primary charging roller to create uniform negative potential charge on the drum surface Charging roller Imaging drum AC bias Primary charging of imaging drum 3 Laser beam exposure When the laser beam scans the imaging drum surface the charge on the exposed area is decreased This area then forms the electrostatic latent image 132 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN Developing block The black toner used in the printer is magnetic single component toner composed of magnetite and resin The color toner is non magnetic single component toner composed of resin The toners are given a negative charge when they rub against the developing cylinder and the blade 4 Development The developing cylinder is biased to create a potential difference with the imaging drum This bias consists of AC and DC components The AC component breaks the toner free from the developing cylinder creating a toner cloud The DC component drives the toner particles to the imaged region on the imaging drum The three color cartridges are br
235. hin the formatter diagnostics to record error messages This log provides service personnel with an account of all errors that occurred while the formatter diagnostics tests were executing This log is completely separate from the event log No entries are made in the event log for any diagnostic mode failure Error message logging When a test in formatter diagnostics detects an error the Attention LED is lit and a message describing the error is added to the fault log The fault log holds a maximum of 50 entries When the fault log is full and a new message needs to be added the oldest message is discarded The contents of the fault log are erased when the printer is powered off or when the fault log is cleared Viewing the fault log The fault log menu appears as an Item selection only when one or more error messages exist in the log The fault log menu is entered automatically at the end of a test run if any error messages were recorded If there are items in the fault log to be viewed the fault log can be entered by using ITEM to view the fault log entry Error message format Each error message has the form mm NAME_t lt description gt lt data gt where mm Message number in the fault log 1 being the oldest message NAME Name of the test that found the failure t Error number within the test lt description gt Type of failure lt data gt Pertinent data related to the failure Aids to troubleshooting 377 Paper path troubl
236. ht sources are mixed The primary additive colors are red blue and green Adding various levels of these colors which are generated by a light source such as a color monitor produces all other colors Mixing equal amounts of the additive primary colors produces the colors indicated in table 26 Table 26 Additive color mixing Mix equal amounts of To produce Red Green Blue White Red Blue Magenta Green Blue Cyan Red Green Yellow 128 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN Image formation Figure 27 and figure 28 give an overview of the image formation process Laser beam Development block Color toner L cartridges KU Black toner cartridge Electrostatic latent image formation block Imaging drum cartridge Preconditioning exposure LED unit gt Post charging unit Transfer drum Yo o Transfer belt Transfer block Carousel O Cleaning roller Separation discharge unit Figure 27 Image formation EN Image formation 129 Figure 28 shows the simultaneous processes of image formation and paper pick up that occur during the electrostatic latent image formation block Electrostatic latent image formation block 2 Primary charging 1 Preconditioning exposure 3 Laser beam exposure 4 Development 11 Imaging drum cleaning Paper delivery Im
237. i 4 Release 2 cable stays 5 Remove 1 screw from the top of the converter callout 2 6 Pull the converter out EN Rear assemblies 265 Main relay PCA This PCA is located behind the high voltage converter 1 PCA 1 Remove the rear cover see page 222 Remove 5 screws from the sheet metal cover plate and lift it off 2 3 Remove the high voltage converter 1 PCA see page 264 4 Unplug 8 connectors callout 1 Figure 136 High voltage converter 2 5 Remove 2 screws callout 2 Note Take note of where the interlock tabs come out of their casing so that you can reinstall them correctly callout 3 6 Lift the PCA up and out 266 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Drum cartridge drive assembly This assembly is behind the high voltage converter 2 PCA assembly 1 Remove the high voltage converter 1 see page 263 2 Remove the high voltage converter 2 and the high voltage converter 2 PCA see page 262 Remove the fan 1 housing see page 257 steps 4 through 6 Release 3 cable stays Remove 12 screws callout 1 Figure 137 Drum cartridge drive assembly 6 Lift the assembly up and out Notes on reinstalling e Replace the screws starting with the callout 2 screw to prevent leading edge banding print defects Continue to replace screws clockwise around the assembly EN Rear assemblies 267 Separation discharge high voltage converter assemblies The separation discharge high voltage conv
238. i bin mailbox controller board PCA 6 Replace the delivery head assembly Event log message 13 00 0 lt x gt lt x gt Description 5 Delivery paper delay jam 6 Delivery stationary jam Action 1 Open the left upper door remove the jammed media and close the left upper door 2 Verify that PS30 PS10 PS11 and PS3 sensors and the surrounding area are clean 3 Perform sensor monitor test in the Service Mode Menu to verify all paper path sensors are functioning properly or to locate the paper jam Printer message troubleshooting 339 Table 40 Unnumbered printer messages continued CLEAR PAPER JAM Description The printer senses a media jam Since this is a generic media jam message the media might be at any point in the paper path CLEAR TRANSFER JAM Description The printer senses a media jam in the transfer drum area when media has not reached PS5 In some cases the media might wrap around the transfer drum and become lodged near the imaging drum See table 42 on page 381 for an explanation of paper jam detection sensors Event log message 13 00 00 Action Open and shut the front door of the printer to clear any media from the printer Be sure to check the fuser area because media can get wrapped around the fuser and be difficult to find 2 Check all areas of the printer for jammed media since the printer is unable to determine the location of the media jam 3 Perform sensor monitor tes
239. i bin mailbox interlock switch The multi bin mailbox begins a power up test e All the motors in the multi bin mailbox start working and the delivery head assembly moves up and down the multi bin mailbox twice scanning to determine that all the output paper bins are properly installed e At the end of the power up test the flipper motor remains working and waiting for feeding paper Check the user status LED on the front and the three service LEDs on the back side of the multi bin mailbox If the power up test is successful the user status LED remains green and the middle service LED shows solid red The other two service LEDs remain off If the service LEDs are blinking in a pattern indicating an error code a problem exists table 48 on page 436 lists the error codes indicated by the blinking pattern Paper path test Use only supported media types for the paper path test 1 Manually feed paper through the input paper guide e The paper passes across the flipper assembly and moves down to the bottom paper bin through the transport belt system via the delivery head assembly Feed several pages one at a time through the input paper guide If the paper path test is successful reinstall the multi bin mailbox If a problem exists the service LEDs blink in a pattern indicating an error code table 48 on page 436 lists the error codes indicated by the blinking pattern Multi bin mailbox troubleshooting 435 Multi b
240. ia jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoisty kaluja Varo Mik li kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan olet alttiina nakymattomalle lasersateilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa Al katso s teeseen Varning Om laserprinterns skyddsh lje ppnas d apparaten r i funktion uts ttas anv ndaren f r osynlig laserstr lning Betrakta ej str len Tiedot laitteessa k ytett v n laserdiodin s teilyominaisuuksista Aallonpituus 775 795 nm Teho 5 mW Luokan 3B laser 44 Chapter 1 Product information EN EN Product information sheet The Toner Product Information Sheet can be obtained by calling U S HP FIRST Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology at 1 800 231 9300 International customers should see page 52 for appropriate phone numbers and information Toner safety Toner is composed of plastic and a small amount of pigment Avoid breathing toner particles toner might be harmful to your health Toner can also stain clothing Skin and clothing are best cleaned by removing as much toner as possible with a dry tissue then washing with cold water Hot water causes toner to melt and permanenily fuse into clothing Material Safety Data Sheet The Toner Cartridge Drum MSDS can be obtained by calling U S HP FIRST Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology at 1 800 231 9300 Use Index number 7 for a listing of the Toner Cartridge Drum Material Chemical Safety Data Sheets International customers should see
241. ia meets the specifications listed in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide 378 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Note EN Sealed envelopes To prevent envelopes from sealing in the printer set the envelope size in the printer driver as a custom size However setting envelopes as a custom size can cause poor fusing Media jams When troubleshooting media jams remember that jams are posted as a result of timing errors That is media fails to arrive at or fails to clear the paper path sensor in the allotted time The paper path timing is set by the controller board Stuck or defective sensors cause the paper path timing to post a jam message at power on as do scraps of paper caught in the paper path Use figure 190 to locate the paper path sensors The media jam message code identifies the sensor that failed to change state in the required time Check that the paper path sensors are free throughout their full range of travel All interlock switches must be operational in order for the printer to clear media jam messages Paper path troubleshooting 379 Top face down output bin Top face down delivery sensor output bin PS11 onal V Face down delivery roller CO PS5 Fusing Registration roller delivery sensor ee sensor PS1903 Left f nia eft face up fusi I output bin paa ia UG O up roller Face up 4 delivery roller Registration Feed roller 2 Lower Transfer fell PS17 fusing roller be
242. ich is included with your service manual Print these files by copying them to the parallel port LPT 1 for example copy magnta ps Iptl Image defect examples Figures 192 through 202 show examples of image defects Resolutions for these defects follow the illustrations Image defects troubleshooting 387 alta Ta ta Ta Ta Ag ta PEPE PEPE PEDPEPE PEPE di dia pake Bs Bs Hk Pk Pk atatatatatataqtatate ILAAN ata a ta Na ta qtqtatatatataqtatate alala ta Ta ta Ta Ta Ag la alala ta ta ta ta Ta Ag la alala ta la ta Ta Ta Ag la KTA a Aa a a a da Ag ta qtqtaetatatatatatate TX TALA LA NA AA a Ag Na ta qtiqtatatatatatatata Incorrect registration late and early print Figure 192 See page 399 for a resolution to this print defect 388 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Figure 193 Image skew See page 399 for a resolution to this print defect EN Image defects troubleshooting 389 aqtatata t KA AQ Ag Aa AA Ag Aa qtatatat UA Aq Ag Aa aqteatateg t atatatga lt t AA AGA KA AA Ag a aqtatatat Ala Ag AA AU qtatataqt lt ttataqtat lt Aq Aq Aq a ada Aq Aq a Blank or partially blank page Figure 194 See page 400 for a resolution to this print defect 390 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Figure 195 Horizontal lines in one color See page 401 for a resolution to this print defect EN Image defects troubleshooting 391 Figure 196 Horizontal lines in all colors CMYK
243. idge will make the imaging drum much heavier than a new imaging drum If the cartridge is full check the waste toner detection connections If no error message appeared on the printer control panel 410 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Banding less than 10 mm Banding is characterized by light or dark lines of color appearing perpendicular to the paper path direction Banding can be caused by old maintenance units by worn or damaged gears and by consumables that are beyond their rated life Also some banding might appear at the beginning and at the end of the imaging drum life Check the imaging drum life by printing a configuration page Replace the drum if necessary Remove the toner cartridges and inspect the drive gears for damage Replace if necessary e Print the following files from the service and support CD to help troubleshoot print quality problems e Print vcoltb31 ps on 11 by 17 inch sized paper or vcola331 ps on A3 sized paper from tray 3 to troubleshoot the toner cartridge banding e Print grastb31 ps on 11 by 17 inch sized paper or grasa331 ps on A3 sized paper from tray 3 to troubleshoot imaging drum and main gear train banding Type the following command at the DOS prompt to print the files copy file name gt lpt1 Banding 14 mm This defect is characterized by light or dark lines of color appearing repetitively at 195 mm imaging drum repetitive defect This can be caused by high or low humidity
244. ift the assembly out Notes on reinstalling The larger peg on the stopper hinge fits into the assembly 236 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Right assemblies Figure 107 EN The following assemblies can be accessed from the right side of the printer e tray 1 density sensor pick up roller paper pick up assembly registration roller assembly tray 1 pick up assembly paper photo sensors Tray 1 Tray 1 is part of the right upper door Take the tray off and save it if you are replacing the whole assembly The new assembly does not include the tray 1 Tray 1 Open the tray about 45 degrees out Open the extender all the way out Grasp both sides and bend towards the middle Pull the left side of the tray out first then pull the right side of the tray out Unplug 1 connector on the right side callout 1 Right assemblies 237 Pick up roller The pick up roller is located on the tray 1 pick up assembly 1 Open the right upper door 2 Rotate the roller cover back off of the roller 3 Squeeze the tabs on the roller and pull to the left to remove the roller callout 1 Pick up roller 238 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN EN Registration roller assembly The registration roller assembly is located inside the right upper door under the transfer belt 1 Open the front door and the right upper door 2 Remove the transfer drum 3 Remove the transfer belt 4 Lift the p
245. ify the media meets the specifications in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide 406 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN CAUTION Note EN Black brown or orange bands See figure 198 on page 394 for an example Black brown or orange stripes horizontal or vertical across the page are caused by light leaking into the printer onto the imaging drum This happens while the covers are off such as when servicing the printer Generally the imaging drum will recover from exposure to room light but the useful life of the imaging drum might be reduced This defect is usually gradated along the page with no clear starting or stopping point If the black brown orange defect is not limited to a definite horizontal stripe it might be necessary to replace the imaging drum Imaging drum failure is also characterized by a black page Ambient room light can permanently damage the imaging drum Store the imaging drum in total darkness to protect the photosensitive coating If the entire page is black brown orange this can indicate a high voltage power supply problem Background toner scatter See figure 199 on page 395 for an example This defect appears as haze around text and graphics It can occur with any color Thoroughly clean the printer and ensure the defect persists before troubleshooting it e Ensure media meets the specifications listed in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide Some paper
246. ight cover switch SW642 Imaging drum switch SW644 Black toner cartridge switch SW671 Delivery cover front cover switch SW672 Toner cartridge cover switch SW673 Carousel button switch SW1601 Tray 3 paper size detection switch SW1602 Tray 3 paper size detection switch SW1603 Tray 3 paper size detection switch SW1604 Tray 3 paper size detection switch SW1601 Tray 2 paper size detection switch SW1602 Tray 2 paper size detection switch SW1603 Tray 2 paper size detection switch SW1604 Tray 2 paper size detection switch EN Paper path 175 Switch functionality The following table describes the functionality of the paper size switches in the printer Table 33 Tray 2 and Tray 3 paper size detection Paper size detection switches Paper size SW1601 SW1602 SW1603 SW1604 A3 Off On Off Off A4 horizontal Off Off On Off A4 landscape On Off Off On A5 Off Off On On B4 On Off Off Off B5 Off On Off On Ledger Off Off Off Off Legal On On Off Off Letter horizontal Off Off Off On 176 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN Figure 62 Printer clutches and solenoids Table 34 Printer clutch and solenoid names and descriptions Name Description Name Description CL1 Registration roller clutch SL3 Tray 2 and tray 3 pick up CL2 Feed roller clutch solenoid CL3 Tray 1 pick up roller clutch SL4 Lifting plate solenoid CL4 Transfer belt press clutch SL5 Carousel stopper solenoid SL1 Cleaning roller press sole
247. igure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Figure 36 Space requirements aaa 25 Example of printer model number and serial number label 110 Vand 220V 34 Front VICW pe ma hERaE ewe 6O obe See ek Se ees 35 Heal VIEW Lama ENG Gow ala bee we Se MAAN Ka 36 Formatter assemblies 37 Paper handling accessories and options 38 Contents of printer box 59 Power cord connection 00000 0 60 C link and power cables connections 61 Network connections 000 0c eee aes 62 Parallel cable connection 64 Changing the printer control panel overlay 65 Location of printer control panel features 66 Consumable installation order 85 DIMM slot configuration 93 Paper handling accessory status LEDs 94 Cleaning the post charger unit 99 Cleaning the density sensor 100 Cleaning the transfer charger 101 Removing the waste toner tray cover 102 Cleaning the waste toner tray 103 Location of consumables in printer 104 Contents of transfer kit 106 Contents of drum kit 0000 08 110 Contents oltuser Ri aa Na a 113 Cross section view of internal components 124 Image formation a 129 Electrostatic latent image formation block
248. ilbox as one logical bin When the multi bin mailbox is full the printer stops sending paper until all the bins are emptied 186 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN Note EN Configuring operating modes The network administrator chooses the mode of operation through an HP network configuration utility such as the HP JetAdmin software or the HP LaserJet utility for the Macintosh Additionally on all workstations that print to the printer the printer driver might need to be set up to reflect the chosen operating mode e Bidirectional environment The printer automatically selects the mode established by the network administrator e Unidirectional environment The mode of operation can be changed in the driver to reflect the current multi bin mailbox settings The method for changing the mode varies with the driver and type of operating system For additional information see the online help for the printer software Power on sequence During the power on sequence the delivery head assembly moves first to the top home position at the face up bin From that position the delivery head moves down scanning to determine if all the multi bin mailbox bins are installed if they contain paper and if they are full Then the delivery head proceeds upward again to the home position and remains there for about 7 seconds Finally the delivery head assembly moves to the bottom bin where it waits for the next command from the EPH c
249. in mailbox LED descriptions The multi bin mailbox features a user status LED and three service LEDs e The user status LED is a single LED that is located on the front cover of the multi bin mailbox at the top The user LED provides information about the power on status and about the attachment to and alignment of the accessory with the printer e The three service LEDs are near the center of the multi bin mailbox back cover The service LEDs blink independently of each other indicating the status of the multi bin mailbox LED status interpretation Solid green Solid red Blinking red Solid amber Blinking amber Blank SITE Table 48 Status LEDs on the multi bin mailbox User Service LED LEDs Message description Recommended action Multi bin mailbox ready No action required The multi bin mailbox was successfully connected and initialized by the printer Power Save mode No action required The multi bin mailbox is in Power Save mode as Test mode Run the power on test The multi bin mailbox is in test mode Run the paper path test a 436 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Table 48 Status LEDs on the multi bin mailbox continued User Service LED LEDs Message description Recommended acti
250. ing roller Charcoal filter Hand wipe Transfer mount assembly RG5 3008 000CN 223 36 Transfer swing assembly RG5 3010 000CN 221 10 Transport belt motor with fan C4785 60518 246 41 Tray 1 assembly RG5 3134 000CN 235 Tray 1 pick up assembly RG5 3054 000CN 234 Tray 4 RG5 3845 000CN 242 79 Tray rail assembly RG5 1851 000CN 221 3 Tray face up RB1 6491 000CN 214 11 Universal power supply assembly RG5 4021 000CN 243 102 User LED PCA with cable C4785 60515 244 20 Vertical transfer unit VTU RG5 3854 000CN 242 89 Waste toner tray RB1 9804 000CN 217 5 Yellow toner cartridge C4152A EN Alphabetical parts list 523 524 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams EN EN Index Symbols Value key 66 Numbers 100Base TX networks 62 446 10Base2 networks 63 10Base T networks 62 446 11 by 17 inch sized media See media 12 by 18 5 inch sized media See media 2 000 sheet input unit back cover 273 cable connections 61 communication error 330 components 271 controller board 182 controller PCA 279 covers and doors 492 description 180 DIP switches 430 error 330 331 front cover 272 front LED PCA assembly 280 LEDs 182 427 429 left cover 274 location 38 main drive assembly 282 motor test 431 normal diagnostic mode switch 182 paper path 185 paper pick up assembly 278 paper size sensor assemblies 283 paper size switch assembly 284 pick up and feed system 182 power supply 180 182 281 428 printer model included w
251. ing temperature approximately 190 C or 374 F Do not use media with a colored coating that was added after the media was produced The printer cannot detect the color of media you are using Varying the shade or color of the media can change the shades of the printed colors 32 Chapter 1 Product information EN EN Media to avoid To avoid poor print quality or damage to the printer do not use any of the following media that is coated or embossed media with cutouts or perforations except prepunched paper multi part forms media with irregularities such as tabs or staples preprinted media that contains thermography or inks that melt vaporize or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the fusing temperature approximately 190 C or 374 F media that produces hazardous emissions melts offsets or discolors when heated to the printer s fusing temperature approximately 190 C or 374 F media that has already been through a photocopier or laser printer even if there is no printing on the page media with a watermark if solid fill areas are to be printed transparencies designed for ink jet printers Media requirements 33 Identification model and serial numbers To identify the model number and serial number find the label located on the rear of the printer similar to the one shown in figure 2 HEWLETT PACKARD 11311 CHINDEN BLVD BOISE IDAHO 83714 U S A rial No USBB3584 MUN CG in M
252. ing the media into position for printing lt X gt Input tray number 2 3 or 4 TRAY lt x gt LOAD lt type gt lt size gt CHECK CONTROL PANEL SETTING Description A user has requested a media size and type combination that is not currently installed or configured in the printer This message is also generated when the current input tray runs out of media and no other auto selectable input trays contain that size and type of media lt X gt Input tray number 1 2 3 or 4 lt type gt Last media type configured for the input tray lt size gt Last media size configured for the input tray EN Event log message None Action 1 Load the media type and size specified on the printer control panel display 2 Replace the upper lower cassette lifter remaining paper sensor lever if it is damaged or deformed Also if the lifter is out of position set it in its correct position 3 Reconnect connector J1201 on the pick up PCA and connector J210 on the controller board 4 Replace the tray 2 and tray 3 remaining paper sensors 1 and 2 5 Replace the pick up PCA 6 Replace the controller board Event log message None Action No action is required Event log message None Action Load the media type and size specified on the printer control panel display and configure the media type in the printer control panel After the requested input tray is loaded the printer automatically goes online
253. input trays 1 2 and 3 to the output bins Removing some engine parts such as the transfer drum prevents paper from feeding completely It is possible to select the input and output trays for the test by indicating in the Paper Path Menu which input tray and output bins should be accessed by selecting ON or OFF Multiple input trays can be selected but only a single output can be selected A page is fed from each input tray to the selected output If a jam occurs during the test the test should continue with the next input tray in the list Jam detection is OFF in this mode and an unattended test might result in damage to the printer Aids to troubleshooting 365 The pick up rollers feed rollers registration roller transfer belt press clutch CL4 cleaning roller press cam and solenoid SL1 fuser transfer belt and output feed roller can be exercised during the paper path test For safety reasons the fuser high voltage supplies and scanner are all turned off during testing 1 From the Service Mode Menu press MENU until PAPER PATH appears Press ITEM until REPETITIONS appears Press VALUE to display the number of repetitions 1 to 10 Press SELECT to choose the number of repetitions Press ITEM until the desired input source appears Press VALUE until ON or OFF appears on the display N a 0a FP W N Press SELECT Note You can select more than one input source for the test Press ITEM until OUTPUT ap
254. ion The carousel is fixed when the carousel stopper solenoid SL5 pushes the stopper lever Consumable detection mechanisms 151 Electrical systems Power distribution The low voltage power distribution circuit transforms the AC input voltage to supply the DC power sources 24VB and 5V on which the printer operates The 24V source feeds the various motors solenoids and exhaust fans within the printer while the 5V source feeds the controller board and image processor Low voltage power distribution circuit 5VS 5V 24VB Main relay PCA 1 Right Controller board Ha Black toner cartridge Carousel switch detection switch door switch naa a SW641 SW644 Sub relay PCA PSAVE SW642 Delivery cover front cover switch Drum cartridge detection switch FET gt oc I T m 5 S D D lt N ala al o N q Ki i i yt E o P5SAVE High voltage PCA High voltage converter 2 PCA Separation discharge high voltage PCA Carousel motor PCA Cartridge Carousel Preconditioning motor Fan1 Fan 2 motor solenoid exposure Sensors LED PCA Laser driver Exhaust fan 3 Sensors Sensors Formatter ma BD POA LED unit Figure 47 Power distribution circuit diagram Sensors FF 24UH EH P5SAVE 24VAR Solenoids Clutches Pick up motor EH 7 152 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN When the printer receives the Power Save command from
255. ional overview EN Table 15 Paper Handling Menu continued Item TRAY 1 SIZE TRAY 2 TYPE TRAY 3 TYPE TRAY 4 TYPE PAPER DEST DUPLEX BINDING Default setting Value LETTER LEGAL A4 A5 11X17 A3 EXEC JIS B4 JIS B5 JPOSTD COM10 MONARCH C5 DL BS CUSTOM PLAIN PREPRINTD LTRHEAD TRNSPRNCY trays 2 and 3 only PREPUNCHED BOND RECYCLED COLOR GLOSSY 28 TYPE 1 28 TYPE 2 TOP OUTPUT BIN LEFT OUTPUT BIN STACKER OUTBIN SEPARATOR BIN MAILBOX 1 MAILBOX 2 MAILBOX 3 MAILBOX 4 MAILBOX 5 MAILBOX 6 MAILBOX 7 MAILBOX 8 OFF ON LONG EDGE SHORT EDGE Description action Appears only if TRAY 1 MODE CASSETTE The TRAY 4 TYPE option appears only if the 2 000 sheet input unit is properly installed The STACKER OUTBIN SEPARATOR BIN and MAILBOX options appear only if the multi bin mailbox is installed and configured for the appropriate mode Appears only if a duplexer is properly installed Appears only if DUPLEX is set to ON EN Menu maps 73 Table 15 Paper Handling Menu continued Item Value Description action MANUAL FEED OFF Allows the user to feed media into the printer ON by hand rather than automatically from an input tray The user can select manual feed instead of automatic input tray as the default for the paper source If MANUAL FEED ON and an input tray is not selected then manual feed is selected OVERRIDE A4 WITH NO Enab
256. is not correctly attached to the printer The printer will print to the top face down output bin when in this state EN Event log message None Action 1 Verify all cables are connected correctly 2 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer Event log message None Action Remove all media from the multi bin mailbox to continue printing Event log message None Action Push the multi bin mailbox up against printer Printer message troubleshooting 349 Table 40 Unnumbered printer messages continued MANUALLY FEED lt type gt lt size gt Description The printer is requesting a sheet of media or envelope to be manually fed lt type gt Media type specified in the printer driver or application lt size gt Media size specified in the printer driver or application MEMORY SHORTAGE PAGE SIMPLIFIED Description The printer is compressing the print job so that all of the job will fit into the available printer memory The print job s appearance might be altered by the compression of the data Event log message None Action Load the requested media type and size into tray 1 If the proper media size is already loaded into tray 1 press Go to initiate printing Event log message None Action 1 If possible simplify the print job by lowering the resolution of graphics Install more printer memory For more information on printer memory options see page 445 NO JOB TO CANCE
257. ith 19 quantity switch assembly 283 rear view 428 right cover 276 sensor test 432 sensors switches clutches and motors 181 standalone diagnostics 431 standalone running test 430 tension springs 285 troubleshooting 426 A A3 sized media paper size detection switches 176 paper size detection switches 2 000 sheet input unit 183 See also media A4 sized media overriding with letter 74 paper size detection switches 176 paper size detection switches 2 000 sheet input unit 183 setting for wide 77 See also media A5 sized media paper size detection switches 176 See also media absorption of color 126 access denied 334 accessories available 19 information from HP FIRST 52 ordering 49 53 445 paper handling 38 parts list 446 acoustic emission specifications 22 additive color process 126 adjusting color balance 414 colors 415 neutral axis 418 Adobe PostScript See PostScript PS air filter door 36 air filters See filters alphabetical parts list 513 altitude specifications 21 anti curl strings multi bin mailbox 301 Append CR to LF command 77 application notes HP Driver Distribution Center 53 HP FIRST 52 ASAP Automated Support Access Program 52 ASIC test 82 assemblies black cartridge cam 450 black cartridge guide 450 delivery 450 delivery cover 486 delivery drive 259 450 Index 525 assemblies continued delivery frame 451 drum cartridge drive 267 451 472 face down output 225 face up exit 236 feeder 2
258. l mark on portrait the media width guides DL portrait Double Post Card JPOSTD Monarch portrait Labels A4 landscape Limit to media fill mark on Letter landscape the media width guides Transparencies A4 landscape 4 to 5 mils 0 10 to 0 13 Limit to media fill mark on Letter landscape mm thick the media width guides 28 Chapter 1 Product information EN Table 8 Media capacity and sizes for input trays continued Media size and Media type orientation Media weight Maximum capacity Tray 2 Paper A4 landscape 16 to 28 Ib 500 sheets of Plain JIS B4 portrait 60 to 105 g m bond 7 20 Ib 75 g m bond Preprinted Letter landscape Letterhead Legal portrait Limit to media fill mark on Prepunched the media width guides Bond Recycled Color Glossy Transparency A4 portrait 4 to 5 mils 0 10 to 0 13 Limit to media fill mark on Letter portrait mm thick the media width guides Tray 3 Paper 11 by 17 in portrait 16 to 28 Ib 500 sheets of Plain A3 portrait 60t01059 m3 bond 7 20 Ib 75 g m bond Preprinted A4 landscape Letterhead JIS B4 portrait Limit to media fill mark on Prepunched Legal portrait the media width guides Bond Letter landscape Recycled Color Glossy Transparency A4 portrait 4 to 5 mils 0 10 to 0 13 Limit to media fill mark on Letter portrait mm thick the media width guides 2 000 sheet input unit only available on 85
259. l the cover off Doors and covers 209 Removing the inside left panel 1 Remove the front cover See page 208 2 Remove the top cover assembly See page 211 3 Remove 8 screws on the inside panel callout 1 Inside left panel 210 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Figure 80 EN 4 Remove the waste toner tray cover callout 2 by releasing the tab on the right side of the cover with a small screwdriver Remove the waste toner tray Open the left lower door to disengage the interlock Swing both the lower green lever callout 3 and the upper blue lever callout 4 to the right 8 Pull the panel off Notes on reinstalling When replacing the inside left panel the lower left door and the toner carousel door must be open so that the interlock engages Top cover assembly 1 Remove the front right cover see page 209 Leave the front door open 2 Open the left door and loosen the 2 screws callout 1 Doors and covers 211 3 Open the right door and loosen the 2 screws callout 2 Figure 81 Screws behind right door 4 Open the front cover 5 Lift the cover up and unplug the connector callout 3 at the rear of the cover Figure 82 Connector on top cover 6 Remove the top cover assembly 212 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Left covers and doors Removing the left rear cover 1 Open the left upper door 2 Support the door and squeeze the prong with needle nose pliers
260. latile random access memory damaged 438 recoverable error 333 settings 80 unrecoverable error 333 O OHT overhead transparency See transparencies OHT mode 167 online indicator 67 support 50 operating environment requirements 24 environment specifications 21 specifications 21 operating system color characteristics 385 options ordering 445 parts list 446 orange stripes 407 ordering accessories 445 consumables 51 445 DIMMs 445 documentation and software 50 options 445 parts 445 orientation configuring default 76 media in input trays 28 output bins configuring destinations 73 full 349 355 357 jams 339 multi bin mailbox 192 overflow 186 See also left face up output bin top face down output bin overflow bin multi bin mailbox 186 overhead transparencies See transparencies overriding A4 with letter 74 letter with A4 74 media type size 74 ozone filter 46 safety 46 P package contents 59 pages blank 400 configuration 353 demonstration 353 image early or late 399 printing color test 79 rings circles on 403 simplified 350 total color printed 80 total count 80 wrinkled 378 wrong request 438 panel inside left 210 paper clearing 341 cold reset size 81 configuring default size 76 configuring destinations 73 diverter out of position 328 feeding speeds 167 handling accessories 446 overriding size 74 print speeds 20 roller life low 344 rollers life out 344 tray 1 pick up 171
261. le 92215S Magenta toner cartridge C4151A Main drive assembly RG5 3066 000CN 221 18 Media jam knob RB1 9928 000CN 217 7 Metallic retaining spring spring leaf RB1 7835 000CN 243 93 Metallic retaining tab plate stop RB1 7677 000CN 243 94 Metallic tape and housing assembly C4785 60507 245 34 Motor carousel M1 RH7 1325 000CN 220 26 Motor cartridge M3 RH7 1328 000CN 224 23 Motor main M4 RH7 1323 000CN 221 21 Motor pick up M5 RH7 1350 000CN 228 87 Mount clutch RB1 9828 000CN 220 15 EN Alphabetical parts list 519 Table 82 Alphabetical parts list continued Description Part number Figure Ref Multi bin mailbox assembly C4785 60500 244 28 product number C4785A NOTE You must have a 2 000 sheet input unit in order to install a multi bin mailbox Multi bin mailbox controller with metal box C4785 60508 244 29 Multi bin mailbox repackaging kit C4785 60513 Multi bin mailbox shipping lock kit C4787 60503 Multi bin mailbox short C link cable adapter C4785 70001 Outriggers RG5 4205 000CN 243 95 Paper deck drive assembly RG5 3851 000CN 242 80 Paper deck drive bushing RS5 1399 000CN 242 81 Paper deck PCA RG5 3908 000CN 243 96 Paper pick up assembly RG5 3132 000CN 228 RG5 3843 000CN 242 82 Paper quantity sensor PCA assembly RG5 2166 000CN 243 97 Paper size sensor PCA assembly RG5 2168 000CN 243 98 PCA 10 100Base T
262. leaning the transfer drum 423 Rear view of 2 000 sheet input unit 428 Location of sensors in the 2 000 sheet input unit 432 Multi bin mailbox power supply test mode switch 434 Connectors on the controller board 440 General printer circuit diagram 1 of 2 441 General printer circuit diagram 2 of 2 442 Major assembly locations 1 of 2 450 Major assembly locations 2 of 2 451 Printer covers and doors 1 of 3 452 Printer covers and doors 2 of 3 454 Printer covers and doors 3 of 3 456 Internal cover assembly 458 Internal components 1 of6 460 Internal components 2 of 6 462 Internal components 3 of 6 464 Internal components 4 of 6 466 Internal components 5 of 6 468 Internal components 6 of 6 470 Drum cartridge drive assembly 472 Delivery drive assembly 473 Tray 3 assembly aaa 474 Tray 2 A85EMDIY pesee aa naa ain dog edie ae 475 Paper pick up assembly 1 of 3 476 Paper pick up assembly 2 0f3 477 Paper pick up assembly 3 of 3 478 Registration frame assembly 480 Registration roller assembly 481 Feeder assembly
263. lever and swing the lever to the right C CAUTION There is a cover protecting the drum cylinder Do not remove this cover or the drum might be damaged it will come off during the next step 2 Push the drum into the printer The protective cover slides off as the drum enters the printer 3 Swing the lower green lever back to the left making sure it clicks into place Note If the lever does not return to its original position make sure that the imaging drum is all the way in the printer EN EN To install the black toner cartridge 1 Remove the black toner cartridge from its packaging and gently rock the cartridge several times to distribute the toner CAUTION Do not lift or remove the shutter A on the cartridge 2 Align the arrow on the top of the cartridge with the arrow at the top of the slot in the printer and slide the cartridge into the printer 3 Place one hand on the cartridge and use the other hand to pull the orange ring and remove the seal Discard the seal Note If toner gets on fabric wipe the toner off with a dry cloth and then wash the clothing in cold water Heat will set toner into fabric 4 Swing the upper blue lever back to the left Note If the lever does not return to its original position make sure that t
264. ling this option prints A4 sized LETTER YES documents on letter sized media if letter is the default size or it prints letter sized documents on A4 sized media if A4 is the default size However if an input tray is configured for the size you want to override then the printer prints on the correct size of media regardless of the override setting AUTO PAPER OVERRIDE OFF Selects the media the job prints on if the ON requested media is not found If ON is selected the printer displays TRAY lt x gt LOAD lt type gt lt size gt After a delay the printer automatically prints on plain paper of the default media size The delay time can be changed through HP JetAdmin software If OFF is selected the printer displays TRAY lt x gt LOAD lt type gt lt size gt until it detects the requested media type and size or Go Is pressed Default setting 74 Chapter 3 Operational overview EN Configuration Menu Table 16 Configuration Menu Item POWERSAVE PERSONALITY CLEARABLE WARNINGS TONER LOW PRINT PS ERRORS INITIALIZE DISK Default setting Value 30 MIN 1 HOUR 2 HOURS 3 HOURS 10 SEC AUTO PCL PS ON JOB CONTINUE STOP OFF ON None Description action The 10 second setting is for service personnel use Allows the user to determine which personality will be the default for the printer When AUTO is selected the printer will determine which personality to u
265. livery head motor Replace the delivery head assembly Replace the multi bin mailbox controller PCA VILL Wrong page request Page request received with invalid output bin or invalid paper size information Check the bin destination Check the paper size configuration Power up the system 438 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Communications troubleshooting HP network interface support Unless you are experienced with the particular network under repair seek the help of a qualified network professional before changing any network configuration settings If the printer is configured with an HP network interface card such as an HP JetDirect product the Response Center is available to help with any problems Additional information is available from the HP JetDirect Printer Software Installation Guide see page 448 for ordering information CAUTION Network interface cards are not directly interchangeable Do not exchange interface cards without understanding and performing the configuration process for each of the exchanged cards and the network Third party network interface support If a problem is associated with a third party network interface card refer to the documentation that came with the card and the vendor support organization for help in troubleshooting EN Communications troubleshooting 439 Diagrams This section contains general circuit wiring diagrams 3J2151 6 J214 1 9 J213 1 1
266. lt Pick up unit aper sensor Pick up roller a pa Pick up roller QB Figure 190 Printer paper path For information on printer and paper handling accessory sensors see chapter 5 380 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Following are possible media jams Table 42 Media jam detection Location of jam Pick up delay jam 1 Detected when The page has not reached the pick up unit paper sensor PS17 within about 1 2 seconds after leaving tray 2 1 3 seconds after leaving tray 3 Pick up delay jam 2 The media does not reach the registration roller paper sensor PS1 within about 1 9 seconds after leaving tray 2 2 0 seconds after leaving tray 3 1 8 seconds after leaving tray 1 Transfer jam The separation sensor PS5 does not detect the media for the specified time or longer within 1 5 to 2 2 seconds after the top of paper signal about 0 1 seconds normal mode about 0 4 seconds overhead transparency mode about 0 3 seconds high gloss mode Fusing delivery paper delay jam The media has not reached the fusing delivery sensor PS1903 since the top of paper signal within about 3 2 seconds normal mode 12 8 seconds overhead transparency mode 9 6 seconds high gloss mode Fusing delivery stationary jam Fusing unit paper coil jam EN The media has not passed through the fusing delivery sensor PS1903 within the specified time after PS1903 detects the
267. m 153 High voltage power supply circuit 156 kaser SCANNER naaa AF NG x evade ne aY 158 Printer motors and heaters 159 Carousel motor M1 0 2 00 00 eee eee 160 Dr MOLO M2 dca seers die ea eae 161 Cartridge motor M3 162 Main motor M4 0 a 163 Pick up motor M5 0 0 0 164 Paper Dal exe aust Ea tas tao ale ae ek Dele JANE 166 Tray 2 and 3 pick up 000 0c eee 169 Tray 1 PICKUP areca KATAGANG HERA 171 Printer SCNSOVS na deini ma a a kaaa 172 Printer switches eee eee 174 Printer clutches and solenoids 177 Fusing and delivery unit 179 2 000 sheet input unit sensors switches clutches ANG MOTTO KS ay An NA la ore NA a AG eS ed oe 181 2 000 sheet input unit paper path 185 Multi bin mailbox cabling 00 188 Multi bin mailbox sensors 189 Multi bin mailbox paper path 191 Timing chart for WAIT period 1 of 2 193 Timing chart for WAIT period 2 of 2 194 Timing chart for printing full color letter sized page 101 2 4a wh dd pth od dunk Ha edd edd 195 Timing chart for printing full color letter sized Pagal OTZ spins crass ace ah ceo Guia eens 196 Timing chart for printing full color 11 by 17 inch sized Hage NONA KANA BANAL ARINA NAG ceuweees 197 Timing chart for printing full color 11
268. mbly RG5 3980 000CN 1 41 Filter charcoal RB1 9836 000CN 1 42 Fan 3 FM3 RH7 1393 000CN 1 46 Cover tray 1 side gear RB 1 9547 000CN 1 54 Hinge stopper tray 1 delivery assembly RG5 3962 000CN 1 EN Illustrations and parts lists 457 Internal cover assembly Internal cover assembly Figure 217 EN 458 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 54 Internal cover assembly parts Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Cover assembly inner left RG0 0104 000CN 1 2 Cover inner 2 RA0 0026 000CN 1 3 Cover inner 3 RA0 0027 000CN 1 4 Cover inner 4 RF0 0013 000CN 1 4A Label CAUTION RS5 8380 000CN 1 5 Waste toner tray RB1 9804 000CN 1 6 Latch roller action RF0 0003 000CN 1 7 Media jam knob RB1 9928 000CN 1 10 Cover waste toner tray RA0 0083 000CN 1 EN Illustrations and parts lists 459 g FE Ng DA a NG ra 4 ta a ma 1 5 NG OD 4 a a om ta y pmt iN WO NG Internal components NG i N AV ba AT x ae aC A a Internal components 1 of 6 Figure 218 EN 460 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 55 Internal components parts 1 of 6 Ref Description Part number Qty 2 PCA photosensor RG5 3080 000CN 1 3 Plate duct mount RF5 2036 000CN 1 4 Duct rear lower air RB1 9401 000CN 1
269. media and close the left lower cover 2 On the left side of the fuser check the fuser exit flag and the reflective absorptive sticker that the sensor PS1903 uses 3 Perform the sensor monitor test in the Service Mode Menu Toggle PS1903 and check to make sure that sensor 2 on the printer control panel indicates 1 on when toggled Event log message 13 11 1 lt x gt lt x gt Description 1 Time out at paper entry sensor PS31 B Time out at paper exit sensor PS32 Action 1 Open the vertical transfer unit VTU and remove any media 2 Verify that the paper entry sensor PS31 moves freely 3 Verify that the feed separation and the pickup rollers are properly seated 4 If the problem persists open the VTU and override the VTU closed sensor PS35 Perform a paper path test feeding from the 2 000 sheet input unit and verify that the feed rollers are advancing the paper If rollers do not rotate verify the connections at the pickup assembly and the controller PCA in the 2 000 sheet input unit 5 Ifthe rollers rotate and drop down but do not advance the paper replace the feed and separation rollers using the maintenance kit 6 Ifthe rollers do not rotate or do not drop down replace the pickup assembly 7 Ifthe problem persists replace the VTU which includes PS31 EN Table 40 Unnumbered printer messages continued CLEAR INPUT DEVICE JAM continued EN Event log message 13 11 2 lt x gt
270. merical parts list 0 0 00 0 002 e eee 502 Alphabetical parts list a 513 List of tables 15 16 List of tables EN EN Product information Chapter contents Printer features 0 0 a 19 SDCCIICANONS asawa pad a os DAGA GAN ase nA eae HAN 21 Electrical specifications 0 00 ee eee 21 Operating environment specifications 21 Acoustic emission specifications 22 Printer dimensions a 22 Consumable storage specifications 23 Site requirements 0a 24 General guidelines 0 0 00 cee eee eee 24 Space requirements a 25 Media requirements 0 000 cee ee ee eee 26 Selecting Medid e cc be dwar AGA bed bd AMA 26 Storing media a 27 Media capacity and sizes for input trays 28 Media capacity and sizes for the multi bin mailbox 30 Media weights and sizes for duplexer 31 Envelopes pam oe cores ed Cee eee eae PLA 31 Transparencies ce ee ee 31 Glossy Media 1 0 ce ees 32 Heavy paper Stock 00 0000 eee ees 32 Colored media 0 1 cc ees 32 Media to avOid 1 ee 33 Chapter contents 17 Identification model and serial numbers 34 Product OVervieW ceea e a ee 35 External VIOWS 0 0 cc ee ee 35 Formatter assemblies 0 000002 37 Paper handling accessories and options 38 Safety
271. move 13 screws on the rear cover callout 4 Two screws are holding the cover to the hinges at the bottom It is not necessary to remove these screws 8 Lift the rear cover off 222 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Top assemblies The following assemblies are accessed from the top of the printer control panel e laser scanner unit face down output assembly Control panel 1 Remove the top cover assembly see page 211 2 Turn the cover upside down xa 3 Remove 4 screws attaching the control panel to the top cover callout 1 Figure 93 Bottom of the control panel EN Top assemblies 223 4 Remove 3 screws from the bar on the bottom of the control panel that is holding the wires in place callout 2 Release the cable stays Remove the assembly Laser scanner unit 1 Remove the top cover assembly see page 211 A 2 Remove 4 screws callout 1 ESD Figure 94 Scanner unit Release the wires from the cable stay Unplug the 2 connectors callout 2 Gently remove the laser scanner unit and place it in an ESD pouch 224 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Figure 95 Figure 96 EN Face down output assembly Remove the top cover assembly see page 211 Remove the left rear cover See page 213 Remove the left upper cover See page 215 bo O N On the top of the printer remove the black airflow vent by releasing the cut tab callout 1 and lifting the vent off Up
272. move the optional multi bin mailbox before beginning repairs on the left side of the printer 1 2 3 4 Turn the printer off and unplug the power cable Unplug the multi bin mailbox power cable from the printer Unplug the multi bin mailbox interface cable from the printer Holding the multi bin mailbox by the handle on the top and by the main body towards the bottom pull the mailbox away from the printer Push down on the end of the guide rail until it releases from the bracket on the 2 000 sheet input unit Raise the guide rail Left assemblies 229 Formatter board If the formatter board needs to be repaired or replaced remove the hard drive and retain it to reattach to the formatter board later b 1 Printa configuration page if the printer is able to generate one ADA see page 361 Use this page to reset the NVRAM values that ESD will be lost if the formatter board is replaced 2 Loosen the 2 finger screws callout 1 Figure 100 Formatter board 3 Pull the formatter board out of the formatter pan Removing the formatter board from the formatter pan disconnects the formatter board from the chassis 230 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Notes on reinstalling e After reinstalling the formatter board print a configuration page to compare with the configuration page printed before the formatter board was removed Look at the following NVRAM values and reset the NVRAM values to match those on the config
273. mple e Horizontal lines might occur because of low toner Check the printer control panel display fora TONER LOW REPLACE lt color gt or TONER OUT REPLACE lt color gt message e Dark or light horizontal lines or streaks appearing in colors might occur because of a defective toner cartridge Use the service and support CD to help troubleshoot print quality problems by printing slimit21 ps and vcollt21 ps on letter sized paper or slima421 ps and vcola421 ps on A4 sized paper from tray 2 Type the following command at the DOS prompt to print the files copy lt file name gt Iptl e Use the table below to diagnose which toner cartridge is causing the streaking problems Replace the toner cartridge if necessary Table 43 Streaking If the streak is only in The problem isin Red Yellow Green Yellow toner cartridge Red Magenta Blue Magenta toner cartridge Green Cyan Blue Cyan toner cartridge Black Black toner cartridge Image defects troubleshooting 401 Horizontal streaks in all colors CMYK See figure 196 on page 392 for an example e Inspect the paper path and the transfer area for foreign materials that might be coming in contact with the unfused image e The post charging unit or transfer charger might be contaminated Clean both as described on page 99 and page 101 Check for obstructions and contamination in the scanning area e Use the service and support CD to help troubleshoot p
274. ms Table 57 Internal components parts 3 of 6 Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Cover right rear lower corner RA0 0074 000CN 1 2 Transfer drum contact assembly RG5 3044 000CN 1 4 Spring compression RB1 9675 000CN 3 5 Rod power switch RB1 6463 000CN 1 6 Spring leaf RB1 6909 000CN 1 7 Gear 11T RB1 9424 000CN 1 8 Sensor assembly color toner RG5 3034 000CN 1 9 Cover cable RB1 9805 000CN 1 15 Mount clutch RB1 9828 000CN 1 20 PCA high voltage converter 1 RG5 3026 000CN 1 21 PCA high voltage converter 2 RG5 3943 000CN 1 24 High voltage converter 1 RH3 0211 000CN 1 25 High voltage converter 2 RH3 0228 000CN 1 26 Motor carousel M1 RH7 1325 000CN 1 27 Clutch transfer belt press CL4 RH7 5168 000CN 1 28 Spring tension RS5 2465 000CN 1 30 Separation discharge high voltage converter RG5 3966 000CN 1 PCA 39 Separation discharge high voltage converter RH3 0234 000CN 1 501 Ring E XD2 1100 502CN 2 EN Illustrations and parts lists 465 Internal components 4 of 6 Figure 221 EN 466 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 58 Internal components parts 4 of 6 Ref Description Part number Qty 3 Tray rail assembly RG5 1851 000CN 1 5 Cable main motor RG5 3942 000CN 1 6 Cable carousel RG5 3923 000CN 1 7 Cover gear RB 1 9403 000CN 1 10 Transfer swi
275. n 144 life low 357 life out 357 low and out messages 75 parts list 447 percentage life remaining 81 replace frequency 105 resetting life count 78 transfer roller repetitive defects 422 transparencies automatic detection 167 defects 412 dull or dark 412 for ink jet printers 33 parts list 447 print speeds 20 process 167 reducing curl 378 sensors 167 171 173 using 31 See also media transport belt multi bin mailbox 192 transport belt motor multi bin mailbox 190 192 294 tray 1 assembly 450 484 configuring 72 error feeding media from 328 illustration 124 last page sensor 171 173 location 35 paper path test 83 paper pick up 170 171 paper sensor 171 173 paper width sensor 170 pick up assembly 244 450 483 pick up roller 124 pick up roller clutch 177 pick up solenoid 177 removing 237 selecting mode 90 size 73 358 type 72 unknown media 357 See also trays tray 2 assembly 475 configuring 73 illustration 124 last page sensor 173 location 35 media size sensing PCA 269 paper level sensors 173 paper out sensor 173 paper path test 83 paper pick up 168 169 paper size detection switches 175 pick up solenoid 177 sensor 173 See also trays tray 3 assembly 474 configuring 73 illustration 124 location 35 media size sensing PCA 269 paper level sensors 173 paper out sensor 173 paper path test 83 paper pick up 168 169 paper size detection switches 175 sensor 173 See also trays tray 4 con
276. n letterhead tray 3 plain legal sized paper and the 2 000 sheet input unit plain letter sized paper If the trays are configured correctly when you set up a print job you can choose the media type and size in the printer driver and the printer automatically prints from the correct input tray Selecting the mode for tray 1 Tray 1 has two modes FIRST mode and CASSETTE mode FIRST mode is the default mode for tray 1 In FIRST mode tray 1 functions as a multipurpose tray When tray 1 is in FIRST mode specify the media type and size in the printer driver The printer looks first for media loaded in tray 1 If the correct width of media is loaded in tray 1 the printer prints from tray 1 If the printer senses that the media in tray 1 is a different size than the media specified in the printer driver then the printer does not feed the media to prevent toner residue on subsequent pages In CASSETTE mode tray 1 functions as a regular input tray When tray 1 is in CASSETTE mode load media in tray 1 and configure the media type and size in the printer control panel 1 Press MENU until PAPER HANDLING MENU appears on the printer control panel display Press ITEM until TRAY 1 MODE appears on the display Press VALUE until the correct mode appears on the display 4 Press SELECT to save the selection An asterisk appears to the right of the selection 5 Press Go to bring the printer online 90 Chapter 3 Operational overvie
277. nao yano sseid Na Sa RIG NE Sm Hio uoleysibey uoljeredes uoneysibey yaqiesuelL TE Sis SE ais zie L G holo No Nolo ho Sd Sd 9 E0Z Ir vozir kh SOZ ARAY ALE ALJE KKK SEF eer Toles leo Josuas Jaded Josuas uosod Josues no JOSUAS A9 Zlosues ACL eyeld BuT ladedouz fell Joded z Ari jaded z LOELSd ZOELSd 8021Sd 9081Sd G0dLS doh tt 20 m l a 5 COR asec aser OF O JC J0Su9s INO Josues 348 Z Josues ERKI weir RT weer O wer KEJ weer lodedou g Ari Jaded Ae leded alles alles AR AR L0ELSd poelSd EOZLS ma Go M 1040W UIEN WOd dn yold vA ha oa jon op oo feo pe pd an AY ir M A an 5 gt e ala Fl lelels lolo 5 a zz mbl CC ie mm lak Aja ole a za 2555 Qlo LI IR 5 2 2 2 2 5 5 DI a ON Po G No JO No la 5 S 0 0 TDA o zizo A A zi TO mE SEES DSD MM zz J a E2 DOMTAR mo zogsoo s EEE SES cis Slap pbe no T Dr D D DA D DF PG F AR DIAM A im Mal aiie a Mslolalalnizloltelals T 5 colco ula fen a foo fro tn Pl CO Oo os tn oo ho III a As As pseog Jajonu09 TUM 000060 aa ae glz wm f Dw an b w mn eger Seer on x Bl Fa ppg S bgg PAPA aka 22822588 BbBobE SID YO TOTTOCTEC Zj lun e Qin a m m ASG VOd Bursues 1910 9 SEM PIPE oogsr N VOd pe cy i abe jon ybiy move 929r Wer Whee eBieyosip L d s Yd qns o UOHEIe 4ser AA detr 3f Logs Pala Z093 wo PG Oo fe on pko UI err ATA nn EOSLT rr od F Josues J AJep Sd E S Josues 9 Bulsn4 NAA
278. ng right lower door lever 216 22 RB1 6488 000CN Roller paper 216 16G RB1 6491 000CN Tray face up 214 11 506 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams EN Table 81 Numerical parts list continued Part number Description Figure Ref RB1 6492 000CN Cover power switch 214 12 RB1 6557 000CN Flag paper sensing 228 48 RB1 6558 020CN Spring torsion 228 49 RB1 6692 000CN Lever paper sensing 236 11 RB1 6894 000CN Cassette size plate 242 73 RB1 6909 000CN Spring leaf 220 6 RB1 7677 000CN Metallic retaining tab plate stop 243 94 RB1 7832 020CN Cover right 242 87 RB1 7835 000CN Metallic retaining spring spring leaf 243 93 RB1 9401 000CN Duct rear lower air 218 4 RB1 9403 000CN Cover gear 221 7 RB1 9424 000CN Gear 11T 220 7 RB1 9526 000CN Roller tray 1 pick up 234 10 RB1 9537 000CN Cover density sensor 216 32 RB1 9547 000CN Cover tray 1 side gear 216 46 RB1 9580 000CN Lever registration roller 221 13 RB1 9586 000CN Cover sensor 231 6 RB1 9617 000CN Brush cleaning 216 35A RB1 9675 000CN Spring compression 220 4 RB1 9682 000CN Duct 223 4 RB1 9704 000CN Lever holding right 239 8 RB1 9705 000CN Lever holding left 239 9 RB1 9748 000CN Lever release 239 25 RB1 9751 000CN Holder flapper 237 12 RB1 9789 000CN Cover carousel stop 218 11 RB1 9798 000CN Spring torsion 216 26 RB 1 9804 000CN Waste toner tray 217 5 RB1 9805 000CN Cover cable
279. ng PCAs 270 Front cover of the 2 000 sheet input unit 272 Back cover removal 4 273 Left cover removal 00000 c eee eee 274 Vertical transfer unit VTU 275 Right cover with VTU removed 2 6 Tray 4 removal a saa te dine DA KH tnke Sere KAG mb 277 Paper pick up assembly 278 CONTONE PGA wax tee ara tac ara ett baon Bran ban 279 Screw on front LED PCA assembly 280 FOOL LED PON 43352 pn AMALAA AWRA deacons 281 Power supply 0000 eee eee eee 281 Main drive assembly 0 0000 c eee eee 282 Paper quantity switch assembly 283 Paper size switch assembly 284 Tension springs eee 285 Front and back covers 287 TOO COVOR recan rrea NA KALA NAAN sees we 288 POWEFSUPPIN mamiss EGG A AB NANG 289 Paper DING pagaralan NA eee Be eee eee en AD 290 EN Figure 160 Figure 161 Figure 162 Figure 163 Figure 164 Figure 165 Figure 166 Figure 167 Figure 168 Figure 169 Figure 170 Figure 171 Figure 172 Figure 173 Figure 174 Figure 175 Figure 176 Figure 177 Figure 178 Figure 179 Figure 180 Figure 181 Figure 182 Figure 183 Figure 184 Figure 185 Figure 186 Figure 187 Figure 188 Figure 189 Figure 190 Figure 191 Figure 192 Figure 193 Figure 194 Figure 195 Figure 196 Figure 197 Figure 198 Figure 199 Figu
280. ng assembly RG5 3010 000CN 1 12 Cable delivery connector RG5 3147 000CN 1 13 Lever registration roller RB 1 9580 000CN 1 18 Main drive assembly RG5 3066 000CN 1 20 Cable delivery RG5 3104 000CN 1 21 Motor main M4 RH7 1323 000CN 1 24 Photo interrupter IC TLP1241 WG8 5362 000CN 1 26 Screw RS M3 x 6 XA9 0849 000CN 10 EN Illustrations and parts lists 467 Internal components 5 of 6 Figure 222 EN 468 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 59 Internal components parts 5 of 6 Ref Description Part number Qty 3 Cover cable RB1 9948 000CN 1 7 Shield case assembly RG5 3023 000CN 1 7D Rail PCA RB2 0005 000CN 1 14 Gear 14T RB1 9955 000CN 1 15 Gear 14T RB1 9956 000CN 1 17 Transfer drum RG5 3039 000CN 1 18 Laser scanner unit RG5 3936 000CN 1 24 Sensor assembly toner waste RG5 3934 000CN 1 37 Screw w washer M4 x 12 XA9 0940 000CN 4 EN Illustrations and parts lists 469 Internal components 6 of 6 Figure 223 EN 470 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 60 Internal components parts 6 of 6 Ref Description Part number Qty 3 Holder fan RF5 2025 000CN 1 4 Duct RB1 9682 000CN 1 7 Fan 2 FM2 RH7 1373 000CN 1 8 Fan 1
281. nning an internal test to verify operation When the printer is finished the printer returns to the ready state but remains offline Event log message 8 lt n gt lt xxx gt lt XXX gt Failure code Action 1 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer 2 Replace the offending EIO accessory Event log message None Action Press Go to bring the printer online FACE UP OUTPUT BIN FULL Description The top output bin on the multi bin mailbox is full FUSER LIFE LOW REPLACE KIT Description The fuser and paper rollers are almost past their specified life The fuser kit has approximately 1 000 pages until the end of life warning will appear Event log message None Action 1 Remove all media from the top output bin in the multi bin mailbox to continue printing 2 Check the functionality of the Bin Full flag Event log message None Action Although printing can continue the fuser kit should be replaced for optimum printer operation Replace the fuser kit and reset the fuser counter by pressing SELECT before attempting to print or use the RESETS menu on the printer control panel FUSER LIFE OUT REPLACE KIT Description The fuser and paper rollers are past their specified life If TONER LOW is set to CONTINUE in the Configuration Menu printing can continue with degraded print quality Otherwise printing will be halted 344 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Event log message None
282. noid SL2 Left face up output bin solenoid EN Paper path 177 Fusing and delivery unit The upper and lower rollers in the fuser and the face up and face down delivery rollers are driven by the main motor M4 Paper separated from the transfer drum is fed into the fuser and delivered from the unit via the fusing roller and the fusing delivery roller The fusing delivery sensor detects paper delivered from the fuser The printer has a left face up output bin and a top face down output bin and diverts the media to the output bins using the face up flapper When the face up output bin solenoid drive signal turns off the face up solenoid moves the face up flapper to face the face up output bin From there the paper is delivered to the face up output bin When the face up solenoid drive signal turns on the paper is delivered to the face down output bin Paper delivered to the face down output bin is detected by the face down output bin delivery sensor When paper fills the face down output bin it is detected by the face down output bin paper full sensor 178 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN Figure 63 EN Controller board 2 3 Carousel motor PCA 4 5 PS10 PS11 TU Face down delivery roller M4 Face up deflector N Upperfusing roller B Ff N PS1903 Face up gt delivery roller bo gt SL2 S2 Fuser delivery roller Fusing and delivery unit Low
283. not match the color the user selected Some applications such as Adobe PageMaker Illustrator and Photoshop bypass the printer driver altogether If color information is not sent the printer has no way of knowing the white point black point and chromaticity assumptions used by the application This mismatch can cause color differences Matching screen colors Matching input on screen and output colors is a very sophisticated process The input device software and output device each influence the ability to select and produce printed color output To improve color matching between the printed output and the monitor e Turn off any color matching feature in the software that does not specifically mention ColorSync ICM or ICC e Calibrate the monitor One option for monitor calibration is the Colorific software included on the color productivity CD e fa color management system is being used make sure the input monitor and output composite profiles are correct e lf acolor management system is available try turning it off or on to see if changing the setting changes the color match Compare monitor and output colors by placing the output in a neutral surrounding 18 to 24 inches 46 to 61 cm away from the monitor This will help the eye make the transition from the monitor white point blue and the paper white point Image formation troubleshooting 385 Image defects troubleshooting Image orientation Unless
284. not come on replace the paper deck PCA or the power supply EN 2 000 sheet input unit troubleshooting 429 DIP switch settings The following table shows the position of the DIP switches to run each of the 2 000 sheet input unit diagnostic tests Table 47 DIP switch settings for troubleshooting test procedures Standalone DIP switch Normal setting Motor test running test Sensor test 1 Off On On Off 2 Off On Off Off Off Off On On Standalone running test This test verifies that the 2 000 sheet input unit is functioning properly For this test use the service LEDs See page 429 for an interpretation of the service LED patterns CAUTION To prevent excessive media jams during this test feed only 6 to 8 pages 1 Ensure that paper is in the tray 2 Set the DIP switches on the 2 000 sheet input units controller PCA for the standalone running test See page 430 for an explanation of the settings 3 Use the switch that is located on the unit s power supply to switch to diagnostic mode e lf the unit does not work there is no paper movement and the lower service LED flashes in a pattern that indicates the problem See page 429 for an interpretation of the service LED patterns 4 To stop the test turn the power supply switch back to operational mode and set the DIP switches on the controller PCA to the off position Open the VTU and remove any media from the paper path 430 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN
285. nsity sensor PCA after the printer is turned on If the voltage is not about 24 V replace the density sensor PCA Replace the controller board Event log message None Action No action is required For more information on changing the printer control panel display language see page 84 EN Table 40 Unnumbered printer messages continued LEFT OUTPUT BIN FULL Description The left face up output bin on the printer is full Note This message appears only if the optional multi bin mailbox is installed LOCK TONER LEVER Description The blue lever inside the clear door is not locked Event log message None Action Remove all media from the left face up output bin of the printer to continue printing Event log message None Action 1 Open the front door of the printer open the clear door and swing the blue toner lock lever on the carousel to the right 2 Remove the toner cartridge and then reinstall it making sure the cartridge is all the way in the printer 3 Swing the blue toner lock lever on the carousel to the left until it clicks and then close the clear and front doors MAILBOX COMM ERROR CHECK CABLES CYCLE POWER Description Communication with the multi bin mailbox has been lost MAILBOX lt x gt OUTPUT BIN FULL Description A mailbox in the multi bin mailbox is full lt x gt Mailbox 1 through 8 MAILBOX NOT ATTACHED Description The multi bin mailbox
286. nter away from the direct flow of exhaust from air ventilation systems 24 Chapter 1 Product information EN Space requirements Figure 1 Space requirements 1 Top view with optional multi bin mailbox and 2 000 sheet input unit 2 Front view with optional multi bin mailbox and 2 000 sheet input unit EN Site requirements 25 Media requirements Selecting media Many types of paper and other print media can be used with the printer within certain specifications Using media that does not meet the specifications outlined in this chapter can increase the incidence of media jams contribute to repair and maintenance costs and cause premature wear print quality problems and problems requiring service This service might not be covered by the HP warranty or service agreements Before purchasing media or specialized forms test a small quantity in the printer Make sure your media supplier obtains and understands the media specifications in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide For ordering information see page 445 Note It is possible that media could meet all of the specifications in this chapter and still not print satisfactorily This might be caused by abnormal characteristics of the printing environment such as extremes in temperature and humidity e Forcomplete media specifications see the HP LaserJet Printer Family Pape
287. nter message troubleshooting 327 Table 39 Numbered printer messages continued 57 3 FAN FAILURE Description One of the cooling fans failed 3 Fan 3 FM 3 Event log message 57 00 03 Action Caution Turn the printer off and do not operate the printer in this condition or it can be seriously damaged 1 Turn the printer off and on to reset it 2 Reconnect connectors J645 and J647 on the main relay PCA J18 and J74 relay connectors and connector J227 on the controller board 3 Reconnect connector J641 on the main relay PCA and connector J102 on the power supply 4 Measure the voltage across J645 3 FAN3ON and J645 1 GND on the main relay PCA after the printer is turned on If the voltage changes from O V to 24 V replace fan 3 5 Measure the voltage across connector J641 1 24 VB and J641 4 GND on the main relay PCA after the printer is turned on If the voltage is not 24 V replace the main relay PCA 6 Measure the voltage across connector J641 1 24 VB and J641 4 GND on the main relay PCA after the printer is turned on If the voltage is not 24 V replace the main relay PCA Check the AC power supply If the problem is not rectified after the printer is turned off and on again find the cause of activation of the overcurrent overvoltage detection circuit in the power supply Wait for more than two minutes before turning the printer back on 9 Replace the controller board 58 1 ER
288. nverter 268 subrelay 228 tray 2 and tray 3 media size sensing 269 PCAs 2 000 sheet input unit controller 279 front LED 280 PCAs multi bin mailbox controller 299 diagnostic LED 307 user status LED 308 PCBs See PCAs PCAs 2 000 sheet input unit PCAs multibin mailbox PCL printer command language configuring 75 configuring font information 76 memory full 351 personality support 20 printing font list 71 symbol sets 77 personalities configuring 75 supported 20 photo sensors 241 pick up motor description and illustration 164 location 159 pick up process See paper pick up pick up rollers 2 000 sheet input unit 182 185 printer 238 pick up unit cover sensor 173 paper sensor 166 173 pigments 32 126 127 pitch configuring PCL font 76 PJL operation failed 351 plain media See media plate registration 399 point size for PCL font 76 ports BNC 62 LocalTalk 62 parallel 37 64 resetting I O 355 post charger cleaning 99 post charging unit illustration 124 process 135 POST error 333 PostScript PS configuring 75 errors 75 font list 71 fonts 20 memory full 355 personality support 20 power button 35 connection 36 consumption 21 cord connection 60 61 distribution circuit diagram 152 pack 61 requirements 21 switch 175 Power Save mode circuit 153 configuring 75 electrical specifications 21 fan operation 165 on 351 signal process 153 power supply circuit 155 removing 252 power supply 2 000 sheet input
289. o print after the transfer kit low warning The formatter counts the number of printed images after the transfer kit low warning occurs When the number reaches 150 000 pages or 300 000 images the controller board signals TRANSFER KIT OUT REPLACE KIT End of life behavior is determined by the TONER LOW setting on the printer control panel see page 75 Printing can continue after the transfer kit out signal however print quality might be degraded and the number of jams might increase Because there is not a memory mechanism in the transfer devices it is necessary for users and service personnel to reset the transfer count when a new transfer kit is installed Also if the formatter board is replaced the transfer count must be reset in the Service menu Fuser kit life detection The controller board senses the fuser kit life expiration based upon page count stored in the formatter When the page count reaches 99 000 pages FUSER LIFE LOW REPLACE KIT is displayed on the printer control panel The printer is still able to print after the fuser kit life expiration warning The formatter counts the number of printed images after notification occurs When the number reaches the 100 000 pages the controller board signals FUSER LIFE OUT REPLACE KIT End of life behavior is determined by the TONER LOW setting on the printer control panel see page 75 Printing can continue after the fuser life out signal but print quality might be degraded
290. oblem is related to the media Transparencies printed to the left face up output bin can show this defect because the transparencies stick to each other Try printing in smaller batches 408 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Faint print See also Mottled process colors or poor transfer on page 408 A faint print image is a defect characterized by the image being developed at a reduced print density in any of the primary colors CMYK e Ensure media meets the specifications listed in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide e The moisture content of the media is uneven or too high or some areas of media might reject toner Try media from a different source or from an unopened ream of media Also make sure the printer is operating within the environmental specifications listed on page 21 e Excessively rough paper can cause transfer problems Change to a smooth xerographic paper e A toner cartridge might be running out of toner Check for a TONER LOW REPLACE lt color gt or TONER OUT REPLACE lt color gt message on the printer control panel Replace the toner cartridge indicated on the display elf the faint print or missing print is on the second side of a duplex page the media might be too light for proper transfer For media specifications see page 28 e Print a configuration page and verify the transfer kit is not past its maximum life If necessary replace the transfer kit e Verify media type s
291. ol panel 316 warranty printer 55 toner cartridge 55 waste toner cleaning 102 collection 140 feed roller 140 level detection 143 tray 102 watermarks 33 wavy patterns 101 websites for support 50 weight media in duplexer 31 media in input trays 28 printer 22 wet media 403 wheels developer DSD 421 width of printer 22 wiring diagrams 440 wrinkled pages 378 write protected hard disk 342 wrong page request 438 Y yellow dark print 413 detail value 79 smooth value 79 streaks 408 yellow toner cartridge installing 88 location 104 replace frequency 105 Index 547 548 Index EN Erect Copyright 1998 Hewlett Packard Co Manual Part No C3983 90954 C3983 90954
292. on Multi bin mailbox unlatched from Check alignment of the multi bin the printer mailbox VIM The multi bin mailbox is not properly Check the attachment clips attached to the printer Check adjustable casters Check the interlock switch Flipper error Check for media jam in the flipper During the flipper calibration an assembly area abnormal reference voltage was Check cable connections encountered Replace flipper assembly Replace the multi bin mailbox controller PCA Face up bin is too full Remove media from the face up WA The face up bin is too full bin LL MMU Check for jammed sensor flag Replace the flipper assembly Check for proper cable connection Jam in flipper area Open jam access door and check Time out condition at the entry area for media jam or out of place WML flipper assembly shaft UML Check for jammed paper sensor Replace the flipper assembly Replace the multi bin mailbox controller PCA Jam in belt Check for media jam in the Time out condition in the transport transport belt system delivery LA WLLL belt head assembly Ensure free movement of the transport belt both belts Ensure that belts are parallel in the transport belt system Check that the metal tape is in place and in good condition Replace the transport belt motor Replace the multi bin mailbox controller PCA Replace the delivery head assembly Sliders problem at the head Check for media jam
293. on at normal speed When the controller board detects that the carousel rotation has reached the slow down position the controller board reduces the carousel speed until the controller board senses that the carousel rotation has reached the stop position Figure 46 shows an example of the carousel in the yellow cartridge stop position where the printer is ready for yellow development The yellow toner cartridge is facing the imaging drum Cyan cartridge fetch stop position Magenta cartridge stop position flag Cyan cartridge fetch slow down position flag Cyan cartridge slow down position flag Magenta cartridge Cyan cartridge slow down position flag stop position flag Yellow cartridge fetch slow down position flag Black cartridge slow down position flag Magenta cartridge fetch stop position Yellow cartridge Yellow cartridge stop fetch stop position 7 gt position flag Magenta Home position flag Yellow cartridge cartridge fetch slow Black cartridge slow down down position flag stop position flag position flag Figure 46 Carousel control EN Carousel stop solenoid The carousel lock control fixes the carousel by pushing the stopper lever against the carousel when the cartridge is moved to the fetch position When a user presses the carousel rotation button while replacing the color toner cartridge the carousel begins to rotate then stops in the color toner cartridge fetch posit
294. on the imaging drum is transferred to the transfer drum leaving some toner on the imaging drum surface Also additional toner is placed on the imaging drum surface when the transfer drum is cleaned 11 Imaging drum cleaning To prepare for the next printing operation the cleaner blade scrapes the residual toner off the imaging drum surface The scraped toner particles are trapped with the sweeper strip and collected into the waste toner case Waste toner Stirring T plate ai IP 4 4J Waste toner case Waste toner feed roller 2 Waste toner screw Sweeper strip Discharge brush Figure 38 Imaging drum cleaning block 140 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN Fusing block The toner image placed on the paper during transfer adheres to the paper by static electricity and a light touch will smear the image During fusing the four toner colors are melted on the paper to create a permanent image 12 Fusing The surfaces of the upper and lower fusing rollers are coated with silicone which has excellent offset prevention performance The upper fusing roller is charged with a negative DC bias to repel the toner and help prevent the toner on the paper from adhering to the roller Halogen heater Upper roller Toner Ga Paper Lower roller DC bias Figure 39 Fusing the toner EN Image formation 141 Consumable detection mechanisms Note For information on resetting the consumable lif
295. one REPLACE lt color gt Description The printer is almost out of the specified toner The printer remains online and ready to print however the print quality might be degraded lt color gt Cyan magenta yellow or black Action Although printing can continue the toner cartridge should be replaced for optimum printer operation Note Do not shake the toner cartridge in attempts to extend the cartridge life For more information on configuring the printer response to this message see the description of the TONER LOW setting on page 75 TONER OUT REPLACE lt color gt Description The printer is out of the specified toner and cannot continue lt color gt Cyan magenta yellow or black Event log message None Action 1 Replace the toner cartridge specified 2 Reconnect connector J226 on the controller board and connector J5001 on high voltage converter 1 PCA 3 Check the contact for remaining toner detection on the black toner cartridge and the contact for remaining toner detection on the printer for deformation or damage e Replace defective parts Replace the black toner cartridge if it is defective e Check the contacts If they are disconnected return them to their correct positions 4 Replace the high voltage converter 1 PCA 5 Replace the controller board TOO MANY FILE STORAGE DEVICES REMOVE EITHER DISK Description The printer can support only one physical print
296. ontrol panel display 7 Press SELECT Note Turn the printer off and on to exit the formatter diagnostics EN Aids to troubleshooting 375 Cold reset The following are effects of performing a cold reset While a cold reset is being performed all control panel keys are ignored A cold reset changes all user accessible printer variables stored in NVRAM to their factory defaults except for the following items page counts fuser life count transfer life count multi bin mailbox mode display language Color adjust values revert to the factory defaults User accessible EIO values are reset to the factory defaults by a cold reset None of the service mode variables such as the following are affected by a cold reset serial numbers model name model number registration values cold reset paper size The event log is not cleared Performing a cold reset 1 Print a configuration page see page 361 to record the previous printer settings Turn the printer off Hold down Go while turning the printer on Release Go after COLD RESET appears on the printer control panel display COLD RESET in English appears on the display for one second to verify that the key sequence has been recognized followed by the power on self test message Once the power on self test is finished the message RESTORING FACTORY SETTINGS displays in English 376 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Fault log The fault log is implemented wit
297. ontrol panel menu map overview continued I O TIMEOUT FACTORY DEFAULT PARALLEL ADV RESET FUNCTIONS RESET ACTIVE I O RESET ALL I O RESET TRANSFER LIFE COUNT RESET FUSER LIFE COUNT I O MENU RESETS MENU COLOR ADJUST SERVICE MODE MENU MENU 3 PRINT TEST PAGE NVRAM SETTING BLACK SMOOTH FORMATTER VALUE DIAGNOSTICS CYAN SMOOTH PAPER PATH VALUE DEVELOPER MAGENTA MOTOR SMOOTH VALUE DRUM MOTOR YELLOW SMOOTH VALUE SENSOR MONITOR BLACK DETAIL VALUE EXIT SERVICE MODE CYAN DETAIL VALUE MAGENTA DETAIL VALUE YELLOW DETAIL VALUE 3 The Service Mode Menu can only be entered by pressing VALUE and ITEM keys at the same time The menu items will not be visible until the Service Mode Menu is entered 70 Chapter 3 Operational overview EN Information Menu Press SELECT to print The printer displays READY when finished Table 13 Information Menu Item Description action PRINT MENU MAP Shows current settings of all menu items PRINT CONFIG PAGE Shows the configuration of the printer including installed options and serial numbers PRINT PCL FONT None Shows installed PCL fonts including soft LIST fonts PRINT PS FONT None Shows installed PostScript fonts LIST PRINT LASERJET None Prints a demonstration page for sales DEMONSTRATION purposes PRINT FILE DIRECTORY None Appears only if the printer has a hard disk installed PRINT ElO PAGE None Appears only if an EIO device
298. ontroller board If one of the bins has been removed or is not seated correctly the delivery head assembly will not complete the scan and will send an error message to the printer control panel Multi bin mailbox 187 Communication link C link cables Communication with the multi bin mailbox is handled through the EPH controller board on the printer The information coming from the EPH controller board is carried by the C link cables that connect the EPH controller board PCA to all the devices that support the C link protocol Figure 66 shows the C link connections Figure 66 188 Chapter 5 Theory of operation Formatter ma Control oe gt ee g a Multi bin 2000 sheet mailbox input unit ee ee ar ot or Multi bin mailbox cabling Long C link cable 178 cm 70 inches Short C link cable 61 cm 24 inches output ee input EN Sensors switches motors and controller board PCA Figure 67 and table 38 illustrate and describe the multi bin mailbox sensors switches motors and controller board PCA T 11 2 12 13 3 Bu ETAN i 7 a LES 9 NA Figure 67 Multi bin mailbox sensors EN Multi bin mailbox 189 Table 38 Multi bin mailbox sensors switches motors and controller board PCA Ref Control device Description 1 M2
299. or M3 This motor is located to the left of fan 1 1 Remove the rear cover see page 222 2 Unplug 1 connector callout 1 Cartridge motor 3 Remove 4 screws on the motor callout 2 and pull the motor out 254 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Main motor M4 This motor is located to the right of the controller board behind the formatter pan A 1 Remove the rear cover see page 222 SD 2 Remove the formatter board and formatter pan see page 230 and page 248 Unplug 1 connector Remove 4 screws callout 1 and pull the motor away from the chassis a Wun KH3 2185 i 5 LULU Maari a ae Ki ee lil LER EKN GHH ng CH ki Figure 125 Main motor EN Rear assemblies 255 Carousel motor PCA This PCA is located on the upper right side of the rear of the printer 1 Remove the rear cover see page 222 2 Unplug 6 connectors 3 Remove 1 screw callout 1 Carousel motor PCA 4 Release 3 tabs from the PCA callout 2 5 Lift the PCA out 256 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN EN Carousel motor M1 The carousel motor is located behind the fan 1 housing 1 Remove the top cover assembly see page 211 2 Remove the rear cover see page 222 3 Remove the formatter board and formatter pan see page 230 and page 248 4 Remove the 5 screws from the sheet metal cover plate and lift it off 5 Remove 4 screws from the fan 1 assembly callout 1 I j F x i 1
300. orage 23 electrical 21 humidity 21 image skew 399 media 26 media storage 27 operating environment 21 printer dimensions 22 temperature 21 23 speckled print 403 speeds factors affecting 20 paper feed 167 print 20 splotchy print 408 spots background toner scatter 407 springs tension 2 000 sheet input unit 285 stacker output bin full 355 statements Finland laser 44 Korean EMI 43 laser safety 43 VCCI Japan 43 warranty 55 status LEDs See LEDs status lights See LEDs storage consumable specifications 23 media 27 printer specifications 21 too many devices 356 stray toner 410 streaks yellow or black 408 stripes black brown or orange 407 subrelay PCA 228 subscribing to list server 50 subtractive color process 126 supplies ordering 49 53 support Customer Care Center CCC 54 Customer Information Centers 53 Customer Support Sales Center 53 Dealer Response Line 53 font 52 HP ASAP 52 HP Direct 53 HP FIRST 52 HP JetDirect 439 HP Software Distribution Center 53 list server 50 support continued technical 52 third party 439 websites 50 Support Materials Europe SME ordering information 49 switches black toner cartridge 175 carousel button 175 defective 378 delivery cover front cover 175 imaging drum 175 names and locations 175 paper size detection 176 paper size detection tray 2 175 paper size detection tray 3 175 power 175 reset 175 right cover 175 test print 175 thermo 173 toner cartridge cover
301. orking properly see page 432 426 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN EN Status LED descriptions The status light on the front of the unit provides status information Table 45 Status LED on the 2 000 sheet input unit State Description Resolution Solid green The unit is on and ready None required Solid amber The unit is experiencing a Isolate the problem using one hardware malfunction of the other procedures described in this section Flashing The unit has a media jam or a Clear the jam or remove the amber page needs to be removed page from the 2 000 sheet input unit even if the page is not jammed The VTU might be open Close the door Off The printer might be in Power Press Go Save mode The unit is not receiving Check the power supply and power the power cables 2 000 sheet input unit troubleshooting 427 Service LED descriptions Figure 206 Rear view of 2 000 sheet input unit 1 Service LEDs 2 DIP switches 3 Power supply Note Be sure to turn the power supply off and set all DIP switches to the off position when you finish the test or the unit will not work The DIP switch is ON if it is to the right The DIP switch is OFF if it is to the left Note To go from one test to another or to change the DIP switch settings turn the power supply on the 2 000 sheet input unit to operational mode Reset the DIP switches on the controller PCA and then switch the power supply back to diagnosti
302. ort 1 The message should not interfere with normal printing through LocalTalk If it does not clear within approximately five minutes there is a problem with the print server or the network To prevent the message from appearing during normal operation connect a BNC T connector with two 50 ohm terminators to the BNC port Connecting the printer to the network 63 Connecting a parallel cable Figure 11 Parallel cable connection LI To print through the parallel port the printer requires a 25 pin male micro 36 pin male C size parallel cable that is IEEE 1284 compliant The cable is included with the base model of this printer only It must be purchased separately for other printer models 64 Chapter 3 Operational overview EN Changing the printer control panel overlay Replace the printer control panel overlay with the one included for your language if applicable Then configure the printer control panel to show printer messages in your language see page 84 Figure 12 Changing the printer control panel overlay 1 Insert a thin rigid object under the two edges of the overlay on the printer control panel and pull up evenly on both sides of the overlay until it comes off 2 Place the new overlay over the printer control panel and snap it into place EN Changing the printer control panel overlay 65 Printe
303. oto diode and that information is converted to digital values and stored on the controller board The controller board uses this information to control appropriate developing bias and primary charging bias values to stabilize density of each color Density sensing pattern Transfer drum LED Density sensor Density sensor Calibration occurs at the following intervals e After the power is turned on e After 50 pages in one page mode are printed after initial power on e After 95 pages in one page mode are printed e After the printer is revived from Power Save if Power Save has been on for more that 30 minutes When a toner cartridge is installed When an imaging drum cartridge is installed When environment is changed by the environment change control The density control will only be executed if all of the printer doors are closed and all of the printer components are detected 148 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN Transfer belt control During secondary transfer the controller board activates the transfer belt press clutch CL4 The transfer belt is normally away from the transfer drum except while pushed against the transfer drum during secondary transfer When the secondary transfer is complete the transfer belt is removed from the transfer drum when the controller board sets the CL4 to off Paper Transfer drum lt Bia on N Transfer belt press cam H Transfer belt AO CL
304. oubleshooting EN Repetitive defects troubleshooting 419 Color developer roller 421 Charging roller aa 421 Black developer roller 421 Gleaning roller aaa ciec06a0de 44eebcedee e064 421 Developer DSD wheels 421 kanser oleh Game iol d kaka 422 Transiter ONUM a Ka KANAN ache aaah ad ee 422 FUSO samba Mate Bea s Goes aes ete ANN LANA SE 424 Imaging GruUM 2 ee 424 Transfer belt cc cee ee eee 425 2 000 sheet input unit troubleshooting 426 Ways to troubleshoot the unit 426 Status LED descriptions 005 427 Service LED descriptions 428 Standalone running test 430 MOTO TOSE o aisha caida Na KAN Ghee aed a a Ma ma 431 SENSO LEST e na Gad AA KO Akda mb Dead Hand 432 Multi bin mailbox troubleshooting 434 Switching the multi bin mailbox to test mode 434 Power up sequence test 435 Paper pai TSE wara paw och he aie KG 435 Multi bin mailbox LED descriptions 436 Communications troubleshooting 439 HP network interface support 439 Third party network interface support 439 Dagas escacier NANANA eo ee AA 440 Chapter contents 313 314 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Pre troubleshooting checklist Note EN Before t
305. oubleshooting incorrect registration as an engine problem check the margins and image placement in the software application If the same file consistently prints in the wrong location on the page suspect a software problem If the image is late on the page the paper is arriving at the drum transfer interface too soon Check engine settings 1 and 2 in the Service Mode Menu to ensure that the values match the registration sticker on the printer inside the front of the printer to the left of the printer control panel however the last two digits of the engine settings might vary from those printed on the sticker Image skew See figure 193 on page 389 for an example The specification for image skew is less than 1 5 mm over a 250 mm span Image skew might be caused by burrs on the paper registration plate or paper not feeding from the paper tray correctly e Check that the media does not stick together at the edges Verify that the media meets the specifications listed in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide e Ensure the media guides are adjusted properly against the edge of the media e Carefully examine the printed output for signs of nicking or folding These marks might indicate problems elsewhere in the paper path For instance imperfections in a paper guide might stop the page inside the printer e Check the paper pick up rollers for signs of wear such as glazing and cracking Replace the pick up rolle
306. ough the printer frame to the right upper cover callout 1 Two connectors are plugged into the controller board and two connectors are inline connectors It might be easier to disconnect the connectors from the rear of the printer and pull the wires through the printer frame than to unplug the connectors from the right upper door Connectors on the right upper door 4 Close the door to a 45 degree angle and release the spring loaded hinges on the right side Doors and covers 217 5 With needle nose pliers remove the e ring from the hinge callout 2 on the left side of the door gt Figure 88 E ring Remove the front right cover see page 209 Rotate the plastic tab located on the left hinge up to a 90 degree angle 8 Lift the door slightly to the left and pull it away from the chassis 218 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Removing the right cover subassembly Note Use this procedure if you want to separate the right cover subassembly from the right upper cover 1 Open the right upper cover assembly slightly 2 Pull the right side of the subassembly slightly to the right and pull outward on the right side to snap it out of place 3 Move the subassembly slightly to the left and to remove it Note There is a small spring on the left side of the subassembly be careful it does not fall off Notes on reinstalling elf the spring falls off the subassembly slide it onto the pin and through the
307. ought into contact with the imaging drum when the carousel rotates The black toner cartridge is set separately and is always in contact with the imaging drum When the area on the imaging drum exposed by the laser beam nears the developing cylinder the charged toner particles move from the developer to the image surface because of the potential differences between the developing cylinder and the exposed imaging drum Imaging Stirring plate Developing lind DC bias Toner feed roller ee Z Figure 31 Black toner cartridge left and color toner cartridge right development EN Image formation 133 Transfer block The image is built up on the transfer drum in layers of toner The toner is then transferred to the paper The transfer block includes the transfer of the toner from the imaging drum to the transfer drum then from the transfer drum to the paper 5 Primary transfer A positive DC bias is applied to the transfer drum during printing to transfer the toner that is on the imaging drum to the transfer drum This process occurs in sequence for the four colors yellow magenta cyan black For full color printing as the transfer steps proceed for the four colors the amount of toner with negative charge increases on the transfer drum As a result the DC bias must increase to transfer the toner on top of the toner that is already on the transfer drum Toner Conductive layer Aluminum layer
308. ox high voltage converter 1 assemblies 262 removing 263 removing PCA 262 high voltage converter 2 assemblies 264 removing 265 removing PCA 264 high voltage converter 3 See separation discharge high voltage converter high voltage power supply circuit 155 horizontal lines all colors 402 lines one color 401 lines yellow or black 408 HP ASAP Automated Support Access Program 52 HP Automated Support Access Program ASAP 52 HP Customer Care Online 50 HP dealer finding 445 HP Direct 53 HP Distribution ordering information 49 HP Driver Distribution Center 53 HP Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology FIRST Europe 52 U S 52 HP FIRST Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology Europe 52 U S 52 HP JetDirect internal print server See print server HP LaserJet printing demonstration 71 HP Technical Training 50 HPD Hewlett Packard Distribution ordering information 49 humidity automatic environment change control 147 sensor 147 sensor error 323 specifications 21 23 Index 533 534 Index I O input output parallel advanced functions 78 resetting 78 resetting ports 355 switching 20 timeout 78 I O Menu 78 identification of printer 34 illegal output error 325 image formation cleaning 138 cleaning roller charging 138 fusing 141 imaging drum cleaning 140 laser beam exposure 132 post charging 135 preconditioning exposure 131 primary charging 132 process 129 secondary transfer 136 troubleshooting
309. p 215 2 RG0 0112 000CN Cover assembly front 214 3 RG0 0113 000CN Cover assembly left upper 214 4 RG0 0115 000CN Cover assembly rear 215 5 508 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams EN Table 81 Numerical parts list continued Part number Description Figure Ref RG5 1845 000CN PCA cassette size sensing 241 1 RG5 1851 000CN Tray rail assembly 221 3 RG5 1859 000CN Arm sensor 228 51 RG5 1860 000CN PCA paper pick up 228 103 RG5 1884 000CN PCA tray 1 241 6 RG5 2166 000CN Paper quantity sensor PCA assembly 243 97 RG5 2168 000CN Paper size sensor PCA assembly 243 98 RG5 2644 000CN Cover top label included 242 88 RG5 3007 000CN Registration frame assembly 231 RG5 3008 000CN Transfer mount assembly 223 36 RG5 3009 000CN Registration roller assembly 232 RG5 3010 000CN Transfer swing assembly 221 10 RG5 3022 000CN Face up solenoid assembly 218 140 RG5 3023 000CN Shield case assembly 222 7 RG5 3026 000CN PCA high voltage converter 1 220 20 RG5 3031 000CN Connector holder assembly 218 15 RG5 3032 000CN PCA photosensor 231 7 RG5 3033 000CN Developing rotary 224 36 RG5 3034 000CN Sensor assembly color toner 220 8 RG5 3036 000CN PCA main relay 241 2 RG5 3037 000CN PCA controller board 241 3 RG5 3039 000CN Transfer drum 222 17 RG5 3044 000CN Transfer drum contact assembly 220 2 RG5 3045 000CN Lever assembly pressure 219 7 RG5 3046 000CN Lev
310. page 52 for appropriate phone numbers and information Safety information 45 Ozone safety Ozone emission The corona assemblies found in laser printers and photocopiers generate ozone gas O3 as a by product of the electrophotographic process Ozone is generated only while the printer is printing while the coronas are energized This HP LaserJet printer contains an charcoal filter to protect office air quality See page 105 for suggested replacement intervals Ozone standards Standards for exposure to ozone have been established by the Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration DOL OSHA and the American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists ACGIH These standards are 0 1 parts per million as a time weighted average and a ceiling limit respectively All HP LaserJet family printers meet these standards when shipped from the factory Recommendations for minimizing ozone exposure Some people are extremely sensitive to ozone In such cases it is advisable to position the printer away from the sensitive user Also a more frequent filter replacement might be necessary Almost all ozone concerns arise from abnormal site or operating conditions The following conditions might generate an ozone complaint e installation of multiple laser printers in a confined area e extremely low relative humidity poor room ventilation the exhaust port of the printer is directed towards the face of
311. pears on the display Press VALUE until TOP OUTPUT BIN or LEFT OUTPUT BIN appears on the display 10 Press SELECT to choose an output destination 11 Press ITEM until EXECUTE TEST appears on the display 12 Press SELECT to perform the paper path test Notes To stop the paper path test press CANCEL JOB The transfer drum can be removed with the right upper door open and the right cover interlock defeated see figure 182 on page 370 However media might not feed past the transfer area unless 11 by 17 inch or A3 sized media is used 366 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Notes EN Developer motor test Visually and audibly inspect the cartridge motor M3 and carousel motor M1 as they rotate during this test To view the printer components run the test with the right upper door open and the transfer drum removed and the front cover and right upper door interlocks defeated see figure 186 on page 372 and figure 182 on page 370 The engine runs this test for a fixed duration and then stops Multiple repetitions of the test are allowed For safety reasons the fuser high voltage supplies and scanner are all turned off during testing The carousel cannot turn with the imaging drum removed since the supply voltage to the carousel is cut off to avoid a pinch hazard 1 From the Service Mode Menu press MENU until DEVELOPER MOTOR appears Press ITEM until REPETITIONS appears Press VALUE to display the possible num
312. per airflow vent 5 Remove 2 screws on the face down exit sensor rail callout 2 Face down exit sensor rail Top assemblies 225 6 Unplug the sensor connector on the left side of the rail and release 1 cable stay callout 3 Pull the rail away from the chassis Remove 2 screws callout 4 Figure 97 Face down output assembly 9 Lift the right side of the assembly slide the assembly to the left and lift it out of the chassis 226 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN EN The following assemblies can be accessed from the front of the printer toner lock sensor color cartridge sensor subrelay PCA Toner lock sensor and color cartridge sensor 1 Remove the inside left panel see page 210 2 Remove 1 screw on the toner lock sensor callout 1 Toner lock sensor and color cartridge sensor 3 Remove 1 connector callout 2 4 Remove 1 screw on the color cartridge sensor callout 3 Front assemblies 227 5 Remove 1 connector callout 4 Subrelay PCA 1 Remove the inside left panel see page 210 2 Remove the 5 connectors on the subrelay PCA callout 1 3 Remove 4 screws on the subrelay PCA callout 2 Subrelay PCA 228 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Left assemblies EN The following assemblies can be accessed from the left side of the printer formatter board internal printer hard disk feeder assembly face up solenoid face up exit assembly Multi bin mailbox Re
313. personnel can use to diagnose hardware problems In addition to the tools described in this section the service and support CD which is included with your service manual contains the user documentation Use this additional information 33to supplement the information found in this manual Configuration page Print a configuration page to verify that the printer is set up correctly or to verify information about the printer s configuration The page includes the following information serial number formatter board number page counts use if the controller board is being replaced as well transfer kit count for percentage of life remaining fuser kit count for percentage of life remaining engine settings for verifying that the registration settings are accurate the last two digits of the engine settings might vary from those found on the sticker Printing a configuration page 1 Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears on the printer control panel display Press ITEM until PRINT CONFIG PAGE appears on the display Press SELECT to print the page EN Aids to troubleshooting 361 Interpreting a configuration page ar Cana Laga miN hg a AP LA a US eii n de i u r i kl TI ant SE m Y u ae m m a F la F a a HG mi L ao m ep oo ja a ras em B LEI a z 3 F zo ba s i Iemm olo kon au ma L tam DEE meu me CE E ia ma ma T par Sa Pa SSS ma mi ma ikih tr Ibm
314. place and in good condition Replace the transport belt motor M5 Replace the multi bin mailbox controller board PCA 7 Replace the delivery head assembly EN Table 40 Unnumbered printer messages continued CLEAR MAILBOX JAM continued CLEAR OUTPUT JAM UPPER LEFT DOOR Description The printer senses a media jam in the top face down output bin This message might be caused by the paper not reaching PS11 or by paper toggling PS11 for an extended period of time See table 42 on page 381 for an explanation of paper jam detection details EN Event log message 13 22 04 Action 1 Check for a jam in the delivery head assembly 2 Ensure free movement in PSExit1 sensor flags on the delivery head assembly 3 Verify that the delivery roller fingers are over the ejector rollers on the delivery head assembly 4 Replace the flat ribbon cable that connects to the delivery head assembly to the controller board PCA 5 Replace the multi bin mailbox controller board PCA 6 35 Replace the delivery head assembly Event log message 13 22 05 Action 1 Check for a jam in the delivery head assembly 2 Ensure free movement in PSExit2 sensor flags on the delivery head assembly 3 Verify that the delivery roller fingers are over the ejector rollers on the delivery head assembly 4 Replace the flat ribbon cable that connects to the delivery head assembly to the controller board PCA 5 Replace the mult
315. plications and output devices e Half tone patterns produced on monitors and the types of patterns used in the print jobs are different and might cause apparent differences between the printed output and the screen e Different papers have different color brightness and gloss which will affect the color appearance e Printed colors with identical CMYK or RGB values but with a different half tone ColorSmart text graphic or image might look different when printed Select the custom colors option in the driver manual color and change the half toning options to vary the shading and quality of the colors e The printed output differs from the image on the monitor because the monitor and the print media have different reference values for black and white The monitor screen has charcoal gray for the black level and the white on the monitor screen is actually a light blue Black on the print media is limited only by the fill capability of the printer and most good quality paper has a very high white level In addition phosphor used in color monitors and toner have entirely different spectra characteristics and different color rendering capabilities Blues generally match better than reds e The color of the ambient light changes the perception of color Fluorescent light lacks emphasizes different colors than incandescent light and the color range of natural light is broader than any artificial light When comparing color choose
316. ponent parts 1 of 3 Ref Description Part number Qty 20 User LED PCA with cable C4785 60515 1 21 Adjustable fixed caster C4785 60511 2 22 Attachment assembly rod bracket cables 8 C4785 60516 1 23 Blind cover C4785 60503 1 24 Face down bin C4785 60502 1 25 Face up bin C3764 60505 1 26 Cover front C4785 60504 1 27 Exchange multi bin mailbox assembly C4785 69500 1 Note You must have a 2 000 sheet input unit in order to install a multi bin mailbox 28 Multi bin mailbox assembly C4785 60500 1 product number C4785A Note You must have a 2 000 sheet input unit in order to install a multi bin mailbox 29 Multi bin mailbox controller with metal box 878 C4785 60508 1 30 Caster fixed C4785 60510 2 31 Cover top C3764 60555 1 Kit 1 Plastic parts C4785 60519 1 1G Spacer plastic Kit 3 Hardware C4785 60521 1 3A Screw Torx 3B Screw Torx T20 M4 x 10 3D Screw Torx T20 M4 x 12 EN Illustrations and parts lists 497 im oy aT I M a Us HA a CC kA bo KIT1 1A Figure 245 Multi bin mailbox components 2 of 3 498 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams EN Table 79 Multi bin mailbox component parts 2 of 3 Ref Description Part number Qty 32 Flipper assembly with cable request C4785 60509 1 33 Head assembly with metallic tape C4785 60506 1 34 Metallic tape and housing assembly C4785 60507 1 Kit 1 Plastic parts C4785 60519 1 1A
317. pported o dite Figure 15 DIMM slot configuration O DRAM DIMMs must be installed in synchronized pairs two DIMMs with the same amount of DRAM are installed in facing left and right slots Such as slots 5 and 6 O ROM DIMMs need not be installed in a specific configuration For example ROM DIMMs can be installed in slots 1 and 3 and slot 2 can be empty However ROM DIMMs cannot be installed as pairs in corresponding left and right slots EN Verifying DIMM installation 93 Paper handling accessory status LEDs UN 4 wh 7 NA N KO Figure 16 Paper handling accessory status LEDs 1 Multi bin mailbox status LED 2 2 000 sheet input unit status LED Use table 22 on page 95 to interpret the status LEDs on the 2 000 sheet input unit and the multi bin mailbox 94 Chapter 3 Operational overview EN Table 22 Paper handling accessory status LEDs hardware malfunction LED 2 000 sheet input unit Multi bin mailbox Solid green The accessor
318. ps 158 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN Motors and heaters The following section describes the motors and heaters in the printer Figure 51 Printer motors and heaters Table 28 Printer motor and heater names and descriptions Description Description Carousel motor Fan 1 motor M2 Drum motor Fan 2 motor M3 Cartridge motor FM3 Fan 3 motor M4 Main motor HU Upper fuser heater Pick up motor HL Lower fuser heater EN Mechanical systems 159 Carousel motor M1 The carousel motor M1 is a two phase stepping motor and rotates the carousel The motor operates at low and normal speeds depending on the printer function Such as sensing toner cartridges or printing Controller board Carousel motor PCA 24VAR A 24VAR Carousel driver IC701 Carousel motor RMPHB B2 B8 Expansion I O RMICH1 IC203 RMICH2 B3 B7 Figure 52 Carousel motor M1 160 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN Figure 53 EN Drum motor M2 The drum motor M2 is a two phase stepping motor and drives the transfer drum and the imaging drum For overhead transparencies and glossy or heavy media the motor rotates at low speed OHT mode 1 4 speed rotation glossy and heavy media 1 3 speed rotation The speed of the media through the fuser is identical to the speed at which the media passed through the image transfer process Controller board D CPU
319. pter 5 Theory of operation EN EN High voltage power supply circuit The printer contains three high voltage PCAs shown in figure 49 that are directly controlled by the controller board e High voltage converter 1 PCA which controls e cartridge motor M3 e imaging drum bias e black developing bias e color developing bias e High voltage converter 2 PCA which controls e transfer drum e cleaning roller e transfer belt e post charging unit e upper fusing roller Separation discharge high voltage converter PCA which controls e transfer charger Electrical systems 155 Black developing cylinder Black toner level detection PAGG _ Color ae l cylinder JN YQ Charging 7 roller Post or charging unit Pca _Ae Cleaning roller Upper fusing roller ome Transfer Transferbelt charger Separation discharge high voltage converter PCA High voltage converter 1 PCA High voltage converter 2 PCA Controller board Figure 49 High voltage power supply circuit 156 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN Mechanical systems Laser scanner The laser scanner unit scans the laser beam across the imaging drum Video signals sent from the formatter are pulse width modulated and converted to video data signals The video data signals are then converted to two low voltage differential signals which suppress radio frequency emissions and are sent to the
320. quality might result Installing consumables 107 9 Replace the belt by resting the ends of the new belt in the notches inside the printer Place the gear side in the notch first to mesh the gear teeth 10 Rotate the belt down into place Note Damage to the drum can cause print quality problems Hold the drum only by the handles 11 Remove the protective sheet covering the new transfer drum by pulling the tab Discard the sheet Reinstall the transfer drum 12 Remove the transfer charger Remove the new transfer charger from its packaging and while holding the new transfer charger by its blue clip slide the new transfer charger into the printer until the transfer charger clicks into place 7 NG K 13 On the inside of the door locate the blue filter cover and slide it in the direction of the arrow 14 Pull the old filter out of the opening 108 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance EN EN 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Hold the new filter by the small handles and remove the new filter from its packaging Slide the filter in under the guides in the opening and close the blue filter door making sure it clicks into place Close the upper right door If the door does not close the drum might not be all t
321. quired file directory is printed the printer returns to an online and ready state PRINTING Event log message None FONT LIST Description Action The printer is printing the font list When the font list No action is required is printed the printer returns to an online and ready state PRINTING Event log message None MENU MAP Description Action The printer is printing the menu map When the No action is required menu map is printed the printer returns to an online and ready state PROCESSING Event log message None COPY lt x gt OF lt y gt Description Action The printer is processing a proof and print or mopy No action is required print job lt x gt Number of the copy in process lt y gt Total number of copies PROCESSING JOB Event log message None Description Action The printer is actively processing a print job No action is required PROCESSING JOB Event log message None FROM TRAY lt x gt Description Action The printer is actively processing a print job lt X gt Input tray 1 2 3 or 4 354 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting No action is required EN Table 40 Unnumbered printer messages continued PS MEMORY FULL STORED DATA LOST Description The resource save area for the printer personality is full Fonts downloaded to the printer RAM might have been deleted Event log message None Action Turn the printer off and on to clear the printer RAM READY
322. r The 24V drives the motors clutches and solenoids for the lifter feed and pick up systems The 5V drives the sensors and PCA electronics 180 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN Figure 64 EN Sensors switches clutches and motors Figure 64 and table 35 illustrate and describe the sensors switches clutches and motors on the 2 000 sheet input unit 11 2 12 13 4 14 5 15 6 T 17 2 000 sheet input unit sensors switches clutches and motors 2 000 sheet input unit 181 Table 35 2 000 sheet input unit sensors switches clutches and motors Ref Controldevice Description 1 PS32 Paper exit sensor 2 PS31 Paper entry sensor 3 CL32 Main drive clutch 4 PS35 Vertical transfer unit VTU closed sensor 5 cat VTUduth 6 MT31 Main motor 7 SW601 SW602 Paper quantity switches 8 SW701 SW704 Paper size switches 9g 5 Ps34 373 Paper tray raised sensor 3 3 3 10 PS33 Paper tray empty sensor 11 Feed roller 12 Pick up roller 13 Separation roller 14 Controller board PCA 15 DiagnostieLEDs i sts S 16 Normal diagnostic mode switch 17 Power supply Pick up and feed system When the 2 000 sheet input unit is loaded with paper and the paper tray is closed the paper stack lifts into position under the pick up feed and separation rollers This operation is detected by the PS34 sensor in the 2 000 sheet input unit s pick up assembly The
323. r I O problems RESET TRANSFER LIFE None Used to indicate that a new transfer kit has COUNT been installed RESET FUSER LIFE COUNT None Used to indicate that a new fuser kit has been installed 78 Chapter 3 Operational overview EN Color Adjust Menu Table 20 Color Adjust Menu Item Value PRINT TEST PAGE None BLACK SMOOTH VALUE 6 0 6 CYAN SMOOTH VALUE 6 0 6 MAGENTA SMOOTH VALUE 6 0 6 YELLOW SMOOTH VALUE 6 0 6 BLACK DETAIL VALUE 6 0 6 CYAN DETAIL VALUE 6 0 6 MAGENTA DETAIL VALUE 6 0 6 YELLOW DETAIL VALUE 6 0 6 Description action See page 414 for information on using this menu EN Menu maps 79 Service Mode Menu The Service Mode Menu can be entered only by pressing the left side of the ITEM and the VALUE keys at the same time For more information on using the Service Mode Menu see page 365 e NVRAM SETTING menu is provided to replace values that might be lost when a formatter board or control board is replaced in the field e FORMATTER DIAGNOSTICS menu is provided for manufacturing and field service personnel to perform specific diagnostic tests on the formatter board and its related components e Service personnel can pinpoint problem areas on the formatter board for replacement or for tracking defects e The operator can choose which tests are enabled and disabled during execu
324. r Specification Guide e Use only print media that meet the specifications outlined in this chapter e Donottry to print unsupported sizes or weights of media or other unsupported media e Always handle transparencies and glossy media by their edges to avoid fingerprints in the image area e Adhesives on any type of media must be compatible with the printer s fusing temperatures approximately 190 C or 374 F e Do not use media that have already passed through the printer or through a copy machine even if there is no printing on the page e Recycled media can be used with this printer Recycled media must meet the specifications described in this chapter 26 Chapter 1 Product information EN EN Storing media Follow these guidelines when stacking and storing media Store paper in its ream wrapper until you are ready to use it Rewrap partially used packages of media before storing Stack each carton upright and squarely on top of each other Store envelopes in a protective box to avoid damaging the envelope edges Keep stored media away from temperature and humidity extremes Do not store cartons or reams directly on the floor where they will absorb humidity Instead place cartons on a pallet or on shelves Do not store individual reams in any manner that causes them to curl or warp along the edges Do not stack more than six cartons on top of each other Do not place anything on top of media regardless of
325. r control panel layout Figure 13 Go Menu LCD display Value Cancel Job Item Go LCD display Cancel Job Menu Value ps Item Data Ready Attention Location of printer control panel features Brings the printer online or offline exits menus and will override load tray messages to print on the default media size and type Accesses the printer control panel menus to set the printer defaults This key permits both forward and backward movement through the list of available menus Presents data about the printer such as printer status required actions or data and print errors in one or two lines of characters Steps through the value choices for a particular menu item using or This key permits both forward and backward movement through the values Stops the current job from printing If no job is printing and the display indicates that a job is processing CANCEL JOB cancels the currently processing job and the next job begins printing While the job is being canceled CANCELING JOB is displayed Steps through the items in a particular menu This key permits both forward and backward movement through the available items 66 Chapter 3 Operational overview EN Ready Indicator green Data Indicator green Attention Indicator amber Select EN On The printer is online
326. r off and open the front door Press the button and swing the lower lever to the right Open the right upper door and remove the transfer drum A GW N Using the print sample as a reference inspect the transfer drum for a spot or speck that might be causing the repetitive defects Cleaning the transfer drum Do not clean the transfer drum using force Do not use any water based cleaners or excessive alcohol These actions can permanently damage the transfer drum 5 Gently rub the spot or speck with a hand wipe If necessary use isopropyl alcohol on a hand wipe to clean the transfer drum If you use isopropyl alcohol print 50 to 100 pages to clean any residual isopropyl alcohol from the drum Reinstall the transfer drum Swing the lower lever to the left making sure it clicks into place Close the right upper and front doors and turn the printer on O O N O Reprint the print job If cleaning does not eliminate the repetitive defect replace the transfer drum Repetitive defects troubleshooting 423 CAUTION Fuser Symptoms Print defects occurring at about 150 5 mm The defects will be most visible on overhead transparencies Cause Defect on the upper fuser roller Actions 1 Power the printer off allow 30 minutes for the fuser to cool and remove the fuser Turn the fuser gears and inspect the surface of the upper fusing roller If the roller has surface defects replace the fuser assembly
327. ray pick up solenoid Registration roller clutch drive signal CL1 Registration roller clutch a Ff N Main motor drive signal CL2 Feed roller clutch EN Paper path 169 e Tray 1 pick up One sheet of paper is pressed to the multi purpose pick up roller by the paper lifting plate and is picked up by the rotation of the pick up roller Any extra sheets are removed by the separation pad then sent inside the printer Operation after transmission is the same as for tray pick up except that the paper lifting plate solenoid is re set on to lower the paper lifting plate right after registration roller rotation e Tray 1 paper width sensor The tray 1 paper width sensor PS1701 detects the paper width when the user adjusts the media width guides which moves the slide resistance connected with the size control plate When paper is loaded in tray 1 the controller board detects the paper width If the paper width is not the width specified by the formatter the controller board notifies a paper size failure to the formatter and stops the printer e Tray 1 last page detection The tray 1 last page sensor PS19 monitors the rotation of the last page detection roller in tray 1 and detects the last page If the tray has two or more pages the last page detection roller does not rotate at pick up When the last page is picked up the last page detection roller rotates by the page and PS19 and sends an off to signal the controller
328. re 200 Figure 201 Figure 202 Figure 203 Flipper assembly 1 0f3 291 Flipper assembly 2 013 292 Flipper assembly 3 0f3 292 Delivery head motor 0000 eee eee 293 Transport belt motor 0 00005 294 Input paper guide 1 of 2 295 Input paper guide 2 of 2 296 Metallic tape and housing assembly 1 of 2 29 Metallic tape and housing assembly 2 of 2 298 Controller PCA 1 0of2 299 Controller PCA 2 of 2 300 Anti curl strings 1 of 2 301 Anti curl strings 2 of 2 302 Delivery head assembly 1 0f4 303 Delivery head assembly 2 0f4 304 Delivery head assembly 3 of 4 304 Delivery head assembly 4 of 4 305 Interlock switch ma watt oes cee mS erat ANN eae ROS 306 Diagnostic LED PCA 00085 307 User status LED PCA 308 Attachment assembly 309 Example of a configuration page 362 Right upper cover detection interlock 370 Drum cartridge detection interlock 370 Black toner cartridge detection interlock 371 Toner carousel door detection interlock 371 Front cover delivery cover detection interlocks 372 Laser shutters 0 0 0 cece eee
329. ridge is installed If the light does not reach the light receiver the controller board signals color toner cartridge failure to the formatter and stops the printer Also the printer checks for the cartridge pressure when the power switch is turned on or right after any cover is opened or closed Consumable detection mechanisms 145 Color toner lever detection The printer has a color toner lever sensor PS1902 to prevent toner cartridge setup failure This sensor consists of a light receiver and a light emitter If the color toner lever is set incorrectly the light from the light emitter is reflected by the color toner lever and detected by the light receiver The controller board monitors the sensor when the carousel door is closed If the color toner lever is not locked in place LOCK TONER LEVER is displayed on the printer control panel and the carousel will not rotate Controller board Subrelay PCA RLSROT STPROT RLOCKS Color toner lever Carousel stopper solenoid Color toner cartridge Stopper lever PS1902 Color toner lever sensor Toner cartridge cover Carousel Figure 42 Color toner lever detection 146 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN EN Black toner level detection and cartridge detection The toner antenna in the black toner cartridge detects the black toner level The controller board monitors the toner level sensor signal output from the toner ant
330. rint quality problems by printing slimit21 ps and vcollt21 ps on letter sized paper or slima421 ps and vcola421 ps on A4 sized paper from tray 2 Type the following command at the DOS prompt to print the files copy lt file name gt Iptl e Look for an imaging drum defect Replace the imaging drum if necessary e Inspect all fuser rollers for radial lines and if found replace the fuser e Verify the post charging unit is all the way to the right e Clean the paper path rollers with a hand wipe e Align a page showing the horizontal line defect with the face up exit assembly If the lines align with any of the sets of ribs on the assembly replace the face up exit assembly see page 236 e Align a page showing the horizontal line defect with both the input and the output sides of the fuser If the lines align with any of the sets of ribs on the fuser replace the fuser 402 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Rain See also Speckled print and figure 197 on page 393 This defect appears as small specks of toner missing and is usually most visible with dark solid colors Check the percentage of life remaining for the drum kit on the configuration page Replace the drum kit if it is past its rated life e Check for contamination on the transfer drum and replace if necessary e Use the service and support CD to help troubleshoot print quality problems by printing blkftb31 ps on 11 by 17 inch sized paper or blka331 ps on A
331. rinter Note The color toner carousel will not rotate unless the following conditions are met e The blue toner lever is locked e The clear door is closed e The imaging drum is installed e The black toner cartridge is installed completely including removing the orange seal from the black toner cartridge and swinging the upper blue lever to the left e The right upper door is closed Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer If the cartridge is installed correctly check that the sensor PS1901C is functioning properly Clean the sensor with a toner wipe Reconnect connector J221 on the controller board and connector J621 and relay connector J70 on the remaining color toner sensor Printer message troubleshooting 345 Table 40 Unnumbered printer messages continued INSTALL lt color gt continued 6 10 11 12 13 Make sure that the black toner cartridge is installed e Install the black toner cartridge if it is not installed e f the black toner cartridge is already installed turn the printer off reinstall the black toner cartridge and turn the printer on again Reconnect connectors J641 and J644 on the main relay PCA and connector J102 on the power supply Reconnect connector J227 on the controller board and connector J647 on the main relay PCA Check electrical continuity between connector J644 1 PBK and J644 2 PMP when the door switch SW644 is turned on If there i
332. rinter control panel e ROM CRC The read only memory cyclic redundancy check reads the values stored in the firmware ROMs computes checksum variables based on the read information and compares the computed checksums with those stored in the ROM e DRAM DIMMS Installed DIMMs are tested to ensure that they are supported by the formatter board and are functioning properly The time that this test takes to run varies depending on the amount of memory installed DRAM DIMMs are tested using a pattern test an address test and a walking ones test e IDE ASIC This test is performed on the IDE ASIC of the formatter board to ensure read and write integrity Values are written to the ASIC registers and then read for verification e DISK The disk drive test does the following a instructs the disk drive if installed to perform its internal self test similar to a power on test b enters into sleep mode and wakes up again c seeks and reads sequential sectors forward for 30 seconds d seeks and reads sequential sectors backward for 30 seconds e seeks and reads random sectors for 30 seconds f performs read and write tests VX ASIC This test is performed on the VX ASIC of the formatter board to ensure read and write integrity Values are written to the ASIC registers and then read for verification Press VALUE until ON or OFF appears on the display Press SELECT Press ITEM until EXECUTE TEST appears on the printer c
333. rly All data in the print buffer will be lost 41 2 PRINTER ERROR Description Indicates that a beam detect laser scanner error has occurred on the previous page The page will reprint and continue EN Event log message 41 00 02 Action Open and close the front door of the printer to remove any remaining pages from the printer Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer Reconnect connector J1001 on the laser driver PCA and connector J205 on the controller board Reconnect connector J2 on beam detect PCA relay connector J40 and connector J211 on the controller board Measure the voltage across connector J211 1 5 V and J211 3 GND on the controller board after the printer is turned on If the voltage is 5 V replace the laser scanner unit Replace the controller board Printer message troubleshooting 317 Table 39 Numbered printer messages continued 41 3 UNEXPECTED PAPER SIZE LOAD TRAY 1 lt width gt lt length gt Description Tray 1 is configured for a specific media size but the printer detects a different size being fed from tray 1 For example the printer was expecting a letter sized page but detected that an 11 by 17 inch sized page was fed instead lt width gt Media width specified in the printer driver or application lt length gt Media length specified in the printer driver or application Event log message 41 00 03 Action 6 Verify the corre
334. roubleshooting any specific printer problem ensure that The failure is associated with the printer before beginning troubleshooting by removing the printer from the network The printer is being powered off with the power button not by unplugging the printer to ensure the cooling fans run through their entire cycle Any overdue maintenance is performed The maintenance units are within their rated life The customer is responsible for ensuring that the items included in the consumable kits are in good condition The printer has been maintained on a regular basis as described in chapter 4 Note the location of spilled or accumulated toner before troubleshooting Toner contamination might indicate ventilation or printer environment problems The customer is using supported media The operating environment is within the specified parameters listed in chapter 1 of this manual The printer is not exposed to ammonia gas such as that produced by diazo copiers or office cleaning materials The printer is never exposed to direct sunlight The media is stored correctly and within environmental limits The printer is installed on a solid level surface The line voltage does not vary more than 20 from the nominal rated value specified on the Power Rating Label Suspect this problem if large motors are used near the printer such that they might cause temporary voltage changes Any non HP components toner memory boards and EIO cards
335. rs if necessary Image defects troubleshooting 399 Blank or partially blank page See figure 194 on page 390 for an example e Print a configuration page and listen for the carousel to rotate at least twice Open the right upper door and remove the transfer drum If the image does not appear on the transfer drum look for obstructions in the scanner shutters e Verify that the media meets the specifications listed in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide e Use the continuous configuration page to prove the printer feeds paper reliably Rough media or light media might cause the printer to feed multiple pages which results in blank output Check for host communications problems or problems in the network configuration e Check for banner pages and form feed commands in the software e Verify that the number of lines per page is correct Too many lines per page results in creeping text In this condition each successive page begins its print further down the page Part of each page is blank elf random lines are missing from the page print a configuration page If the error still occurs upgrade the firmware by installing firmware upgrade DIMMs If the condition persists replace the formatter board e Check for scanner failure Turn the printer off and on to reset the scanner 400 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN EN Horizontal streaks in one color See figure 195 on page 391 for an exa
336. rs of Pigment color absorbed light reflected light Perceived color Magenta Green Blue Magenta Red Yellow Blue Red Yellow Green Cyan Red Green Cyan Blue None None Red White Green Blue 126 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN Subtractive color mixing Table 25 describes how mixing equal amounts of subtractive colors produces other colors Table 25 Subtractive color mixing Mix equal amounts of To produce Cyan Yellow Magenta Black Cyan Yellow Green Yellow Magenta Red Magenta Cyan Blue Half toning Half toning also called dithering is a method used to distribute color pigment to create a full spectrum of color Because this printer places dots of toner on a page to create an image rather than physically mixing the color like paint the dots are distributed in selected patterns Although they are not physically combined on the page the eye integrates the dots and the viewer perceives them as a solid color Process colors The printer does not use half toning for every application Any of the four basic colors cyan magenta yellow or black can be printed as a solid color Since red green and blue are formed by combining two base colors they are called process colors See page 134 for an explanation of how the process colors are created on the transfer drum Color theory 127 Additive color theory The additive color theory deals with colors that are produced when lig
337. rs to the right of the selection Repeat steps 2 through 4 to configure media type in another tray Or Press GO to bring the printer online Configuring input trays 91 Verifying the printer is installed correctly Use the printer control panel to print a configuration page and verify that the printer was installed correctly Configuration pages include the following information 92 Chapter 3 Operational overview general information about the printer Such as serial number and number of pages since most recent maintenance installed languages last three printer events memory available and installed dual inline memory modules DIMMs printer control panel and printer hard disk security installed optional equipment such as a 2 000 sheet input unit multi bin mailbox or duplexer tray configuration network configuration Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears on the printer control panel display Press ITEM until PRINT CONFIG PAGE appears on the display Press SELECT to print the configuration page EN Verifying DIMM installation The printer comes with the following amounts of memory installed in slots 1 and 2 e 16 MB DIMMs in the base and N models e 32 MB DIMMs in the DN model In all printer models slots 3 through 8 are available for additional DIMMs The printer supports ROM and synchronous DRAM DIMMs dual inline memory modules EDO extended data out or Fast Page Mode DRAM DIMMs are not su
338. rvice Menu 3 Ifthe problem persists replace the bad DIMM 66 lt x gt 0 lt yy gt C LINK COMM ERROR CHECK CABLES AND CYCLE POWER Description Indicates a communication error between the 2 000 sheet input unit or the multi bin mailbox and the printer lt X gt Device number in the link lt yy gt Error code from the optional device Event log message None Action 1 Verify that the C link and power cables are connected 2 Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer 66 11 01 INPUT DEVICE FAILURE CHECK CABLES AND CYCLE POWER Description Indicates a 2 000 sheet input unit lifting motor error Event log message 66 11 01 Action 1 Verify that the c link and power cables are connected Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer Verify that there are no objects or paper stored in the left side of the tray 4 Verify that the lifting plate moves freely by hand 5 Verify that the paper size plates are installed correctly and that they are not bent 6 Replace the paper deck drive assembly bushing Replace the paper deck drive assembly Replace the paper tray tray 4 for the 2 000 sheet input unit 330 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Table 39 Numbered printer messages continued 66 11 02 INPUT DEVICE FAILURE CHECK CABLES AND CYCLE POWER Description Indicates a 2 000 sheet input unit feed motor error Event log message 66 11 02 Action 1
339. s especially recycled papers have specks in them as manufactured Compare printed and unprinted media for pre existing specks e Replace any toner cartridge that is past its maximum life Inspect the charging roller for contamination and replace if necessary Image defects troubleshooting 407 Yellow or black streaks The imaging drum is past its maximum life Print a configuration page and verify the imaging drum is not past its rated life If it is replace the drum kit Oxide can build up on the post charging unit Clean the post charging unit see page 99 Look for any fibers or foreign objects that are in contact with the imaging drum Clean or remove the objects as necessary Replace the imaging drum if this problem persists Mottled process colors or poor transfer See figure 200 on page 396 for an example This defect appears as splotchy light areas in dark colors Ensure media meets the specifications listed in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide Rough heavy or moist media can cause this problem Clean the transfer charger as shown page 101 and reseat the transfer belt Oxide build up on the transfer charger adversely affects how the printer transfers the developed image to the page If the defect persists replace the transfer kit Verify the printer driver and printer control panel settings are correct for the media type Print on different media to determine whether the pr
340. s no electrical continuity replace the black toner cartridge on off switch Check the upper blue lever black toner cartridge lever on the printer Move the lever to the left Replace the lever if it is cracked Replace the black toner cartridge if it is deformed or damaged Replace the remaining color toner sensor Replace the controller board INSTALL FUSER LOWER LEFT DOOR Description The printer has detected that the fuser is not installed 346 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Event log message None Action 1 Install the fuser and verify that it is working correctly Reconnect connector J26 on the fuser Reconnect connector J222 on the controller board Replace the controller board EN Table 40 Unnumbered printer messages continued INSTALL IMAGING DRUM OPEN FRONT DOOR Description The printer has detected that the imaging drum is not installed Note All doors must be closed for the printer to detect the imaging drum EN Event log message None Action 1 10 Install the imaging drum before attempting to print If the condition persists take the imaging drum out and reinstall it Note The imaging drum must be installed and the upper lever must be to the left in order for the carousel to rotate Turn the printer off and on to reset the printer Replace the drum cartridge Replace the drum cartridge if the drum cartridge on off switch guide is deformed Make
341. s the number of uncollated copies to be sent if the number of copies is not defined by the print job Sets the default media size The default media size is used for jobs that do not include media size commands or when the requested media size is not installed in the printer ENVELOPE is not a separate item The printer control panel display switches when VALUE gets to envelope sizes Sets the default font source to look in first for the requested fonts Soft fonts are selected first DIMM fonts second and internal fonts third if all are installed Appears only if the selected font is a fixed spaced contour font Appears only if the selected font is a proportional spaced contour font EN Table 17 Printing Menu continued Item PCL SYMBOL SET COURIER WIDE A4 APPEND CR TO LF Default setting Value PC 8 ROMAN 8 ISO L1 ISO L2 ISO L5 ISO L6 PC 775 PC 8 DN PC 850 PC 852 PC 8TK PC 1004 WIN L1 WIN L2 WIN L5 WINBALT DESKTOP PS TEXT LEGAL ISO 4 ISO 6 ISO 11 ISO 15 ISO 16 ISO 17 ISO 21 ISO 60 ISO 69 WIN 3 0 MC TEXT REGULAR DARK NO YES NO YES Description action Default symbol set mapping Used only for jobs that do not include symbol set selection commands DARK emulates the heavier Courier font of the HP LaserJet III printer REGULAR is the lighter and more accurate Courier font used since the HP LaserJet 4 printer and in books and magazines Allows
342. s the temperature the formatter sets the temperature to based on the type of media being used Table 27 Fusing temperatures Target temperature Color Number of mode sheets paper Fusing mode Plain Heavy or glossy Envelope 10 G 175 C 1 5 CG 180 C 1st sheet 347 F 347 F 347 F 356 F PONGONO 165 C 170 C 165 C 180 C 2nd and after 329 F 338 F 329 F 356 F white 180 C 175 C 175 C 180 C Black and 1st sheet 356 F 347 F 347 F 356 F 165 C 170 C 165 C 170 C 2nd and after 329 F 338 F 329 F 338 F Problems in the fuser can be detected in the following three circuits Controller board If the fuser is heated abnormally or does not reach the specified temperature for some reason the controller board interrupts power to the fuser heaters From there the formatter assesses the fusing heater failure and signals the printer control panel Fusing heater safety circuit in the power supply circuit If the fusing heater safety circuit detects an upper or lower fusing heater failure the safety circuit interrupts power to the upper and lower fusing heaters Fuser abnormality detection circuit in the power supply circuit If there are broken wires to the fusing heater system the fuser abnormality detection circuit detects no AC current flow causing the controller board to assess the broken wires stop driving the fusing heaters and signal the printer control panel 154 Cha
343. se for each print job Note PCL support is not available at initial product introduction Determines the amount of time that a clearable warning is displayed on the printer control panel If set to ON then clearable warnings are displayed until Go is pressed If set to JOB then clearable warnings are displayed until the end of the print job Determines the printer response to consumable low and out messages including TONER LOW TRANSFER KIT OUT FUSER LIFE OUT and DRUM LIFE LOW If set to CONTINUE clear the message by pressing Go If set to STOP clear the message by replacing the consumable If the PostScript interpreter detects illegal commands the job is canceled If ON an error page prints If OFF there is no indication that an error occurred Appears only if the appropriate printer hard disk is installed Press SELECT to initialize EN Menu maps 75 Printing Menu Table 17 Printing Menu Item COPIES PAPER ENVELOPE ORIENTATION FORM LENGTH PCL FONT SOURCE PCL FONT NUMBER PCL PITCH PCL POINT SIZE Default setting Value 1 42 999 LETTER LEGAL A4 EXEC A5 11X17 A3 JIS B4 JIS B5 JPOSTD COM10 MONARCH C5 DL B5 PORTRAIT LANDSCAPE 5 60 128 LINES SOFT INTERNAL SLOT n n 1 2 3 4 O Courier 999 0 44 10 99 99 4 00 12 999 75 76 Chapter 3 Operational overview Description action Set
344. secures the back end is captive 8 Rotate the assembly clockwise while guiding the back end out of its access opening see figure 176 9 Release the anti curl strings from the pulleys on each end of the assembly callout 5 DAHHLL 11111 po nam Figure 176 Delivery head assembly 4 of 4 Notes on reinstalling When reinstalling the assembly onto its elevator mounts ensure that the locating pins are in place e Ensure that the assembly moves up and down freely EN Multi bin mailbox 305 Interlock switch 1 Remove the back cover see page 287 CAUTION Before removing the wires from the multi bin mailbox interlock switch note the location of each wire Replacing the wires incorrectly can damage the interlock switch 2 Disconnect 2 wires from the switch callout 1 Figure 177 Interlock switch 3 Press the 2 retaining tabs together to remove the switch callout 2 306 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Figure 178 EN Diagnostic LED PCA 1 Remove the back cover see page 287 N Unplug 2 connectors from the PCA callout 1 ING Diagnostic LED PCA 3 Remove 1 screw callout 2 4 Pull the PCA away from the frame Multi bin mailbox 307 User status LED PCA 1 Remove the front cover see page 287 2 Disconnect the cable from the PCA callout 1 Figure 179 User status LED PCA 3 Remove 1 screw callout 2 4 Pull the PCA away from the frame 30
345. ss VALUE until the value you want appears on the display 4 Press SELECT to save the selection An asterisk appears to the right of the selection Repeat steps 1 through 4 until all of your changes are complete Press Go to bring the printer online Changes in the printer control panel will not take effect until all current data in the print buffer prints or until the next print job 68 Chapter 3 Operational overview EN Table 12 Printer control panel menu map overview INFORMATION PROOF AND PAPER HANDLING CONFIGURATION PRINTING MENU MENU PRINT MENU MENU MENU PRINT MENU MAP lt job name gt TRAY 1 MODE POWERSAVE COPIES lt job owners PRINT CONFIG TRAY 1 TYPE PERSONALITY PAPER PAGE TRAY 1 SIZE CLEARABLE ENVELOPE PRINT PCL FONT WARNINGS LIST TRAY 2 TYPE ORIENTATION TONER LOW PRINT PS FONT LIST TRAY 3 TYPE FORM LENGTH PRINT PS PRINT LASERJET TRAY 4 TYPE ERRORS PCL FONT DEMONSTRATION SOURCE PAPER DEST INITIALIZE DISK PRINT FILE PCL FONT DIRECTORY DUPLEX NUMBER PRINT EIO PAGE BINDING PCL PITCH PRINT CONTINUOUS MANUAL FEED PCL POINT SIZE CONFIG PAGES OVERRIDE A4 PCL SYMBOL PRINT EVENT LOG WITH LETTER SET AUTO PAPER COURIER OVERRIDE WIDE A4 APPEND CR TO LF Appears only if TRAY 1 MODE CASSETTE 2 Shows PAPER for sizes that are normally sheets of paper and shows ENVELOPE for sizes that are normally envelopes EN Menu maps 69 Table 12 Printer c
346. ssage To view an updated available list on the server send e mail to listserv hpbs8305 boi hp com with the text List Global Once you subscribe you will receive further instruction on the use and benefits of this list server 50 Chapter 2 Service approach EN EN Ordering consumables Consumable parts and accessories are available directly from Hewlett Packard at the following numbers e U S 1 800 538 8787 Canada 1 800 387 3154 in Toronto 416 671 8383 e United Kingdom 0734 441212 e Contact your local HP Parts Coordinator for other local phone numbers To find a dealer near you or if the local dealer is temporarily out of stock call the HP Customer Information Center at 1 800 752 0900 Ordering field replaceable units This printer is designed to be repaired by replacing field replaceable units Part numbers are located in chapter 8 of this manual and can be ordered from SMO or SME see page 49 Parts exchange program HP offers remanufactured assemblies for some selected parts These are identified in chapter 8 and can be ordered through SMO or SME see page 49 Parts and supplies 51 Technical assistance HP ASAP HP ASAP Automated Support Access Program provides free technical support information 24 hours a day 7 days a week The ASAP system includes HP FIRST explained below The ASAP service at 1 800 333 1917 U S requires a touchtone phone HP FIRST HP FIRST
347. ssed the printer finishes printing the buffered pages before returning online DATA RECIEVED PRESS GO KEY Description The printer has received and processed data The printer is waiting for a formfeed EN Event log message None Action Press Go Printer message troubleshooting 341 Table 40 Unnumbered printer messages continued DISK DEVICE FAILURE Description The printer hard disk s internal self test routine has been invoked to read minimum and maximum logical block addresses with no retries and has detected a failure If access to the printer hard disk is not required printer operation can continue DISK FILE OPERATION FAILED Description The printer has received an illogical PJL command such as download to nonexistent directory DISK IS FULL Description The printer hard disk is full DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED Description A user has attempted to save to the printer hard disk while the printer hard disk is write protected DRUM ERROR REPLACE DRUM KIT Description The printer has detected an error in the imaging drum memory device Printing can continue but will be stopped as soon as the waste toner signal is triggered Printing behavior is determined by the TONER LOW control panel setting See table 16 on page 75 for information on the TONER LOW setting 342 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Event log message 30 00 01 Action Replace the printer hard disk Event log mess
348. ssing jobs 354 product data sheets 52 programs color selection in 385 proof and print jobs canceling 72 Proof and Print Menu 72 PS See PostScript PS PSx See sensors Q quantity switch assembly 2 000 sheet input unit 283 R radio frequency regulations 39 raised spots on printed page 410 RAM random access memory controller error 330 internal error 329 random access memory RAM See RAM random access memory read only memory ROM See ROM read only memory Ready Indicator light 66 rear assemblies 246 rear cover 222 rear left cover 213 recycling consumables 105 toner cartridges 55 reference materials parts list 448 refilling toner cartridges 55 registration area Jams 338 color values 81 incorrect 399 plate 399 registration frame assembly illustration and parts list 480 location 450 registration roller assembly 239 450 481 clutch 177 location 124 paper sensor 166 167 171 173 removing 239 regulations Canadian DOC 39 FCC 39 removing parts 199 safety 203 strategy 203 See also individual parts repair locations Customer Support Sales Center 53 repetitive defect ruler 420 defects 419 images printing 406 replacement frequencies 105 Index 541 542 Index replacing See installing removing requirements media 26 power 21 site 24 space around printer 25 ventilation 24 reset cold 81 341 376 switch 175 Resets Menu 78 resetting factory defaults 78 fuser life count 78 O 78 I O ports
349. stments Overall color of Correction if all circles are Correction if all circles are circles darker than background lighter than background Cyan tint Reduce cyan Increase magenta and yellow Magenta tint Reduce magenta Increase cyan and yellow Yellow tint Reduce yellow Increase magenta and cyan Green tint Reduce yellow and cyan Increase magenta Red tint Reduce yellow and magenta Increase cyan Purple or blue tint Reduce cyan and magenta Increase yellow For example if the circles in the neutral axes show a green tint and the circle appears lighter than the background the magenta ramp should be examined closely to determine if magenta should be increased Note If the color settings are less accurate when you finish the color adjustment than when you started reset all color values to O zero in the printer control panel and try the adjustment again 418 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Repetitive defects troubleshooting EN Repetitive defects are defects that occur in the same vertical position on the page but not necessarily on each page Most repetitive defects are caused by problems with one of the following developer roller 88 mm charging roller 44 mm cleaning roller 56 mm developer DSD wheels 65 mm transfer roller 66 mm transfer drum once per 11 by 17 inch or A3 sized page or every other letter or A4 sized page fuser 150 5 mm imaging drum 195 mm transfer belt 222 mm Rep
350. stration 162 location 159 removing 254 cartridges disengaged toner 323 imaging drum 124 installing black toner 87 cartridges continued installing color toner 88 location 104 replace frequency 105 toner not installed 345 CASSETTE mode 90 CCC Customer Care Center Assist Line 54 CCCC Canadian Customer Care Center Assist Line 54 charcoal filter installing 106 location 104 replace frequency 105 charging roller illustration 124 repetitive defects 421 charts timing See timing charts checklists paper path 378 pretroubleshooting 315 circles on page 403 circuits capacity 21 fuser abnormality detection 154 fusing heater safety 154 high voltage power supply 155 laser scanner motor lock detection 158 power distribution 152 Power Save 153 cleaning density sensor 100 335 images 138 imaging drum 140 post charger 99 toner from fabric 87 transfer charger 101 transfer drum 138 422 waste toner tray 102 cleaning roller charging process 138 control process 150 illustration 124 location 104 press cam 138 press solenoid 138 177 repetitive defects 421 replace frequency 105 cleared job 351 clearing duplexer jams 335 event log 81 fuser jams 336 input tray jams 338 multi bin mailbox jams 338 paper 341 Index 527 clearing continued top output bin jams 339 transfer drum jams 340 unexpected paper size jams 340 C link cable connection 37 61 description 188 clutches feed roller 177 names and locations 177 regi
351. stration roller 177 transfer belt press 177 tray 1 pick up roller 177 clutches 2 000 sheet input unit main drive 182 names and locations 181 VTU 182 CLx See clutches clutches 2 000 sheet input unit coaxial cables 63 cold reset CR message 341 paper size 81 Color Adjust Menu 79 color adjust page 415 color cartridge sensor 227 color page count 80 color toner carousel 124 color toner cartridges illustration 124 installing 88 lever sensor 146 location 104 replace frequency 105 sensor 145 173 toner level detection 145 color toner lever sensor 173 colored media using 32 See also media colors adjustment 414 415 density calibration 148 fixing inaccurate 100 matching 385 pages printed 80 pigments 32 126 127 print speeds 20 process 127 registration values 81 selection process 385 theory 126 values 79 Com 10 sized media See media commands carriage return 77 line feed 77 Commercial 10 sized media See media communications link See C link cable Configuration Menu 75 configuration page printing 71 353 printing continuous 71 understanding 361 using to verify installation 92 configuring Append CRto LF 77 binding 73 clearable warnings 75 color values 79 control panel 68 default orientation 76 default paper size 76 duplex printing 73 form length 76 I O timeout 78 input trays 72 90 low and out messages 75 manual feed 74 media sizes 91 media types 90 91 number of copies 76 paper destination 73 parallel ad
352. switches 183 Paper size detection switches 183 List of tables 13 Table 38 Table 39 Table 40 Table 41 Table 42 Table 43 Table 44 Table 45 Table 46 Table 47 Table 48 Table 49 Table 50 Table 51 Table 52 Table 53 Table 54 Table 55 Table 56 Table 57 Table 58 Table 59 Table 60 Table 61 Table 62 Table 63 Table 64 Table 65 Table 66 Table 67 Table 68 Table 69 Table 70 Table 71 Table 72 Table 73 Table 74 Table 75 Table 76 Table 77 Table 78 14 List of tables Multi bin mailbox sensors switches motors and controller board PCA 0 00000 e eee 190 Numbered printer messages 316 Unnumbered printer messages 334 Sensor monitor test 0 00 0 369 Media jam detection 0 000 ce eae 381 he ANG EEE ceria ee Sate OK 401 Neutral axis adjustments 418 Status LED on the 2 000 sheet input unit 427 Patterns of LED flashing 2 second pause between each pattern n nannaa eee 429 DIP switch settings for troubleshooting test DPrOCCOUIES iae AA nea A 430 Status LEDs on the multi bin mailbox 436 Options accessories and consumables 446 Miscellaneous parts 0 000 cece eee 448 Printer doors and covers 1 0f3 453 Printer doors and covers 2 0f3 455 Printer covers and doors parts
353. t in the Service Mode Menu to verify all paper path sensors are functioning properly or to locate the paper jam Event log message 13 00 10 Action Open the right upper door remove the transfer drum remove the jammed media reinstall the transfer drum and close the right upper door CLEAR TRAY 4 JAM Description The printer senses a media jam in tray 4 CLEAR UNEXPECTED PAPER SIZE JAM THEN LOAD TRAY 1 lt type gt lt size gt Description The printer senses a media jam in tray 1 or the media fed is longer than what was expected lt type gt Media type specified in the printer driver or application lt size gt Media size specified in the printer driver or application The lt type gt and lt size gt can be the default media type and size if an automatic paper override has occurred or if GO was pressed during a mount request 340 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Event log message None Action Open tray 4 and the vertical transfer unit VTU remove the jammed media and close both Event log message 13 00 11 Action 1 Open the right upper door and remove the jammed media 2 Load the media type and size indicated on the printer control panel EN Table 40 Unnumbered printer messages continued CLEARING PAPER FROM PRINTER Description The printer is attempting to remove unusable media such as a misfed page or media damaged in a media jam Event log message None Action No
354. ter error Turn the printer off Disconnect all communication cables and EIO cards Turn the printer back on Run extended formatter diagnostics from the Service Mode Menu to troubleshoot the failure If the problem persists without the communications connected replace the formatter board EN Printer message troubleshooting 333 Table 40 Unnumbered printer messages ACCESS DENIED Description A user has attempted to select a menu value while printer control panel locking is enabled CALIBRATING Description The printer is adjusting the print density see page 148 for more information Event log message None Action See the system administrator for access to the printer control panel If it is necessary to override the password perform a cold reset See page 376 for information on performing a cold reset Event log message None Action No action is required Note It might take five to six minutes for the printer to complete the calibration CANCELING JOB Event log message None Description Action The printer is canceling the current print job No action is required CHECK CONTROL Event log message None PANEL SETTINGS Description Action Indicates that the page might not be printing because the control panel setting for media type and or size does not match the media in the tray CHECK TRAY 1 PAPER GUIDES Description The width of the paper guides does not match the size o
355. ter is in the process of going offline or into the menus Event log message None Action No action is required Event log message None Action No action is required POWERSAVE ON Description The printer is in Power Save mode Power Save settings can be changed on the printer control panel through the Configuration Menu see page 75 EN Event log message None Action Clear this message by pressing any key Note This message will also be cleared if a print Job is sent to the printer or if an error condition is detected by the printer Printer message troubleshooting 351 Table 40 Unnumbered printer messages continued PRESS SELECT IF FUSER IS NEW Description The printer has detected that a new fuser might have been installed Note This message will also occur if the printer is turned off and on and the internal fuser count indicates the fuser is near the end of its life or the fuser door is opened The message displays for 10 seconds PRESS SELECT IF TRANSFER IS NEW Description The printer has detected that a new transfer drum might have been installed Note This message will also occur if the printer is turned off and on and the internal transfer count indicates the transfer drum is near the end of its life or the transfer door is opened The message displays for 10 seconds PRESS SELECT TO INITIALIZE DISK Description The printer hard disk is new or has been formatted for
356. ter personality that does not exist in the printer The job was canceled and no pages were printed PRINTING CONFIGURATION Description The printer is printing the configuration page When the configuration page is printed the printer returns to an online and ready state PRINTING DEMONSTRATION Description The printer is printing a demonstration page When the demonstration page is printed the printer returns to an online and ready state PRINTING EVENT LOG Description The printer is printing the event log When the event log is printed the printer returns to an online and ready state EN Event log message None Action 1 Ifyou want to proceed with initialization press SELECT N If you don t want to initialize the printer hard disk wait until the message clears 10 seconds or press Go and the disk will not be initialized This will render the disk non functional but the configuration page will show that the disk is installed Event log message None Action No action is required Event log message None Action No action is required Event log message None Action No action is required Event log message None Action No action is required Printer message troubleshooting 353 Table 40 Unnumbered printer messages continued PRINTING Event log message None FILE DIRECTORY Description Action The printer is printing the disk directory When the No action is re
357. that the product Product Name Duplexer Model Number C4782A Product Options N A conforms to the following Product Specifications EMC CISPR 22 1993 A1 EN 55022 1994 Class B CISPR 22 1993 A1 EN 55022 1994 EN 5008 1 1 1992 EN 50082 1 1992 IEC 801 2 1991 prEN 55024 2 1992 4 kV CD 8 kV AD IEC 801 3 1984 prEN 55024 3 1991 3 V m IEC 801 4 1988 prEN 55024 4 1992 0 5 kV Signal Lines 1 0 kV Power Lines FCC Title 47 CFR Part 15 Class B2 ICES 003 Issue 2 VCCI 2 AS NZS 3548 1992 CISPR 22 1993 Class B Supplementary Information The product herewith complies with the requirements of the following Directives and carries the CE marking accordingly the EMC directive 89 336 EEC the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC 1 The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett Packard Personal Computer Systems This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation July 16 1997 For Compliance Information ONLY contact Australia Contact Product Regulations Manager Hewlett Packard Australia Ltd 31 41 Joseph Street Blackburn Victoria 3130 Australia Europe Contact A Local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett Packard GmbH Department HQ TRE Standards Europe Herrenberger Strasse
358. the formatter board the controller board turns off the FET switch in the main relay PCA and stops the supply of 24 UH Additionally the sensors carousel motor and toner cartridge motor are turned off After the fuser cools down all fans are also turned off When the printer receives the wake up command from the formatter board the printer leaves Power Save mode and resumes normal operation 24VB Controller board Main relay PCA Subrelay PCA i IC201j Cover 24VB Cover switches switches i IC204 FET switch Lu gt I L lt I I U m ar D D 2 5 5 2 g Zz A N O A X ty ty t l0 4 Is P5SAVE High voltage die Video High voltage converter 2 Boe ri Loads formatter converter 1 Carousel Sensors Sensors motor PCA PCA PCA 24UH Solenoids clutches pick up motor y Sensors Laser driver Sensors BD PCA Figure 48 Power Save circuit diagram Toner Fan 1 Fan 2 Carousel Preconditioning motor solenoid exposure LED unit cartridge motor P5SAVE 5V Fan 3 Preconditioning exposure LED unit EN Electrical systems 153 Fuser control The fuser controller directly interfaces with both the power supply and controller board As the surface temperature of the upper and lower fusing rollers rises the resistance of the thermistors drops and the voltage of the fusing temperature detection signals also drops Table 27 show
359. tion whether the tests run once or continuously and whether the test sequence stops upon failure or continues despite failure e A fault log is implemented within formatter diagnostics to record errors for review e Because many of the formatter diagnostic tests are destructive memory tests a special key sequence is used to enter the mode A message warns service personnel that the printer is about to perform destructive memory tests Table 21 Service Mode Menu Service Mode Menu ltem NVRAM SETTING SERIAL NUMBER FORMATTER NUMBER TOTAL PAGE COUNT COLOR PAGE COUNT Default setting Value lt XXXXXXXXXX gt lt XXXXXXXXXX gt lt XXXXXXXXXX gt lt XXXXXXXXXX gt Description action This number is the serial number of the printer Press VALUE to change the value of the current character Press SELECT to save the value and move to the next character This number is the serial number of the formatter board Enter the number in the same manner as the serial number of the printer Total number of pages processed Number of color pages processed 80 Chapter 3 Operational overview EN Table 21 Service Mode Menu continued Service Mode Menu ltem DUPLEX COUNT TRANSFER LIFE LEFT FUSER LIFE LEFT ENGINE SETTING 1 ENGINE SETTING 2 CR PAPER SIZE CLEAR EVENT LOG FORMATTER EXECUTE TESTS DIAGNOSTICS Default setting Value lt XXXXXXXXXXXX gt
360. to their respective locations Close the filter door If the filter door does not close make sure the filters are in place Use the hand wipe to remove toner from your hands Place the used parts in the packaging from the new ones See the included recycling guide for recycling information EN Fuser kit Replace the parts in the fuser kit when the printer control panel displays FUSER LIFE LOW REPLACE KIT FUSER LIFE OUT REPLACE KIT Figure 25 Contents of fuser kit 1 Fuser 2 Hand wipe 3 Six paper rollers Note The paper rollers are all the same any of the rollers can be used in any of the replacement locations If you do not have an optional 2 000 sheet input unit you will need only four of the rollers EN Installing consumables 113 AO SH el Sy I g pa 114 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance To replace the fuser WARNING The fuser is very hot and can cause burns Turn the printer off and allow the printer to cool for at least 30 minutes before beginning this procedure 1 If an optional multi bin mailbox is attached to the printer pull the mailbox away from the printer Open the lower door on the
361. to unhook the strap holding the door to the left rear cover callout 1 Figure 83 Left door and strap EN Doors and covers 213 3 Remove 11 screws callout 2 l i lt 4 mg a Screws on left rear cover 4 Pull the cover to the left and off 214 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Removing the left upper cover 1 Remove the left rear cover see page 213 2 Remove 2 screws on the rail callout 1 one screw is on the left side of the cover and the other is located inside the front cover Figure 85 Screws on upper left door 3 Remove the door EN Doors and covers 215 Removing the left lower cover 1 Open the left lower cover 2 Push the spring loaded stopper hinges callout 1 towards the printer and down to release them i i VNENUN Mi ZINN OS ARMAS Figure 86 Stopper ings on lower left cover 3 Move the cover to a 45 degree angle and lift the right side out 4 Slide the cover to the left and up to release the left side 216 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Note Figure 87 EN Right covers and doors Removing the right upper cover assembly Tray 1 is part of the right upper door Take the tray off and save it if you are replacing the whole assembly see page 237 The new assembly does not include the tray 1 Remove the rear cover see page 222 2 Open the right upper door 3 On the right side of the door unplug 4 connectors that lead thr
362. toner cartridge 173 color toner level 145 color toner lever 146 173 defective or stuck 379 density 148 242 density error 324 face down tray delivery 166 fusing delivery 166 173 178 179 last page tray 1 170 171 173 last page tray 2 168 173 left cover 173 level sensors tray 3 173 lifting plate position 171 173 names and locations 172 not detecting toner cartridge 345 OHT overhead transparency 167 171 173 paper tray 1 173 paper level tray 2 173 EN EN sensors continued paper out tray 2 173 paper out tray 3 173 photo paper 241 pick up unit cover 173 pick up unit paper 166 173 registration roller paper 166 167 171 173 reverse stepper motor multi bin mailbox 190 separation 173 temperature error 323 temperature humidity 147 test 83 thermistor 173 thermo switch 173 toner lock 227 top face down output bin delivery 173 178 179 top face down output bin paper full 173 179 tray 1 paper 171 tray 1 paper width 170 tray 2 173 tray 3 173 sensors 2 000 sheet input unit names and locations 181 paper entry 182 paper exit 182 paper size 182 paper tray empty 182 paper tray raised 182 test 432 vertical transfer unit VTU closed 182 sensors multi bin mailbox delivery rollers extended 190 left face up output bin full 190 names and locations 189 paper bin empty 190 paper bin full 190 paper delivered to bin 190 paper delivered to head 190 paper entry 190 separation discharge high volta
363. transport belt and the metal tape until it reaches the delivery head assembly Paper path Figure 68 illustrates the components of the multi bin mailbox paper path 1 8 SS AC 11 12 SI A Figure 68 Multi bin mailbox paper path EN Multi bin mailbox 191 1 Face up bin 11 Delivery head line 2 Delivery head motor 12 Metal tape 3 Blind cover 13 Delivery head assembly 4 Bin 1 14 Eject rollers 5 Face down bins 15 Metal tape 6 Bin8 16 Transport belt 7 Controller board PCA 17 Paper 8 Flipper assembly 18 Magnetic strip 9 Input paper guide 19 Transport belt motor 10 Home position Duplexer The duplexer is installed below the fusing assembly The back side of the paper is printed first Then the paper is turned over and fed back through the paper path to print on the front side The duplexer supports variable engine input speeds Printer timing The formatter PCA and controller board PCA share information during the printer operation This information consists of printer status command and dot image data Figures 69 through 74 show the timing of different printer events 192 Chapter 5 Theory of operation EN U01 E 0 BLU OR U01 6 01 95 19A9H NGAY U0I e o paads mog s919 4 AN B3 ed 0919 Z eimeiedwar AGS ed MI lag Paw MG Paw MG 0 IEEE PABABA EEE LEE EEE BABABA BEBE HOBE BABABA BAHA 14611 ySel7 AGLS LIVAA
364. trol panel layout 0 66 MENU MAPS xa kana KA KAG aney BANA bad ee LAGA MG Mada wae 68 Selecting the display language 84 Installing the consumables AA AA 85 Configuring input trays aa 90 Verifying the printer is installed correctly 92 Verifying DIMM installation cece eee 93 Paper handling accessory status LEDSs 94 Contents 3 4 Printer maintenance Chapter contents Cleaning procedures Printer consumables Installing consumables 5 Theory of operation Chapter contents Introduction Color theory Image formation Consumable detection mechanisms Electrical systems Mechanical systems Paper path EPH controller board 2 000 sheet input unit Multi bin mailbox Duplexer aa a Printer timing 6 Removal and replacement Chapter contents Introduction nananana Maintenance units Doors and covers Top assemblies Front assemblies Left assemblies Right assemblies Rear assemblies 2 000 sheet input unit Multi bin mailbox 4 Contents EN
365. umables For consumable replacement specifications see page 105 Table 7 Consumable storage specifications Normal maximum of 2 5 years 0 to 35 C 32 to 95 F Temperature Severe maximum of 18 days High 35 to 40 C 95 to 104 F Low O to 20 C 32 to 4 F Maximum 40 to 15 C 104 to 59 F within 3 minutes temperature 20 to 25 C 4 to 77 F within 3 minutes change rate Normal maximum of 2 5 years 35 to 85 RH Humidity Severe maximum of 18 days High 85 to 95 RH Low 10 to 35 RH Atmospheric 460 to 760 mm Hg pressure EN Specifications 23 Site requirements General guidelines Locating and placing the printer correctly are important in maintaining the performance level that has been set at the factory In particular be sure to adhere to the environmental specifications listed in this chapter The following are recommendations for locating and placing the printer e Install in a well ventilated dust free area e Install on a hard level surface e Install where the temperature and humidity do not change abruptly Do not install near water sources humidifiers air conditioners refrigerators or other major appliances e Do not expose the printer to direct sunlight dust open flames or ammonia fumes e Install the printer away from walls or other objects There must be enough space around the printer for proper access and ventilation see figure 1 on page 25 Install the pri
366. unit description 180 182 illustration 428 removing 281 power supply multi bin mailbox 289 power on self test POST error 333 power up sequence test multi bin mailbox 435 preconditioning exposure 124 131 preprinted media See media prepunched media See media primary charging 132 primary colors 126 print dark yellow 413 faint 409 jobs See jobs mottled or splotchy 408 EN EN print continued smeared 404 speckled 403 speeds 20 print server accessories 19 connecting to network 62 model included with 19 network connection 62 printer covers and doors 452 dimensions 22 front view 35 messages 316 model and serial numbers 34 personality could not be run 351 personality does not exist 353 rear view 36 serial number 80 stand 35 supplies 447 verifying installation 92 weight 22 printer command language PCL See PCL printer command language printer control language PCL See PCL printer command language printer control panel See control panel printer drivers color selection 385 handled by HP Driver Distribution Center 53 obtaining 50 request form 52 printer hard disk See hard disk printing color test pages 79 configuration page 71 353 continuous configuration pages 71 demonstration page 353 ElO pages 71 event log 71 353 file directories 71 font list 71 354 LaserJet demonstration 71 menu maps 71 PostScript errors 75 Printing Menu 76 problems See errors troubleshooting process colors 127 proce
367. uration page that was printed before the formatter board was removed e Serial number e Formatter number e Page counts if the controller board is being replaced as well e Transfer kit count percentage of life remaining e Fuser kit count percentage of life remaining e Engine settings Note The last two digits of the engine settings might vary from those found on the sticker inside the front cover This difference is due to check sum variation and is acceptable For information on setting each of these values see table 21 on page 80 EN Left assemblies 231 Figure 101 Figure 102 Internal printer hard disk DN model If the internal printer hard disk needs to be repaired or replaced all data stored on the hard disk will be lost Download fonts and other information as necessary 1 Remove the formatter board from the printer see page 230 2 Unplug 1 connector callout 1 3 Onthe back side of the formatter board release the 2 tabs with your fingers callout 2 Back side of formatter board 4 With the other hand pull the hard disk out from the other side 232 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN CAUTION Figure 103 EN Take care not to damage the plastic retaining clips on the hard disk Feeder assembly The feeder assembly is located inside the left upper door 1 Open the front door and the left lower cover Remove the left rear cover See page 213 2 3 Remove the left upper
368. using the printer internal diagnostics in conjunction with the troubleshooting procedures in chapter 7 Once a faulty part is located repair is generally accomplished by assembly level replacement of the field replaceable units Some mechanical assemblies can be repaired at the subassembly level PCA component replacement is not supported by Hewlett Packard Parts and supplies Field replaceable and accessory part numbers are found in chapter 8 of this manual Use only accessories specifically designed for this printer Accessories can be ordered from an authorized service or support provider For a list of available accessories and their part numbers see page 445 Replacement parts can be ordered from HP s Service Materials Organization SMO or Support Materials Europe SME Ordering information The following table lists information for ordering from SME SMO and HP Distribution Center HPD Table 10 Ordering information Organization Address Phone SMO Service Materials Hewlett Packard Company 1 800 227 8164 Organization Support Materials Organization U S only 8050 Foothills Blvd Roseville CA 95678 Europe SME Support Materials Hewlett Packard Company 49 7031 14 2253 Support Materials Europe Wolf Hirth Strasse 33 D 7030 B blingen Germany Center HPD HP Distribution 805 257 5565 805 257 6995 Fax EN Introduction 49 Obtaining related documentation and software To or
369. ut 1 Density sensor 3 Remove 3 screws from the sensor callout 2 4 Unplug 1 connector and remove the sensor 242 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Paper pick up assembly The paper pick up assembly is located inside the right upper cover assembly x ESD A O N Remove trays 2 and 3 Remove the right upper cover assembly see page 217 Remove the right lower cover assembly see page 221 Remove 4 screws one in each corner of the paper pick up assembly callout 1 and pull the assembly out approximately 5 cm 2 in Figure 113 Paper pick up assembly 5 6 Unplug 1 connector on the right that goes to the paper pick up PCA on the right side of the paper pick up assembly Lift out the paper pick up assembly Notes on reinstalling EN Plug in the connector and reroute the wires before replacing the assembly Right assemblies 243 Tray 1 pick up assembly The tray 1 pick up assembly is located on the right upper door 1 Open the right upper door 2 Remove the screw on the right side of the assembly callout 1 Figure 114 Paper pick up assembly 3 Remove the cover on the right side of the assembly callout 2 244 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN 4 Unplug the 4 connectors on the right side callout 3 Note Two connectors are plugged into the controller board and two connectors are inline connectors It might be easier to disconnect the connectors from the rear o
370. ut 1 Figure 143 Left cover removal 3 Pull out on the top of the cover and then lift up on the right side of the cover to clear the retaining tabs that are along the bottom edge callout 2 4 Pull out on the lower left corner to release the plastic retainer tab that secures that corner of the cover to the chassis Notes on reinstalling e Replace the left side first e Tilt the right side down and toward the chassis to place the lower retaining tabs over the chassis rail callout 2 274 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Vertical transfer unit VTU Remove the VTU to access the left side of the unit and the paper path mechanisms 1 Unplug the power cord and the C link interface cables from the 2 000 sheet input unit Open the VTU Rotate the 2 plastic safety catches on the VTU hinges towards the unit to the open position callout 1 Figure 144 Vertical transfer unit VTU WARNING Do not release the safety catches from the open position while the VTU is removed The springs on the safety catches are very strong and can cause injury 4 Unplug 2 connectors callout 2 5 Remove 2 screws one on the inner side of each safety catch EN 2 000 sheet input unit 275 6 Pull the door halfway closed then lift the unit straight up to clear the metal locating tabs on the chassis Notes on reinstalling e Before tightening the screws ensure that the metal locating tabs are in place WARNI
371. vailable weekdays from 8 00 am until 8 00 pm Eastern Standard Time French and English speaking customer support representatives are available to answer questions EN Warranty Note EN The warranty outlines specific legal rights There might also be other rights which vary from area to area Refer to the user s guide for further warranty information Installation Installation by service personnel is optional with the HP Color LaserJet 8500 and 8500 N models and is included with the 8500 DN model Installation can be arranged through the service center Toner cartridge information The toner cartridge is designed to simplify replacement of the major consumable parts The toner cartridge contains part of the printing mechanism and a supply of toner For best results always use a toner cartridge before the expiration date stamped on the toner cartridge box Refilled toner cartridges While HP does not prohibit the use of refilled toner cartridges during the warranty period or while the printer is under a maintenance contract it is not recommended for the following reasons e Repairs resulting from the use of refilled toner cartridges are not covered under HP warranty or maintenance contracts e HP has no control or process to ensure that a refilled toner cartridge functions at the high level of reliability of a new HP LaserJet toner cartridge HP also cannot predict what the long term reliability effect on the print
372. vanced functions 78 PCL font information 76 PCL symbol sets 77 Power Save mode 75 printer personalities 75 wide A4 77 conformity declarations of 40 connecting cables 60 printer to network 62 consumables installing 85 location 104 low and out messages 75 ordering 51 445 parts list 446 recycling 105 replace frequency 105 storage specifications 23 user replaceable 205 contents of box 59 continuous configuration pages printing 71 continuous test message 341 EN EN control panel display language 84 illustration and description 66 LEDs 66 location 35 menu maps 68 messages 316 removing 223 control panel overlay changing 65 parts list 448 controller electronic error 332 RAM error 330 controller boards 2 000 sheet input unit 182 279 EPH external paper handling 180 188 multi bin mailbox 190 192 299 printer 253 copies configuring 76 corona wire See transfer charger counts total color pages printed 80 total pages duplexed 81 total pages printed 80 Courier default settings 77 covers front 208 front right 209 left lower 216 left rear 213 left upper 215 location 206 parts list 452 457 rear 222 right lower assembly 221 right rear 220 right upper assembly 217 right upper subassembly 219 top 211 covers 2 000 sheet input unit back 273 front 272 left 274 parts list 492 right 276 covers multi bin mailbox blind 192 290 front and back 286 287 top 288 CR cold reset message 341 paper size 81 C
373. w EN Note Note EN Configuring media type and size Configuring the media type is beneficial for several reasons Configuring the media type prevents printing on the wrong and possibly more expensive media lf a user changes the type of media in an input tray other users can still print on the correct media The printer automatically adjusts its print soeed to accommodate special media such as card stock labels and transparencies These adjustments give the highest quality output saving time and resources If the media type Is not set correctly then the printer might not print on the correct media or at the correct speed for the media type which can result in poor print quality or excessively slow printing Press MENU until PAPER HANDLING MENU appears on the printer control panel display Press ITEM until TRAY lt number gt TYPE appears on the display Press VALUE until the correct media type appears on the display Press SELECT to save the selection An asterisk appears to the right of the selection Tray 2 tray 3 and the optional 2 000 sheet input unit automatically sense the media size To configure the media size for tray 1 in CASSETTE mode continue with step 5 Otherwise proceed to step 8 Press ITEM until TRAY 1 SIZE appears on the printer control panel display Press VALUE until the media size appears on the display Press SELECT to save the selection An asterisk appea
374. wdriver 6 inch 152 mm shaft Phillips 2 magnetized screwdriver 6 inch 152 mm shaft T 10 I 15 and T 20 Torx driver 6 inch 152 mm shaft Flat blade 2 screwdriver Small pair of needle nose pliers ESD strap Penlight Can of compressed air If you are using a multi speed screwdriver ensure that you have a torque limiter Ensure that you have a Phillips screwdriver and not a Posidriv screwdriver CAUTION To install a self tapping screw first turn it counterclockwise to align it with the existing thread pattern Then carefully turn it clockwise to tighten it Do not over tighten If a self tapping screw hole becomes Stripped either repair the screw hole or replace the affected assembly 204 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement EN Maintenance units The user replaces the following maintenance units as part of periodic maintenance Chapter 4 explains the maintenance procedures Color toner cartridges e Transfer charger Black toner cartridge Cleaning roller Imaging drum Charcoal filter Air filters Fuser Transfer drum Paper rollers Transfer belt The printer keeps track of use on some of its user replaceable parts Because maintenance unit life is tracked by the formatter board by page count swapping maintenance units between printers might Cause a misrepresentation of maintenance unit life values EN Maintenance units 205 Doors and covers The following figures show the orientation of the printer and paper handling ac
375. whether the media is packaged or unpackaged Do not store printed documents in vinyl folders or expose the documents to petroleum based solvents Media requirements 27 Media capacity and sizes for input trays The following table lists the types and sizes of media supported by each input tray For best results use HP LaserJet paper or conventional white copier paper The media should be of good quality and free of cuts nicks tears spots loose particles dust wrinkles voids perforations and curled or bent edges For a complete list of media specifications see the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide Table 8 Media capacity and sizes for input trays Media size and Media type orientation Media weight Maximum capacity Tray 1 Paper 11 by 17 in portrait 16 to 58 Ib 100 sheets of Plain JIS B4 portrait 60 to 216 g m bond 7 20 Ib 75 g m bond Preprinted A3 portrait Letterhead A4 portrait Limit to media fill mark on Prepunched A5 portrait the media width guides Bond Custom min 99 by Recycled 190 mm 3 90 by 7 49 in Color portrait Card stock Custom max 304 by Heavy more 469 mm 11 98 by 18 48 than 28 lb in portrait 105 g m Executive portrait Glossy ISO B5 portrait JIS B4 portrait JIS B5 portrait Letter landscape Legal landscape Envelopes B5 portrait Maximum 24 Ib 90 g m Approximately 10 C5 portrait bond Commercial 10 Com10 Limit to media fil
376. y Tray 2 assembly Figure 227 Table 64 Tray 2 assembly Ref Qty Part number Description Tray 2 1 RF5 1484 000CN 26 Plate end Illustrations and parts lists 475 EN Paper pick up assembly Ke Figure 228 Paper pick up assembly 1 of 3 476 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams EN Figure 229 Paper pick up assembly 2 of 3 EN Illustrations and parts lists 477 Paper pick up assembly 3 of 3 Figure 230 EN 478 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 65 Paper pick up assembly parts Ref Description Part number Qty Paper pick up assembly RG5 3132 000CN 1 20 Roller feed RF5 1834 000CN 1 21 Roller pick up RF5 1835 000CN 2 48 Flag paper sensing RB1 6557 000CN 1 49 Spring torsion RB1 6558 020CN 1 51 Arm sensor RG5 1859 000CN 1 52 Photo interrupter IC TLP1230 WG8 0291 000CN 1 87 Motor pick up M5 RH7 1350 000CN 1 103 PCA paper pick up RG5 1860 000CN 1 501 Screw tapping pan head M4 x 10 XB4 7401 007CN 6 EN Illustrations and parts lists 479 Registration frame assembly g PS1802 g 7 31802 lt a PS1801 y J1801 F J17 J15 Figure 231 Registration frame assembly Table 66 Registration frame assembly parts Ref Description Part number Qty Registr
377. y is on and ready The accessory is on and ready Solid amber The accessory is experiencing a The accessory is experiencing a hardware malfunction Flashing amber The accessory has a media jam or a page needs to be removed from the 2 000 sheet input unit even if the page is not jammed The vertical transfer unit VTU might be open The accessory has a media jam or a page needs to be removed from the multi bin mailbox even if the page is not jammed The accessory is not correctly attached to the printer Off The printer might be in Power Save The printer might be in Power mode Press GO Save mode Press GO The accessory is not receiving The accessory is not receiving power Check both the power power Check both the power supply and the power cables supply and the power cables EN Paper handling accessory status LEDs 95 96 Chapter 3 Operational overview EN EN Printer maintenance Chapter contents Cleaning procedures 0 99 Cleaning the post charger unit 99 Cleaning the density sensor 100 Cleaning the transfer charger 101 Cleaning the waste toner tray 102 Printer consumables 0 a 104 Replacement frequencies 105 Installing consumables 00 4 106 Toner cartridges 2 0 ce ees 106 Transfer kit 0 ee eee 106 TUM Kile cond Sect eg bees Bee tea oe ee

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

USER`S GUIDE  SMARTVIEWER4.2.0  Yaesu VR-120D Communications Receiver Page 1 of 2  http:/twww.sct.gob.mx!Uploadslmedia/1 4.2. Marcas en el pavimento  Samsung E1260 Manual de Usuario  hydrofuge anti-corrosion  GX形ダクタイル鉄管用 管端防食キャップ  Technics SC-EH680 Stereo System User Manual  Manuale Utente  Descargar Manual - Siisa  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file